C1.Win.C1Input.4.8 Verify the environment to get whether the component is in design-time. true if it is in design-time; otherwise false. In DesignTime, because of IDE bugs, some component are not created with DesigntimeLicenseContext. For example, when drag a control from Win Forms DataSource tool window, or use a web control in a ASP.NET Template. This may cause the control do run-time license validation and found that there is no license. To resolve this problem, we will check the environment and decide whether to do design-time license validation again. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Contains the resource for PowerToolsLicenseProvider Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class. Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class. Gets the Error icon for license dialog. Gets the Info icon for license dialog. Gets the Warning icon for license dialog. Gets the C1 icon for license dialog. Gets the localized string. The name of the string. It could be a const value in . The localized string. Gets the localized string. The name of the string. It could be a const value in . The data used in the string. The localized string. Get the file version description of the specified assembly. The whose file version description should be get. A indicates the file version description of the specified assembly. Get the name of the specified assembly. The whose name should be get. A indicates the name of the specified assembly. Please use this method to get assembly name. It is because that the Assembly.GetName method need FileIO permission. Format the product key as "xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx". A indicates the original product key which is a sequence of 24 digits. A readable text indicates the product key. Represents the kind of license dialog. Info dialog. It is shown for a trial license. Warning dialog. It is shown for a trial license which is expired. Error dialog. It is shown for an invalid license or other errors. Represents the target web site for the link in license dialog. None target. Goto web site http://developer.mescius.com/support/portal/. Goto web site http://developer.mescius.com/componentone/. Goto web site http://developer.mescius.com/pricing/componentone/. Goto web site http://developer.mescius.com/componentone/docs/license/online-license/overview.html. Goto web site https://developer.mescius.com/sales/componentone-faq/. Represents a license provider of a Windows Forms PowerTools component. Define interface for IFELanguage com object. Represents the IFELanguageWrapper class. Indicates the GUID string forthe IFELanguage. Initializes the class. Handles the ApplicationExit event of the Application control. An object indicates the event sender. The instance containing the event data. Creates the IFE lan. A string value indicates the ime mode. A object indicate the IFELanguage com object created. Gets the conversion mode caps. The IME mode. Gets the conversion list. The IME mode. The request. The mode. The STR input. This class define the internal code access authorization for GrapeCity product. Validate whether the calling assembly is an authorization assembly. If the calling assembly has same PublicKeyToken with this main assembly, we think this assembly is a authorization by now. So the snk file is very important If hacker get the snk file, then he can forge an authorization assembly. I think the pfx file is more secure. The calling assembly. eg, "System.Reflection.Assembly.GetCallingAssembly()". Return a bool value. true is an authorization assembly; otherwise,false. Determines how to handle the IME candidate window. Clears the composition string and set the status to no composition string. Converts the composition string and show the candidate window. Converts the composition string and pick the first in the candidate window. This delegate enables asynchronous calls for getting ime is converting status. Represents a simple wrapper of window handle. Defines a virtual windows to help the operation of the . This class only send message to the IMessageProcessor.PerProcess methods. Indicates the owner GcIme component. Initializes a new instance of the class. An component which is the owner of the wrapper. Gets the hook handle from the FactWindow. Returns the hook handle. Dispatch the message to the processsor. A indicates the window message. Return a indicate whether this message should be blocked. Defines a class used to convert ImeMode to ImeConversionMode or convert ImeConversionMode to ImeMode. Defines a Japanese conversion table. Defines a Korean conversion table. Defines a Chinese conversion table. Defines a empty conversion table. Gets the conversion table by current input language. The conversion table based on the language. Saves the conversion bits. Gets the conversion bigs. Initializes a new instance of the class. Defines the bits needed to be set. Defines the bits needed to be cleared. Save the data of the extended properties. Defines the default value of the . Save the data of the extended property. Save the data of the extended property. Save the data of the extended property. Save the data of the extended property. Save the data of the extended property. Save the data of the extended property. Overridden, check whether the given object equals this instance. Declares the "==" operator. Declares the "!=" operator. Gets the hash code of this object. An int indicates the hash code of the ime. Initialize an instance of class. Initializes a new instance of the class. The dummy1. Please set it to null. The dummy2. Please set it to null. These two parameters is used to differentiate the internl constructor from the pulic one. Initialize component. Save all the data of extended properites of controls. Save furigana service - associated control references. Save the virtual window used to access with the Saves the cached the ime sentence mode. Saves the ime device. Caches the result string event args for firing event. The WM_USER constant is used by applications to help define private messages for use by private window classes, usually of the form WM_USER+X, where X is an integer value. The default alphabet to reading string mappings. The user-set alphabet to reading string mappings. Gets a value indicates whether IME is available for the current keyboard layout. if the IME is available; otherwise, . Checks whether there's any IME associated to the specified window. A value indicating the window handle. if the window has an IME context associated with it; otherwise, . Gets a value indicating whether ime is converting in current Application. if ime is converting in current Application; otherwise, . This property is used for retrieve the state of IME converting status. Gets the IME is converting on the focused window. A value, if ime is converting, otherwise, . Gets whether ime is converting in given form. A object specify the target form for checking the ime converting state. A value, if ime is converting, otherwise, . Specifies whether this object can provide its extender properties to the specified object. The object to receive the extender properties. if this object can provide extender properties to the specified object; otherwise, . Retrieves the IME sentence mode associated with the specified control. A , the IME sentence mode is associated on it. An indicates the IME sentence mode. With the GetImeSentenceMode method, you can retrieve the for any control. To change the setting, use the method. The control is . Associates the IME sentence mode with the specified control. A , the IME sentence mode is associated on it. An indicates the IME sentence mode. You can also use this method to specifying the Ime sentence mode for a control. To get the information about Ime sentence mode, use the method. The control is . The value isn't a valid item. Indicates whether the value of extended property ImeSentenceMode should be serialized. A indicates the associated control. If the ImeSentenceMode property should be serialized, return ture, otherwise return false. Reset the value of extended property ImeSentenceMode associated to special control to default. A indicates the associated control. Retrieves the AutoShowSoftKayboard associated with the specified control. A , the AutoShowSoftKayboard is associated on it. A indicates whether open soft keyboard when control get focus or lose. With the GetAutoShowSoftKeyboard method, you can retrieve the setting about show soft keyboard automatically or not for any control. To change the setting, use the method.
This method is obsoleted in this version.
The control is .
Associates the AutoShowSoftKayboard with the specified control. A , the AutoShowSoftKayboard is to be associated on it. A indicates whether open soft keyboard when control get focus or lose. You can also use this method to specifying whether to show the soft keyboard automatically or not for a control. To get the information about showing the soft keyboard automatically, use the method.
This method is obsoleted in this version.
The control is .
Retrieves the associated with the specified control. A , the is associated on it. A value indicates what is the output manner of the reading string. With the GetReadingStringOutput method, you can retrieve the value of for any control. To change the setting, use the method. The control is . Associates the ReadingStringOutPut with the specified control. A , the is to be associated on it. A value indicates what is the output manner of the reading string. You can also use this method to specifying the reading string output for a control. To get the information about the reading string output, use the method. The control is . The control isn't valid. Indicates whether the value of extended property ReadingStringOutput should be serialized. A indicates the associated control. If the ReadingStringOutput property should be serialized, return ture, otherwise return false. Reset the value of extended property ReadingStringOutput associated to special control to default. A indicates the associated control. Retrieves the CausesImeEvent associated with the specified control. A , the CausesImeEvent is associated on it. A indicates whether the control cause the ime event. With the GetCausesImeEvent method, you can retrieve the setting about enable to raise the event or not for any control. To change the setting, use the method. The result string event will never occurs if this property is not set to on the control that handling IME input. The control is . Associates the CausesImeEvent with the specified control. A , CausesImeEvent is to be associated on it. A indicates whether the control cause the ime event. You can also use this method to specifying whether to causes the Ime event or not for a control. To get the information about whether to cause the Ime events, use the method. The control is . Gets candidate list from a specified reading string. A string which represents the reading string. A string array which represents the candidate list. Returns string[0] if readingString is or . User can retrieve a array from the candidate list by using this method. The control is . Get reading strings from a specified result string. A string which represents the result string. A string array which represents the reading strings. Returns string[0] if resultString is or User can retrieve a array from the candidate list by using this method. Converts the specified string and determines how the candidate window should appear. A value to be convert. A enumeration that represents how to process the candidate window. User can use this method to convert a string by a . Converts the specified string and determines how the candidate window should appear. A the convert based on it. A value to be convert. A enumeration that represents how to process the candidate window. User can use this method to convert a string by a for on a specified control. Retrieves the kana mode setting associated with the specified control. A , the is associated on it. A value indicates the format of reading string output will convert to. With the GetKanaMode method, you can retrieve the for any control. To change the setting, use the method. The control is . Associates the kana mode setting associated to the specified control. A , the is associated on it. A value indicates the format of reading string output will convert to. You can also use this method to specifying the kana mode for a control. To get the information about the kana mode, use the method. The control is . The value isn't a valid item. Dispose the unmanged and manged resource. A indicates whther the dispoing action is not caused by finalizer. Call when you are finished using the . The Dispose method leaves the in an unusable state. After calling , you must release all references to the so the garbage collector can reclaim the memory that the was occupying. Updates the IME sentence mode when control has focus and change the ImeSentenceMode of it or its parent. The focused control. A value, if set to we will cache the IME sentence mode before set new one, otherwise, . Retrieves the IME sentence mode associated with the specified control. A , the IME sentence mode is associated on it. An indicates the IME sentence mode. Addes a control into the data. A indicates the associated control. Attaches events for a specified control and its child controls. The specified . Removes a control from the data. A indicates the associated control. Detaches events for a specified control and its child controls. The specified . Processes the GotFocus message of the associated control. An object indicate the control that send the event. An indicates the message. Processes the LostFocus message of the associated control. An object indicate the control that send the event. An indicates the message. Processes the CompositionChanged event of the ime. An object indicate the control that send the event. An indicates the arguments of the event. Recieves the Opening of the status window. An object indicates the sender of the event. An indicates the arguments of the event. Receives the Closing of the status window. An object indicates the sender of the event. An indicates the arguments of the event. Start up the controling of sentence mode of ime device. Finish the controling of sentence mod of the ime device. Start up the controling of soft keyoard. Finish the controling of the softKeyoard. Handles the Disposed event of the TargetControl control. The source of the event. The instance containing the event data. Set the special sentence mode to ime device. An indicates the ime device. An indicates the sentence mode. Get the sentence mode from the ime device. An indicates the ime device. An indicates the sentence mode. Gets the IME mode from the ime device.. A indicates the ime device. The ImeMode status. Sets the ime mode to the ime device. A indicates the ime device. A indicates the ime mode. Converts the string based on the required KanaMode. The text need to convert, . The kana mode to which is want to convert. An const char value indicates the SBCS space character. An const char value indicates the DBCS space character. Occurs when there is a result string available during the input process by IME. This event is raised when there is a result string during IME input in any input controls on the form. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Retrieves the input scope setting associated with the specified control. A , the is associated on it. One of the enumeration value, indicates the input scope of the associated control. With the GetInputScope method, you can retrieve the for any control. To change the setting, use the method. The control is . Associates the input scope setting associated with the specified control. A , the is associated on it. One of the enumeration value, indicates the input scope of the associated control. With the SetInputScope method, you can change the for any control. To retrieve the setting, use the method. The control is . The value isn't a valid item. Resets the value of extended property ImeSentenceMode associated with the specified control to default. A indicates the associated control. Determines how the IME should handle sentences. Inherit the IME sentence mode of the parent control. Do not control the IME sentence mode. Use phrase information to predict the next character. The IME uses plural clause information to carry out conversion processing. The IME uses conversation mode. This is useful for chat applications. No information for sentence. A class is used to control the output behavior of the reading string. Gets a empty output. Saves the data of the property. Saves the data of the property. Saves the data of the property. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the target object. A controls the output behaviors. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the target object. A controls the output behaviors. A value, indatates whether alphabet character should be converted to reading. Gets or sets a control used to receive the output. A indicates the target control. Gets or sets an object used to receieve the output string. An object indicates the output target. To make sure the string could be receieved, the output target object should either have a public property named 'Text' or 'Value'. In addition, a string typed property is valid. Gets or sets the output mode. A controls the output behaviors. Gets or sets whether or not enable converting alphabets to its reading. A bool value, indicates the alphabets will convert to its reading, according to the default mapping table or user defined mapping rules; otherwise, . Indicates whether this instance and a specified object are equal. Another object to compare to. if obj and this instance are the same type and represent the same value; otherwise, . Declares the "==" operator. Declares the "!=" operator. Gets the hash code of this object. An indicates the hash code of the ime. Defines the type converter for the class. Returns whether this converter can convert an object to the given destination type using the context. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type to which you want to convert. if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, . Converts the given value object to the specified destination type using the specified context and arguments. An that provides a format context. A that provides the language to convert to. The to convert. The to which to convert the value. An Object that represents the converted value. The destinationType is a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic). Returns whether changing a value on this object requires a call to System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter.CreateInstance(System.Collections.IDictionary) to create a new value, using the specified context. An System.ComponentModel.ITypeDescriptorContext that provides a format context. true if changing a property on this object requires a call to System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter.CreateInstance(System.Collections.IDictionary) to create a new value; otherwise, false. Creates an instance of the type that this System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter is associated with, using the specified context, given a set of property values for the object. An System.Collections.IDictionary of new property values. An System.ComponentModel.ITypeDescriptorContext that provides a format context. An System.Object representing the given System.Collections.IDictionary, or null if the object cannot be created. This method always returns null. Returns a collection of properties for the type of array specified by the value parameter, using the specified context and attributes. An that provides a format context. An that specifies the type of array for which to get properties. An array of type that is used as a filter. A with the properties that are exposed for this data type, or a null reference if there are no properties. Returns whether this object supports properties, using the specified context. An that provides a format context. if should be called to find the properties of this object; otherwise, . Indicates the output mode of the reading string. Adds the new text at the end of the old text. Replaces all text of the target control. Maintain the reading string output automatically. Provides the data for the ResultString event. The ResultString takes place when there has been changes made in the IME conversion window. Indicates the reading string. Indicates the source control that creates the reading string. Gets the control that creates the reading string. A indicates the source control. Gets the reading string. A value indicating the reading string. Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified reading string. A indicates the source control that creates the reading string. A string indicates the specified reading string. Stores the alpha-reading string mapping data. Initializes a new instance of the struct. The alphabet. The reading. Gets the alphabet. The alphabet. Gets the reading. The reading. Specifies the input scope name which modifies how input from alternative input methods is interpreted. The text input pattern for alphanumeric full-width characters. The text input pattern for alphanumeric half-width characters. The default handling of input commands. The text input pattern for a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) email address. The text input pattern for Hanja characters. The text input pattern for Hangul full-width characters. The text input pattern for Hangul half-width characters. The text input pattern for the Hiragana writing system. The text input pattern for full-width Katakana characters. The text input pattern for half-width Katakana characters. The text input pattern for a number. The text input pattern for a full-width number. The text input patternf or a search query. The text input pattern for a telephone number. The text input pattern for a Uniform Resource Locator (URL). Represents a CollectionBase class, which is a base class. Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class containing the elements of the specified source collection. A with which to initialize the collection. Initializes a new instance of the class containing the specified array of objects. An array of objects with which to initialize the collection. Gets or sets the at the specified index in the collection. A at each valid index. The zero-based index of the collection to access. The index parameter is outside the valid range of indexes for the collection. Gets a value indicating whether this instance is locked. true if this instance is locked; otherwise, false. A object that indicates the handler of the CollectionChanging event. A object that indicates the handler of the CollectionChanged event. Adds the specified to the collection. The index at which the new element was inserted. The to add. Copies the elements of the specified array to the end of the collection. An array of type containing the objects to add to the collection. Adds the contents of another to the end of the collection. A containing the objects to add to the collection. Adds the contents of another to the end of the collection. A containing the objects to add to the collection. Gets a value that indicates whether the collection contains the specified . true if the collection contains the specified object; otherwise, false. The to search for in the collection. Copies the collection objects to a one-dimensional instance beginning at the specified index. The one-dimensional that is the destination of the values copied from the collection. The index of the array at which to begin inserting. The array parameter is null. The index parameter is less than the target array's minimum index. The destination array is multidimensional.-or- The number of elements in the is greater than the available space between the index of the target array specified by the index parameter and the end of the target array. Gets the index in the collection of the specified , if it exists in the collection. The index in the collection of the specified object, if found; otherwise, -1. The to locate in the collection. Inserts the specified into the collection at the specified index. The to insert. The zero-based index where the specified object should be inserted. Removes the specified from the collection. The to remove from the collection. The specified object is not found in the collection. Copies the elements of the specified array to the end of the collection. An array of type that contains the objects to add to the collection. Performs additional custom processes before inserting a new element array into the instance. The new value of the element array. Performs additional custom processes after inserting a new element array into the instance. The new value of the element. Performs additional custom processes before inserting a new element into the instance. The zero-based index at which to insert the value. The new value of the element at the index. Performs additional custom processes when removing an element from the instance. The zero-based index at which the value can be found. The value of the element to remove from the index. Performs additional custom processes before setting a value in the instance. The zero-based index at which oldValue can be found. The value to replace with newValue. The new value of the element at the index. Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of the instance. Performs additional custom processes after inserting a new element into the instance. The zero-based index at which to insert the value. The new value of the element at the index. Performs additional custom processes after removing an element from the instance. The zero-based index at which the value can be found. The value of the element to remove from the index. Performs additional custom processes after setting a value in the instance. The zero-based index at which oldValue can be found. The value to replace with newValue. The new value of the element at the index. Performs additional custom processes after clearing the contents of the instance. Raises the event. The instance that contains the event data. Raises the event. The instance that contains the event data. Performs additional custom processes when validating a value. The object to validate. value is null. The collection is locked. Locks this instance. Unlocks this instance. Represents a default predicate. A bool value. Determines whether the contains elements that match the conditions defined by the specified predicate. true if the contains one or more elements that match the conditions defined by the specified predicate; otherwise, false. Determines whether the contains elements that match the conditions defined by the specified predicate. true if the contains one or more elements that match the conditions defined by the specified predicate; otherwise, false. The delegate that defines the conditions of the elements to search for. match is null. Searches for a that matches the specified type TTarget, and returns the first occurrence within the entire collection. The first that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, if found; otherwise, the default value for type TTarget. Searches for a that matches the specified type TTarget and matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, and returns the first occurrence within the entire collection. The first that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, if found; otherwise, the default value for type TTarget. The delegate that defines the conditions of the to search for. match is null. Retrieves all the that match the specified type TTarget. A that contains all the that match the specified type TTarget and match the conditions defined by the specified predicate, if found; otherwise, an empty . Retrieves all the that match the specified type TTarget and match the conditions defined by the specified predicate. A that contains all the that match the specified type TTarget and match the conditions defined by the specified predicate, if found; otherwise, an empty . The delegate that defines the conditions of the to search for. match is null. Searches for an that matches the specified type TTarget and matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, and returns the last occurrence within the entire collection. The last that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, if found; otherwise, the default value for type TTarget. Searches for an that matches the specified type TTarget and matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, and returns the last occurrence within the entire collection. The last that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, if found; otherwise, the default value for type TTarget. The delegate that defines the conditions of the to search for. match is null. Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, and returns the zero-based index of the first occurrence within the entire . The zero-based index of the first occurrence of an element that matches the conditions defined by match, if found; otherwise, false. Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, and returns the zero-based index of the first occurrence within the entire . The zero-based index of the first occurrence of an element that matches the conditions defined by match, if found; otherwise, false. The delegate that defines the conditions of the element to search for. match is null. Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, and returns the zero-based index of the first occurrence within the range of elements in the that extends from the specified index to the last element. The zero-based index of the first occurrence of an element that matches the conditions defined by match, if found; otherwise, false. The zero-based starting index of the search. The delegate that defines the conditions of the element to search for. startIndex is outside the range of valid indexes for the . match is null. Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, and returns the zero-based index of the first occurrence within the range of elements in the that starts at the specified index and contains the specified number of elements. The zero-based index of the first occurrence of an element that matches the conditions defined by match, if found; otherwise, false. The number of elements in the section to search. The zero-based starting index of the search. The delegate that defines the conditions of the element to search for. count is less than 0. match is null. Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, and returns the zero-based index of the last occurrence within the entire . The zero-based index of the last occurrence of an element that matches the conditions defined by match, if found; otherwise, false. Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, and returns the zero-based index of the last occurrence within the entire . The zero-based index of the last occurrence of an element that matches the conditions defined by match, if found; otherwise, false. The delegate that defines the conditions of the element to search for. match is null. Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, and returns the zero-based index of the last occurrence within the range of elements in the that extends from the first element to the specified index. The zero-based index of the last occurrence of an element that matches the conditions defined by match, if found; otherwise, false. The zero-based starting index of the backward search. The delegate that defines the conditions of the element to search for. startIndex is outside the range of valid indexes for the . match is null. Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by the specified predicate, and returns the zero-based index of the last occurrence within the range of elements in the that contains the specified number of elements and ends at the specified index. The zero-based index of the last occurrence of an element that matches the conditions defined by match, if found; otherwise, false. The number of elements in the section to search. The zero-based starting index of the backward search. The delegate that defines the conditions of the element to search for. count is less than 0. match is null. Specifies how to position and align the attached element to the core element. This is used when alignment and positioning needs to take place between 2 elements, such as an image and a text. Usually, the text will become the core element with the image being the attached element in this case. The attached element is at the left of the core element. The attached element is at the left of the core element in horizontal, and two element's top edges have same vertial coordinate. The attached element is at the left of the core element in horizontal, and two element's center points have same vertial coordinate. The attached element is at the left of the core element in horizontal, and two element's bottom edges have same vertial coordinate. The attached element is at the top of the core element. The attached element is at the top of the core element in vertical, and two element's left edges have same horizontal coordinate. The attached element is at the top of the core element in vertical, and two element's center points have same horizontal coordinate. The attached element is at the top of the core element in vertical, and two element's right edges have same horizontal coordinate. The attached element is at the right of the core element. The attached element is at the right of the core element in horizontal, and two element's top edges have same vertial coordinate. The attached element is at the right of the core element in horizontal, and two element's center points have same vertial coordinate. The attached element is at the right of the core element in horizontal, and two element's bottom edges have same vertial coordinate. The attached element is at the bottom of the core element. The attached element is at the bottom of the core element in vertical, and two element's left edges have same horizontal coordinate. The attached element is at the bottom of the core element in vertical, and two element's center points have same horizontal coordinate. The attached element is at the bottom of the core element in vertical, and two element's right edges have same horizontal coordinate. Defines what kind of space is allowed in the text. No space character is allowed. Only SBCS space character is allowed. Only DBCS space char character allowed. Both DBCS and SBCS space characters are allowed. Specifies the type of 12-hour mode. 12-hour mode ranges from 00:00:00 to 11:59:59. 12-hour mode ranges from 01:00:00 to 12:59:59. Represents the different year digit type. The FourDigitYear mode ranges from 0000 - 9999. The TwoDigitYear mode ranges from 00 - 99. Specifies the validate type of input. No validate mode, fields behavior independent. Normal validate mode, fields behavior independent checking. Specifies the input validation type. Specifies no validate mode, field behavior is independent. Specifies normal validate mode, field behavior uses independent checking. Specifies extended validate mode, adjusts when needed. Defines the number spin mode. Spins by the field. Spins by the specified field value. Spins by digits. Defines the date spin increment mode. Specifies to spin using the field. Specifies to spin using the value of the specified field. Specifies how the literal in the content is handled in the clipboard. Inserting or replacing text includes or excludes literals. Specifies that literals are included. Specifies that literals are excluded. Represents how to wrap the line when it is beyond the width of the view. Does not wrap. Wraps the text by words. Wraps the text by characters. Specifes the edit mode. Use the members of this enumeration to control the INSERT or REPLACE mode of the editor. Indicates the Insert mode. Indicates the Overwrite mode. Indicates the fixed Insert mode. Indicates the fixed Overwrite mode. Highlights the type of text selection in the control. After getting focus, none, specified fields, or all text in the editor is highlighted. Specifies no highlight. Highlights the specified field. Highlights all the text. Specifies how the literals are displayed during user input. Always show the literals. The literals are post displayed as the user types. The literals are displayed before the user types. Specifies the key groups. Reresents the number input keys. Represents the memory operation keys. Represents the math operation keys. Represnts the reset keys. Represents the keys for editing. Represents the key for output. Represents the indicator keys. Specifies how the tab key works. The Tab key moves focus among controls or fields. Used to move focus between controls. Used to move the cursor position between fields in the control. Defines what kind of pattern is displayed in the DateEraField. Displays a full era name. Displays an abbreviated era name. Displays a symbol. Defines what kind of pattern is displayed. Displays a full month name. Displays an abbreviated month name. Displays a number. Defines what kind of pattern is displayed in the DateAmPmField. Displays a full AMDesignator or PMDesignator. Displays an abbreviated AMDesignator or PMDesignator. Defines what kind of pattern is displayed. Displays a full weekday name. Displays an abbreviated weekday name. Determines what sign the value is. Indicates not control sign of value. Indicates keep value positive. Indicates keep value negative. Represent the sign type. Represent there is none sign. eg, value == . Represent the value is positive. eg, value = +0. Represent the value is negative. eg, value = -0. Specifies the action for the left or right arrow key. The left or right key causes focus to be lost when the caret is at the left-most or right-most position. Specifies no action. Specifies to move to the previous control when pressing left or Ctrl+left keys on the first character of the control. Specifies to move to the next control when pressing right or Ctrl+right keys on the last character of the control. Specifies to move to the previous or next control when pressing the left or right or Ctrl+left or Ctrl+right keys on the first or last character of the control. Specifies the appearance of a control. Specifies that the control appears flat. Specifies that the control appears flat until the mouse pointer moves over it, at which point it appears three-dimensional. Specifies that the control appears three-dimensional. Specifies that the appearance of the control is determined by the user's operating system. Specifies that the control uses the active flat style. Specifies that the control uses the professional appearance style. Specifies that the control uses the office2007 blue appearance style. Specifies that the control uses the office2007 black appearance style. Specifies that the control uses the office2007 silver appearance style. Represents an enumeration that defines the ellipsis mode. Specifies no ellipsis trim. Specifies to trim the end of the string with characters. Specifies to trim the center of the string with charactors. Specifies the effect for how the text is drawn on a graphics surface, such as: Flat, 3D, and so on. Text is drawn with no 3D effect (default). Text is drawn with a heavy inset effect. Text is drawn with a heavy raised effect. Text is drawn with a light inset effect. Text is drawn with a light raised effect. Represents useful symbols. Specifies an empty symbol. Specifies an arrow. Specifies an arrow with an underline. Specifies an arrow with a double underline. Specifies an arrow with a thick underline. Specifies an arrow with an over line. Specifies an arrow with a double over line. Specifies an arrow with a thick over line. Specifies a double arrow. Specifies a dot. Specifies a zoom in symbol. Specifies a zoom out symbol. Represents the direction of the symbol. Specifies the left direction. Specifies the up direction. Specifies the right direction. Specifies the down direction. Specifies the side button position. Use the members of this enumeration to set the side buttons' position when both buttons are inside or outside of the control border. The left or right information is defined in the enumeration. Side buttons are at the left side and inside the border. Side buttons are at the left and outside the border. Side buttons are at the right and inside of the border. Side buttons are at the right and outside of the border. Specifies the visibility of side buttons. The members of this enumeration allow users to set the timing of spin and drop-down button visibility. Side buttons are not shown. Side buttons are always shown. Side buttons are shown when the button container gets focus. Specifies the direction in which a drop-down control is displayed relative to its parent control. Uses the mouse position to specify that the drop-down control is displayed above and to the left of its parent control. Uses the mouse position to specify that the drop-down control is displayed above and to the right of its parent control. Uses the mouse position to specify that the drop-down control is displayed below and to the left of its parent control. Uses the mouse position to specify that the drop-down control is displayed below and to the right of its parent control. Compensates for nested drop-down controls and specifies that the drop-down control is displayed to the left of its parent control. Compensates for nested drop-down controls and specifies that the drop-down control is displayed to the right of its parent control. Compensates for nested drop-down controls and responds to the setting, specifying either or accordingly. Specifies how to show the scroll bar(s). Specifies that scroll bars are always shown. Specifies that scroll bars are shown when the content is out of range. Specifies the mode of display data. Show item as text Shown item as image Represents the status of the field. Without input, the field is empty. With input, but not finished yet. The input is finished. A field status of full does not mean the field cannot accept input. There is a case where the field is full, but the field has not reached the maximum limit and can still accept input. The IP address input mode IPv4 Mode IPv6 Mode Mixed IPv6 Mode Specifies the action of shortcut keys Moves the focus to the next control. Moves the focus to the previous control. Moves the cursor to the next field. Moves the cursor to the previous field. Clears the content of the control. Shows the dropdown window of the control Do spin up Do spin down Sets the control's value to current date and time. Adds three zeros. Shows the popup calculation window. Specifies the type of dates that can be selected. Specifies that any dates can be selected. Specifies that only workdays can be selected. Specifies that only holidays and weekend days can be selected. Defines the type of the calendar. Shows the calendar by Month-Day type. Shows the calendar by Year-Month type. Specifies the display type of the calendar. Displays as the normal year. Displays as the Fiscal year. Specifies the month of a year. Indicates the month is not defined Indicates January Indicates February Indicates March Indicates April Indicates May Indicates June Indicates July Indicates August Indicates September Indicates October Indicates November Indicates December Defines the type of days (workday, holiday, etc.) Indicates a normal non-holiday day. Indicates a holiday that appears yearly. Indicates a normal day which originally was a holiday. Indicates a holiday that appears for a specific date. Indicates a holiday that appears when a holiday lands on a weekend and automatically moves onto the next day. Indicates the weekday is a holiday. Defines how a holiday is handled when it lands on a weekday that is specified as a holiday. No holiday override takes place. Holiday overrides to the next day. Holiday overrides to the next work day. Specifies the type of the selection indicator. Shows the selection indicator as a focus rectangle. Shows the selection indicator as a box. Shows the selection indicator as 3D (reverse). Shows the selection indicator as 3D when the mouse moves over the focus item; otherwise, shown as flat. Specifies the position of the navigation bar in a calendar. Specifies the navigation bar is positioned at the left side of the calendar. Specifies the navigation bar is positioned at the top of the calendar. Specifies the navigation bar is positioned at the right side of the calendar. Specifies the navigation bar is positioned at the bottom of the calendar. Specifies how to show the empty week rows in the . Specifies that the empty rows appear at the beginning. Specifies that all empty rows are at the end. Specifies which type of navigator bar is shown in the control. Specifies that no navigator bar is shown. Specifies that the button style navigator bar is shown. Specifies that the scroll bar style navigator bar is shown. Specifies that the outlook style navigator bar is shown. Defines flags for the different weeks. Specifies no weeks. Specifies the first week in the month. Specifies the second week in the month. Specifies the third week in the month. Specifies the fourth week in the month. Specifies the fifth week in the month. Specifies the last week in the month. Specifies all weeks in the month. Specifies the style of the template. Specifies the outlook style. Specifies the MonthCalendar style. Specifies the System style. Specifies which type of PickDays to use. Specifies only the days in the current month. Specifies to include the trailling days in the view. Specifies the minimum or maximum day. Specifies the day of the week. Indicates the weekday is not defined. Indicates Sunday. Indicates Monday. Indicates Tuesday. Indicates Wednesday. Indicates Thursday. Indicates Friday. Indicates Saturday. Specifies the position and manner in which a toolbar is docked. The toolbar's left edge is docked to the left edge of its containing control. The toolbar's right edge is docked to the right edge of its containing control. The toolbar's top edge is docked to the top edge of its containing control. The toolbar's bottom edge is docked to the bottom edge of its containing control. Specifies the action that the toolstirp action button perform. Copies the richtextbox text to clipbord. Pastes the clipbord content to richtextbox. Cuts the selction of richtextbox. Deletes the selction of richtextbox. Performs the undo operation. Performs the redo operation. Inserts a iamge. Alignments to the left. Ailgnments to the center. Ailgnments to the right. Bullet style. Indent increasement. Indent decreasement. Bold style. Italic style. Unerline style. Strikeout style. Loads file style. Saves file style. No operation. Enumerate all system sound types. One type of Systemsound, One type of Systemsound, One type of Systemsound, One type of Systemsound, One type of Systemsound, Specifies the operator of compare action. The difference of target control value and related control value equals difference value. The difference of target control value and related control value not equals difference value The difference of target control value and related control value greater than difference value The difference of target control value and related control value greater than or equals difference value The difference of target control value and related control value smaller than difference value The difference of target control value and related control value smaller than or equals difference value Specifies the position of the scroll tip window within the control. The scroll tip window is positioned at the default location. The scroll tip window is positioned at the top or left side of the control. The scroll tip window is positioned at the bottom or right side of the control. The scroll tip window is positioned at the center of the control. Defines the LengthUnit enumeration. Indicates the calculational unit is a .Net character when calculating the length of the string. Indicates the calculational unit is a byte when calculating the length of the string. Indicates the calculational unit is a TextElment when calculating the length of the string. Defines the ValueProcessOption enumeration. Keeps the current value. Clears the current. Restores the previous value. Defines the FieldsEditMode enumeration. Specifies the input is from the left side in each field. Specifies the input is from the right side in each field. Specifies that the field does not show the empty prompt character, but the width of the field is fixed. Defines the DisplayAlignment enumeration. Specifies to never make a horizontal alignment effect. Specifies that the alignment is distributed. Specifies that the alignment is distributed with white space. Defines the dropdown animation. Indicates no animation. Indicates the scroll animation. Indicates the slide animation. Indicates the fade animation. Indicates the center animation. Indicates the extend animation. Indicates the drag animation. Defines the Japanese char converting mode. Converts the Japanese character to the Half Width Katakana mode. Convert the Japanese character to the Full Width Katakana mode. Converts the Japanese character to the Hiragana mode. Defines the CrLf mode which describes how to process the CrLf char. Accepts all CrLf characters in copied, cut, or pasted strings. Removes all CrLf characters in copied, cut, or pasted strings. Cuts the following strings from the first CrLf character in copied, cut, and pasted strings. Specifies the style of dashed liness Specifies no line. Specifies a solid line. Specifies a line consisting of dashes. Specifies a line consisting of dots. Specifies a line consisting of a repeating pattern of dash-dot. Specifies a line consisting of a repeating pattern of dash-dot-dot. Specifies the round pattern of the specified number. When a number is halfway between two others, it is rounded toward the smallest integer greater than or equal to the specified number. When a number is halfway between two others, it is rounded toward the largest integer less than or equal to the specified number. When a number is halfway between two others, it is rounded toward the nearest number that is away from zero. When a number is halfway between two others, it is rounded toward the nearest even number. Defines how to process the GcDateTime.Value, Adjusts the value to the valid range between the minimum and maximum. If the value is less than the minimum, adjusts to the minimum. If the Value is greater than the maximum, adjusts to the maximum. Clears the value to . Restores the backup value to the specified property. Cancels the last input and holds the old text. Keeps the last input and holds the old text. Helper method for validating Enum. the type of the Enum. the validating value. valid value of Enum. Defines the Tab character mode which describes how to process the Tab character. Accepts all Tab characters in copied, cut, or pasted strings. Removes all Tab characters in copied, cut, or pasted strings. Cuts the following strings from the first Tab character in copied, cut, and pasted strings. Defines behavior used when click SideButton. No specific behavior. SideButton will do spin up behavior. SideButton will do spin down behavior. Defines how to show the TouchToolBar when touch tap target control. Not show the TouchToolBar by touch device. Show the TouchToolBar to take place of showing or when executing touch PressAndHolder operation. Show the TouchToolBar by tap the selection region of target control. Show the TouchToolBar by tap the selection gripper. Represents the mode of revealing the typed password in the password protected editor. Never reveal the typed password. Shows an eye button and press it to reveal the typed password. Shows the last typed char for a short period and then hidden with password char. Repesents the decimal part of the numeric value handling mode. The decimal point will be filtered. Cut off the decimal part, only kepts the integer part value. Defines the CompareStringOperator enumeration. The difference of string value and related control value equals difference value. The difference of string control value and related control value not equals difference value The control value contain the string The control value starts with the string The control value end with the string Defines the action options of hide the touch keyboard when user opens the drop-down window. Not hide the touch keyboard. Both dropdown and touch keyboard are shown. The touch keyboard will be hidden when the drop-down window is shown. The touch keyboard will be hidden when the drop-down window is shown, and it will be shown again after the drop-down window is closed. Represnts a Field class to define a base field. This class will implement view function for single segment. And some input behavior will exposed to user, too. This is final interface for our user. When a field is created, it will create a segment and value module for it. Then configuration will be done on the segment and the value module. Initializes a new instance of the class. A object indicates the name property. Gets or sets the name of the object. A value indicating the name of the object.
The default is .
Defined the mask format lexicons. A patter used to parse define character sub set. Indicates the keywords. Indicates the content of the keyowrds. Initialize a new instance of the Indicates the keywords. Indicates the content of the keyowrds. Match the text. The text. The start index. Return the matched length. Zero indicates no matched. Filter the text. The text before filter. The text after filter. Define a pattern used to parse hex AscII. Match the text. The text. The start index. Return the matched length. Zero indicates no matched. Filter the text. The text before filter. The text after filter. To judge the character whether is a hex digital the character if the character is hex digital return true,else return false Define a pattern used to parse hex Unicode. Match the text. The text. The start index. Return the matched length. Zero indicates no matched. Filter the text. The text before filter. The text after filter. To judge the character whether is a hex digital the character if the character is hex digital return true,else return false Define a pattern used to parse octal AscII Match the text. The text. The start index. Return the matched length. Zero indicates no matched. Filter the text. The text before filter. The text after filter. To judge the character whether is a octal digital the character if the character is octal digital return true,else return false Defines the keywords form mask format. Defines the escape character. Defines the hyphen character. Defines the vertical bar character. Defines the comma character. Defines the arrow character. Defines the literials id. Defines the separator id. Defines the hyphen id. Defines the char subset id. Defines the quantifier id. Defines the enum group id. Defines the defined char id. Defines the unknow id. Initializes the class. Gets a lexicon used to parse the maske format. Gets a lexicon used to parse the character subset. Gets a lexicon used to parse the quantifier. Gets a lexicon used to parse the enum group. Creates the lexicons. Defined the mask pattern collection. Represents a builder to build some specify the by a format. To analyse the quantifier string. the pattern string return the quantifier minimum return the quantifier maximum the subset string is a string that start with '{' character and end with '}'character. And maximum and minimum are split by ',' character. Defined a character filter builder to builder a specify character filter with a pattern. A class use to parse the char sub set. Save the filters. Save the include characters. Indicates if the helper is working. Cache a character. Indicates if has cached a character. Indicates if has cached a Hyphen. Begin the parsing Feed a Hyphen to the helper. Feed a character to the helper. The character. Process the character saved in the cache. Adds a include character into the include. The included character. Feed a filter. The filter. Ends the paraing. Returns the filters saved in the helper. Builds a character filter with the specified pattern. The specify format defined by MaskPatternField. A object indicate the build result. Create the character filter by special char subset pattern. The apecial char subset pattern. The character filter. Create the filter by defined char. The defined character. The character filter. Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class. A value indicates the pattern. An value indicates the minimum length. An value indicates the maximum length. Gets or sets the minimum length of the . An value indicates the minimum length.
The default is 1.
The property determines the minimum length of input characters.
Gets or sets the maximum length of the . An value indicates the maximum length.
The default is .
The property determines the maximum length of input characters.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the field can auto convert. if can perform auto convert; otherwise, . If set the AutoConvert property to , all convertible characters will be automatically converted accordingly to the input mask. For example, if set the input mask to "A", by hitting a lower case character the control automatically converts the character into an upper case. Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class. A value indicates the literal. Gets or sets the literal text of the field. A value indicates the literal text of the field.
The default is White-Space char.
The property retrieves the text of the .
Defines an interface that abstractes a window, user can add message processors to it. Addes the an into the . An indicates the message processor. Last added processor has the hightest priority. A duplicate processor or null will cause an exception. Removes the an from the . An indicates the message processor. A no found processor or null will cause an exception. Defines the message processor interface. Process the message before other processors. A indicates the window message. A bool value indicates whether the message will be processed by other processors. true the message will not be process any. false otherwise. Process the message after other processors. A indicates the window message. Defines a virtual windows to help the operation of the . This class only send message to the IMessageProcessor.PerProcess methods. Save the fact window object. Saves the processors. Initializes a new instance of the class. Gets or sets the fact window. Raises the event. A indicates the arguments of the event. A event raised when the value of property is changed. Add a message proccessor to the virtual window. An indicates the message processor. Remove a message processor from the virtual window. An indicates the message processor. Gets the handle of the vritual window. An indicates the handle of the virtual window. Dispatch the message to the processsor. A indicates the window message. Return a bool indicate whether this message should be blocked. Hang up the link between this class and the Application. Defines a virtual windows to help the operation of the . This class only send message to the IMessageProcessor.PerProcess methods. A hook used to accept the window message. Saves the owner. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the owner. Process the message. Detach the owner to prevent msg process again. This method is often used when its owner is been destroyed. And this method will break relationship with its owner. Save the fact window object. A dictionary keeps all of the related hook window wrappers. Saves the processors. Initializes a new instance of the class. Gets or sets the fact window. Gets the associated window handle that related to the FactWindow instance. The associated window handle related to the FactWindow instance. Gets the hook handle from the FactWindow. Returns the hook handle. Raises the event. A indicates the arguments of the event. A event raised when the value of property is changed. Add a message proccessor to the virtual window. An indicates the message processor. Remove a message processor from the virtual window. An indicates the message processor. Gets the handle of the vritual window. An indicates the handle of the virtual window. Dispatch the message to the processsor. A indicates the window message. Return a bool indicate whether this message should be blocked. Dispatch the message to the processsor. A indicates the window message. Return a bool indicate whether this message should be blocked. Hang up the link between this class and the Application. Defines the window that implements the IWin32Window interface. Saves the handle of the window. Initializes a new instance of the class. An indicates the handle of the window. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the handle of the window. Gets the handle of the window. Defines the type of the ime device. User can control the ime device, but can not receive the event from ime device. User can not only control the ime device, but also receive the event from ime device. Defines the hot keys for ime. For simplified Chinese, toggles the shape conversion mode of IME. For simplified Chinese, toggles the symbol conversion mode of IME. Symbol mode indicates that the user can input Chinese punctuation and symbols by mapping to the punctuation and symbols on the keyboard. For Japanese, alternately opens and closes the IME. For Korean, toggles the shape conversion mode of IME. For Korean, switches to Hanja conversion. Switches to from Korean to English. For traditional Chinese, toggles the shape conversion mode of IME. For traditional Chinese, toggles the symbol conversion mode of IME. Defines the ime device that is a bridge between application and ime. Defines the ime context for all ime operations. Saves the device of the ime window. Saves the handle of the ime window. Saves the orignal handle of ime window. Saves a flag indicating whether the ime context is used by ime device. Saves a flag indicating whether the ime context have beed modified by ourself. Initializes a new instance of the class. An indicates the device. Ensure to release Gets the device of the ime context. An indicates the ime device that is owner of the ime context. Gets the handle of the ime context. An indicates the handle of the ime. Gets a bool indicating whether the ime context is valid. A bool indicates whether this context is valid. Release the handle of the ime context. Release the handle of the ime context. Ignore this params, this method use to ensure release handle of the ime context. Gets or sets wehther the ime context is used by ime device. true, the ime context is used by ime device. false, the ime context is not used by ime device. Defines the ime status. Indicates the ime function is closed. Indicates the ime function is opened. Defines the conversion mode Language mask. Alphanumeric mode Native mode Chinese mode Hangeul mode Hangul mode Japanese mode Katakana mode Full shape mode Roman input mode Character code input mode Hanja convert mode Soft Keyboard mode Prevent processing of conversions by IME Eudc conversion mode Symbol conversion mode Defines the sentence mode No information for sentence. The IME uses plural clause information to carry out conversion processing. The IME carries out conversion processing in single-character mode. The IME carries out conversion processing in automatic mode. The IME uses phrase information to predict the next character. The IME uses conversation mode. This is useful for chat applications. Defines the base class of all ime window. Saves the device of the ime window. Initializes a new instance of the class. An indicates the device. Gets the device of the ime window. An indicates the ime device that is owner of the ime window. Gets or sets a bool indicates whether the ime window is visible. A bool indicates whether the window is visible. Gets or sets the position of the ime window. A indicates the position of the ime window. Process the message coming from the ime window. A indicates the ime message. Shows the ime window. Hides the ime window. Defines the ime status window. Initializes a new instance of the class. An indicates the device. Gets or sets a bool indicates whether the ime window is visible. A bool indicats whether the ime window is visible. Gets or sets the position of the ime window. A indicates position of the ime window. Gets or sets a indicating the ime is opened or closed. A indicates the status of the ime. Gets or sets the conversion mode. An indicates the conversion mode of the ime. Gets or sets the sentence mode. An indicates the sentence mode of the ime. Process the message coming from the ime status window. A indicates the ime message. When the ime window is about created. Raise the event. A indicates the argument of the event. When the ime window is about closed. Raise the event. A indicates the argument of the event. When the ConversionMode is changed by user from ime bar. Raise the event. A indicates the argument of the event. When the SentenceMode is changed by user from ime bar. Raise the event. A indicates the argument of the event. When the Status is changed by user from ime bar or by code. Raise the event. A indicates the argument of the event. An enum indicates the details of the composition. The reading string of the current composition. The attributes of the reading string of the current composition. The clause information of the reading string of the composition string. The current composition string. The attribute of the composition string. The clause information of the composition string. The cursor position in composition string. The starting position of any changes in composition string. The reading string. The clause information of the reading string. The string of the composition result. The clause information of the result string. Define a class used for the arguments of the CompositionChanged event. Saves the value of the property. Saves the value of the property. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the lastest change to the composition string. A indicates the detials of the composition. Gets the lastest change to the composition string. A char indicates the lastest change to the composition string. Gets the detials of the composition. An indicates the detials of the composition. Defines a the deleget for handling the ime CompositionChanged event. A object indicates the event sender. A indicates the event arguments. Defines the attribute of the characthers in the ime composition. Defines a clause of the composition. Saves the start of the clause. Saves the length of the clause. Initializes a new instance of the class. An int indicates the start of the clause. An int indicates the end of the cluase. Gets an int indicating the start of the clause. An int indicating the start of the clause. Gets an int indicating the start of the clause. An int indicating the start of the clause. Gets the string of the clause from the given composition string. A string indicates the composition string. Return the string of the clause. Defines the ime composition window. Initializes a new instance of the class. An indicates the device. Gets or sets a bool indicates whether the ime window is visible. A bool indicates whether the ime window is visible. Gets or sets the position of the ime window. A indicates the position of the ime window. Gets or sets the work area of the composition window. A indicates the work area. Gets a bool indicating whether the composition window is floating. A bool indicates whther the composition window is int floation window. Gets whether the compsition form is single line or not. Gets the cursor position. An int indicates the caret position of the composition window. Gets the delta start. An int indicate the start of the composition window. Gets or sets the string A string indicates the composition string. Gets or sets the reading string A string indicates the reading string. Gets the result string A string indicates the result string. Gets the result reading string A string indicates the result reading string. Gets the ime composition attributes. An array indicates the attributes of the composition string. Gets the ime composition reading attributes. An array indicates the attributes of the reading string. Gets the ime composition clauses. An array indicates the clauses of the composition string. Gets the ime composition reading clauses. An array indicates the clauses of the reading string. Gets the ime composition result clauses. An array indicates the clauses of the result string. Gets the ime composition result reading clauses. An array indicates the clauses of the result reading string. Makes composition sit at a floating window. Gets the composition string by given index. An int indicates the composition string. A string is the result. Gets the composition attributes by given index. An int indicates the composition string. A ImeCompositionAttribute array is the result. Gets the composition clauses by given index. An int indicates the composition string. A ImeCompositionClause array is the result. Clear the composition string and set the status to no composition string Set the composition string as the result string. Convert the composition string. Cancel the current composition string and set the composition string to be the unconverted string. Gets or sets the logical font. A bool indicates whether the ime can do reconverting now. Provides support for IME reconversion. A string to be reconverted. Return a bool indicates whether the reconverting is successful. Process the message coming from the ime status window. A indicates the ime message. Adjustes the window position. A indicates the position of the window. Adjustes the window position, and workArea. A indicates the position of the window. A indicates the work area of the window. When the ime window is opened. Raise the event. A indicates the argument of the event. When the ime window is closed. Raise the event. A indicates the argument of the event. Raise the event. A indicates the event arguments. Raised immediately before the ime generates the composition string as a result of a keystroke. Raise the event. A indicates the event arguments. Raised when the IME ends composition. Raise the event. A indicates the event arguments. Raised when the IME window finds no space to extend the area for the composition window. Raise the event. A indicates the event arguments. Raised when the composition is changed. Defines the style of the candidate list. Candidates are in a style other than listed here. Candidates are in same reading. Candidates are in a code range. Candidates are in same meaning. Candidates use same radical character. Candidates are in same number of strokes. Defines a indicates the candidate list. Defines a empty . Saves the date of the Saves the candidates. Initializes a new instance of the class. An indicates the style. A string array indicates the candidates. Gets the style of the candidate list. A indicates the style. Gets the count of the candidates. An int indicates the count of the candidates. Gets the candidate at given index. An int indicates the given index. A string indicates the candidate. Defines the ime candidate window. Saves the index of the candidate window. Initializes a new instance of the class. An indicates the device. An int indicates the index of the candidate window. Gets the index of the candidate window. An indicates the index of the candidate window. The valid range is 0-3. Gets or sets the position of the candidate window. A indicates the position of the candidate window. Gets or sets the visible of the candidate window. A bool indicats whether the candidate window is visible. Gets the candidate list of the candidate window. An contains the candidates. Gets the page start. An int indicates the page start. Gets the page size. An int indicates the page size. Gets or sets the selected candidate index. An int indicates the index of the selected candidate. A private methods used get the information from the system. Process the message coming from the ime status window. A indicates the ime message. When the ime window is about created. Raise the event. A indicates the argument of the event. When the ime window is about closed. Raise the event. A indicates the argument of the event. Raises the event. A indicates the event arguments. Raised when an ime is about to change the content of the candidate window. Define a class used for the arguments of the ImeCandidateWindowsEventHandler event. Saves the index of the . Initializes a new instance of the class. An int array indicates the indices of the . Gets an int array indicating the indices of the . An int array indicating the indices of the . Defines a the deleget for handling the ime events of ImeCandidateWindows event. A object indicates the event sender. A indicates the event arguments. Defines the collection of the candidate window. Saves the device of the ime window. Initializes a new instance of the class. An indicates the device. Gets the candidate window by the given index. An int indicates the index.(0-3) Returns an . Process the message coming from the ime window. A indicates the ime message. Raise the event. A indicates the argument of the event. When the ime candidate windows are about opened. Raise the event. A indicates the argument of the event. When the ime candidate windows is closing. Raises the event. A indicates the event arguments. Raised when an ime is about to change the content of the candidate window. Defines a class used to listen the message of ime host. Just used to dispatch the message to Ime. Saves the ime device. Initializes a new instance of the class. An indicates the device. Process the message before other processors. Process the message after other processors. Saves the window that uses the ime device. Saves the type of the ime device. A bool indicates whether the device is disposed. A processor. Saves the status window. Saves the composition window. Saves the candidate windows. Saves the candidate window collection. Saves the ime context. Initializes a new instance of the class. An indicates the window that uses the ime device. The device type is ImeType.Unidirection. Initializes a new instance of the class. An indicates the window that uses the ime device. An indicates the device type user hoped. If can created the device as the special type, is decided by imhost. Gets the type of the ime device. Gets or sets the language of the ime device. A indicates the language of ime device. Gets a bool indicates the ime device is active. A bool indicates whether the ime device is active. Gets a flag indicates whether the ime is opening and has inputed string. true, indicates the ime is opening and has inputed string, otherwise, false; Gets the status window of current ime device. A indicates the status window. Gets the composition window of current ime device. A indicates the composition window. Gets the collection of candiate window. A indicates the candidate windows. Gets or sets the enable status of the ime device. Fetch the result strings from a specified reading string. A string which represents the reading string. A string array which represents the candidate list. Fecth reading strings from a specified result string. A string which represents the result string. A string array which represents the reading strings. Wraps the API method ImmGetConversionList to provide the function getting candidate list from a specified reading string or getting reading strings from a specified result string. A source string which can be result string or reading string. A flag which indicates whether to get the candidate list from a reading string or to get the reading strings from a result string. A string array that contains the candidate list or reading strings. Simulates the specified IME hot key, causing the same response as if the user had pressed the hot key in the related window. Specifies the identifier of the IME hot key Process the message before other processors. A indicates the window message. A bool value indicates whether the message will be processed by other processors. true the message will not be process any. false otherwise. Process the message after other processors. A indicates the window message. Dispose the . Raise the event. An indicates the event arguments. An event raised when the ime has been activated. Raise the event. An indicates the event arguments. An event raised when the ime has been deactivated. Determines how the IME should handle sentences. Inherit the IME sentence mode of the parent control. Do not control the IME sentence mode. Use phrase information to predict the next character. The IME uses plural clause information to carry out conversion processing. The IME uses conversation mode. This is useful for chat applications. No information for sentence. Determines how to handle the IME candidate window. Clear the composition string and set the status to no composition string. Convert the composition string and show the candidate window. Convert the composition string and pick the first in the candidate window. A helper class is used to provides some the helps. Defines a class used to convert ImeMode to ImeConversionMode or convert ImeConversionMode to ImeMode. Defines a Japanese conversion table. Defines a Korean conversion table. Defines a Chinese conversion table. Defines a empty conversion table. Gets the conversion table by current input language. The conversion table based on the language. Saves the conversion bits. Gets the conversion bigs. Initializes a new instance of the class. Defines the bits needed to be set. Defines the bits needed to be cleared. Gets the IME mode from the ime device.. A indicates the ime device. The ImeMode status. Sets the ime mode to the ime device. A indicates the ime device. A indicates the ime mode. Set the special sentence mode to ime device. An indicates the ime device. An indicates the sentence mode. Get the sentence mode from the ime device. An indicates the ime device. An indicates the sentence mode. Converts the specified string and determines how the candidate window should appear. An indicates the ime device. A string to convert. A enumeration that represents how to process the candidate window. Defines the native methods based on Win32 SDK. The NativeMethods class defines some basic data structures and constants, which is given in Win32 SDK. Windows Message. The SIZE structure specifies the width and height of a rectangle. Specifies the rectangle's width. The units depend on which function uses this. Specifies the rectangle's height. The units depend on which function uses this. Constructs the SIZE structure. Specifies the size's width. Specifies the size's height. Add this methods in order to recudce the warning count of Fon32 class. make long method. KeyState, bool indicate pressed Get the lower word from a unsigned integer value. The unsigned integer value. The lower word as result. Get the higher word from a unsigned integer value. The unsigned integer value. The higher word as result. Get the lower word from a integer value. The integer value. The lower word as result. Get the higher word from a integer value. The integer value. The higher word as result. The POINT structure defines the x and y coordinates of a point. Specifies the x-coordinate of the point. Specifies the y-coordinate of the point. Constructs the POINT structure. Specifies the x-coordinate of the point. Specifies the y-coordinate of the point. Constructs the POINT structure. A point whith another type. The RECT structure defines the coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners of a rectangle. Specifies the x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of a rectangle. Specifies the y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of a rectangle. Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-right corner of a rectangle. Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-right corner of a rectangle. Constructs the RECT structure. Specifies the x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of a rectangle. Specifies the y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of a rectangle. Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-right corner of a rectangle. Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-right corner of a rectangle. Constructs the RECT structure. Specifies the rectangle Adjusts the location of this rectangle by the specified amount. The horizontal offset. The vertical offset. Gets the width. The width of RECT. Gets the height. The height of RECT. The TEXTMETRIC structure contains basic information about a physical font. All sizes are specified in logical units; that is, they depend on the current mapping mode of the display context. Specifies the height (ascent + descent) of characters. Specifies the ascent (units above the base line) of characters. Specifies the descent (units below the base line) of characters. Specifies the amount of leading (space) inside the bounds set by the tmHeight member. Accent marks and other diacritical characters may occur in this area. The designer may set this member to zero. Specifies the amount of extra leading (space) that the application adds between rows. Since this area is outside the font, it contains no marks and is not altered by text output calls in either OPAQUE or TRANSPARENT mode. The designer may set this member to zero. Specifies the average width of characters in the font (generally defined as the width of the letter x). This value does not include the overhang required for bold or italic characters. Specifies the width of the widest character in the font. Specifies the weight of the font. Specifies the extra width per string that may be added to some synthesized fonts. When synthesizing some attributes, such as bold or italic, graphics device interface (GDI) or a device may have to add width to a string on both a per-character and per-string basis. Specifies the horizontal aspect of the device for which the font was designed. Specifies the vertical aspect of the device for which the font was designed. The ratio of the tmDigitizedAspectX and tmDigitizedAspectY members is the aspect ratio of the device for which the font was designed. Specifies the value of the first character defined in the font. Specifies the value of the last character defined in the font. Specifies the value of the character to be substituted for characters not in the font. Specifies the value of the character that will be used to define word breaks for text justification. Specifies an italic font if it is nonzero. Specifies an underlined font if it is nonzero. Specifies a strikeout font if it is nonzero. Specifies information about the pitch, the technology, and the family of a physical font. Specifies the character set of the font. The character set can be one of the following values. The MSG structure contains message information from a thread's message queue. Handle to the window whose window procedure receives the message. Specifies the message identifier. Applications can only use the low word; the high word is reserved by the system. Specifies additional information about the message. The exact meaning depends on the value of the message member. Specifies additional information about the message. The exact meaning depends on the value of the message member. Specifies the time at which the message was posted. Specifies the cursor position, x direction in screen coordinates, when the message was posted. Specifies the cursor position, y direction in screen coordinates, when the message was posted. The WM_COMMAND message is sent when the user selects a command item from a menu, when a control sends a notification message to its parent window, or when an accelerator keystroke is translated. The WM_USER constant is used by applications to help define private messages for use by private window classes, usually of the form WM_USER+X, where X is an integer value. The WM_SETFOCUS message is sent to a window after it has gained the keyboard focus. The WM_KILLFOCUS message is sent to a window immediately before it loses the keyboard focus. This message filters for keyboard messages. The WM_CHAR message is posted to the window with the keyboard focus when a WM_KEYDOWN message is translated by the TranslateMessage function. The WM_CHAR message contains the character code of the key that was pressed. An application sends the WM_MDIACTIVATE message to a multiple- document interface (MDI) client window to instruct the client window to activate a different MDI child window. The WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED message is sent to a window whose size, position, or place in the Z order has changed as a result of a call to the SetWindowPos function or another window-management function. The WM_LBUTTONDOWN message is posted when the user presses the left mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse. The WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK message is posted when the user double-clicks the left mouse button while the cursor is in the client area of a window. If the mouse is not captured, the message is posted to the window beneath the cursor. Otherwise, the message is posted to the window that has captured the mouse. The WM_DESTROY message is sent when a window is being destroyed. It is sent to the window procedure of the window being destroyed after the window is removed from the screen. This message is sent first to the window being destroyed and then to the child windows (if any) as they are destroyed. During the processing of the message, it can be assumed that all child windows still exist. An application sends the WM_SETREDRAW message to a window to allow changes in that window to be redrawn or to prevent changes in that window from being redrawn. The WM_RBUTTONUP is sent when the right mouse button is up. The WM_RBUTTONUP is sent when the right mouse button is up. The framework calls this member function when the cursor is in an inactive window and the user presses a mouse button. The WM_XBUTTONUP is sent when the right mouse button is up. This messgae indicates the theme of current application is changed. This WM_CONTEXTMENU is sent when the control need show contextmenu. This message indicates clear the selected text. This message indicates mouse left button down on NC area. Messages are not removed from the queue after processing by PeekMessage. Gets a int value from the IntPtr'LoWord. Indicates the result is OK. Indicates the reuslt has some problem. The Handle of target control The client rectangle of target control. Word Descriptor implementation-defined The CharFormat2 sturcut. The CHARFORMATA class. The ScrollBarTypes enum. The ScrollBarInfoFlags enum. The SCROLLINFO struct. This message is used for show selction text. This message is used for set char format. This message is used for get char format. This message is used for get parafomat. AlignmentLeft. AlignmentRight. AlignmentCenter. ParaFormat The inputScope enumeration contains values that specify which input scope(s) are applied to a given field. If the calling thread and the thread that owns the window are attached to different input queues, the system posts the request to the thread that owns the window. This prevents the calling thread from blocking its execution while other threads process the request. SWP_ASYNCWINDOWPOS Prevents generation of the WM_SYNCPAINT message. SWP_DEFERERASE Draws a frame (defined in the window's class description) around the window. SWP_DRAWFRAME Applies new frame styles set using the SetWindowLong function. Sends a WM_NCCALCSIZE message to the window, even if the window's size is not being changed. If this flag is not specified, WM_NCCALCSIZE is sent only when the window's size is being changed. SWP_FRAMECHANGED Hides the window. SWP_HIDEWINDOW Does not activate the window. If this flag is not set, the window is activated and moved to the top of either the topmost or non-topmost group (depending on the setting of the hWndInsertAfter parameter). SWP_NOACTIVATE Discards the entire contents of the client area. If this flag is not specified, the valid contents of the client area are saved and copied back into the client area after the window is sized or repositioned. SWP_NOCOPYBITS Retains the current position (ignores X and Y parameters). SWP_NOMOVE Does not change the owner window's position in the Z order. SWP_NOOWNERZORDER Does not redraw changes. If this flag is set, no repainting of any kind occurs. This applies to the client area, the nonclient area (including the title bar and scroll bars), and any part of the parent window uncovered as a result of the window being moved. When this flag is set, the application must explicitly invalidate or redraw any parts of the window and parent window that need redrawing. SWP_NOREDRAW Same as the SWP_NOOWNERZORDER flag. SWP_NOREPOSITION Prevents the window from receiving the WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGING message. SWP_NOSENDCHANGING Retains the current size (ignores the cx and cy parameters). SWP_NOSIZE Retains the current Z order (ignores the hWndInsertAfter parameter). SWP_NOZORDER Displays the window. SWP_SHOWWINDOW The KBDLLHOOKSTRUCT structure contains information about a low-level keyboard input event. Specifies a virtual-key code. The code must be a value in the range 1 to 254. Specifies a hardware scan code for the key. Specifies the extended-key flag, event-injected flag, context code, and transition-state flag. This member is specified as follows. An application can use the following values to test the keystroke flags. Value Purpose LLKHF_EXTENDED Test the extended-key flag. LLKHF_INJECTED Test the event-injected flag. LLKHF_ALTDOWN Test the context code. LLKHF_UP Test the transition-state flag. 0 : Specifies whether the key is an extended key, such as a function key or a key on the numeric keypad. The value is 1 if the key is an extended key; otherwise, it is 0. 1-3: Reserved. 4 : Specifies whether the event was injected. The value is 1 if the event was injected; otherwise, it is 0. 5 : Specifies the context code. The value is 1 if the ALT key is pressed; otherwise, it is 0. 6 : Reserved. 7 : Specifies the transition state. The value is 0 if the key is pressed and 1 if it is being released. Specifies the time stamp for this message, equivalent to what GetMessageTime would return for this message. Specifies extra information associated with the message. The MSLLHOOKSTRUCT structure contains information about a low-level keyboard input event. Specifies a POINT structure that contains the x- and y-coordinates of the cursor, in screen coordinates. If the message is WM_MOUSEWHEEL, the high-order word of this member is the wheel delta. The low-order word is reserved. A positive value indicates that the wheel was rotated forward, away from the user; a negative value indicates that the wheel was rotated backward, toward the user. One wheel click is defined as WHEEL_DELTA, which is 120. If the message is WM_XBUTTONDOWN, WM_XBUTTONUP, WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK, WM_NCXBUTTONDOWN, WM_NCXBUTTONUP, or WM_NCXBUTTONDBLCLK, the high-order word specifies which X button was pressed or released, and the low-order word is reserved. This value can be one or more of the following values. Otherwise, mouseData is not used. XBUTTON1 The first X button was pressed or released. XBUTTON2 The second X button was pressed or released. Specifies the event-injected flag. An application can use the following value to test the mouse flags. Value Purpose LLMHF_INJECTED Test the event-injected flag. 0 : Specifies whether the event was injected. The value is 1 if the event was injected; otherwise, it is 0. 1-15 : Reserved. Specifies the time stamp for this message. Specifies extra information associated with the message. Defines the methods based on Win32 API library. The UnsafeNativeMethods class defines functions, which is given in Win32 SDK. The ShowWindow Function. The DrawFrameControl function draws a frame control of the specified type and style. Handle to the device context of the window in which to draw the control. Pointer to a RECT structure that contains the logical coordinates of the bounding rectangle for frame control. Specifies the type of frame control to draw. the initial state of the frame control. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. If the function fails, the return value is zero. Draws the background image defined by the visual style for the specified control part. [in] Handle to a window's specified theme data. Use OpenThemeData to create an HTHEME. [in] Handle to a device context (HDC) used for drawing the theme-defined background image. [in] Value of type int that specifies the part to draw. See Parts and States. [in] Value of type int that specifies the state of the part to draw. See Parts and States. [in] Pointer to a RECT structure that contains the rectangle, in logical coordinates, in which the background image is drawn. [in] Pointer to a RECT structure that contains a clipping rectangle. This parameter may be set to NULL. Returns S_OK if successful, or an error value otherwise. Draws the part of a parent control that is covered by a partially-transparent or alpha-blended child control. [in] Handle of the child control. [in] Handle to the child control's device context (DC). [in] Pointer to a RECT structure that defines the area to be drawn. The rectangle is in the child window's coordinates. This parameter may be set to NULL. Returns S_OK if successful, or an error value otherwise. Retrieves whether the background specified by the visual style has transparent pieces or alpha-blended pieces. [in] Handle to a window's specified theme data. Use OpenThemeData to create an HTHEME. [in] Value of type int that specifies the part. See Parts and States. [in] Value of type int that specifies the state of the part. See Parts and States. TRUE : The theme-specified background for a particular iPartId and iStateId has transparent pieces or alpha-blended pieces. FALSE : The theme-specified background for a particular iPartId and iStateId does not have transparent pieces or alpha-blended pieces. This function loads an icon, cursor, or bitmap. Handle to an instance of the module that contains the image to be loaded. Pointer to a null-terminated string that contains the name of the image resource in the hinst module that identifies the image to load. Specifies the type of image to be loaded. This parameter can be one of the following values. Specifies the width, in pixels, of the icon or cursor. If this parameter is zero, the function uses the SM_CXICON or SM_CXCURSOR system metric value to set the width. If uType is IMAGE_BITMAP, this parameter must be zero. Specifies the height, in pixels, of the icon or cursor. If this parameter is zero, the function uses the SM_CYICON or SM_CYCURSOR system metric value to set the height. If uType is IMAGE_BITMAP, this parameter must be zero. Set to zero. Windows CE behaves as though the LR_DEFAULTCOLOR and LR_DEFAULTSIZE values are set. LR_DEFAULTCOLOR means not monochrome. LR_DEFAULTSIZE means that the system uses the width or height specified by the system metric values for cursors or icons if the cxDesired or cyDesired values are set to zero. If the resource contains multiple images, the function uses the size of the first image. The ValidateRgn function validates the client area within a region by removing the region from the current update region of the specified window. Handle to the window whose update region is to be modified. Handle to a region that defines the area to be removed from the update region. If this parameter is NULL, the entire client area is removed. The SetLayeredWindowAttributes function sets the opacity and transparency color key of a layered window. Handle to the layered window. COLORREF structure that specifies the transparency color key to be used when composing the layered window. All pixels painted by the window in this color will be transparent. Alpha value used to describe the opacity of the layered window. Specifies an action to take. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. If the function fails, the return value is zero. Sets the stretch BLT mode. The HDC. The stretch mode. The BitBlt Function. The StretchBlt Function. The SendMessage Function. The IsWindow Function. The SetWindowPos Function. The DestroyWindow Function. The SetCapture Function. The ReleaseCapture Function. The InvalidateRect Function. The InvalidateRgn Function. The SetTextColor Function. The GetTextColor Function The SetBkColor Function. The SetBKMode Function. The GetBkColor Function Reals the child window from point. The HWND parent. The point. the handle at the point. The GradientFill Function. The GradientFill Function. The CreateRectRgn Function. The GetClipRgn Function. The SelectClipRgn Function. The OpenThemeData Function. The CloseThemeData Function. The IsThemeActive Function. The SystemParametersInfo Function. The GetDC Function. PatBlt method. The GetScrollInfo function retrieves the parameters of a scroll bar, including the minimum and maximum scrolling positions, the page size, and the position of the scroll box (thumb). [in] Handle to a scroll bar control or a window with a standard scroll bar, depending on the value of the fnBar parameter. [in] Specifies the type of scroll bar for which to retrieve parameters. This parameter can be one of the following values. SB_CTL Retrieves the parameters for a scroll bar control. The hwnd parameter must be the handle to the scroll bar control. SB_HORZ Retrieves the parameters for the window's standard horizontal scroll bar. SB_VERT Retrieves the parameters for the window's standard vertical scroll bar. [in, out] Pointer to a SCROLLINFO structure. Before calling GetScrollInfo, set the cbSize member to sizeof(SCROLLINFO), and set the fMask member to specify the scroll bar parameters to retrieve. Before returning, the function copies the specified parameters to the appropriate members of the structure. The fMask member can be one or more of the following values. SIF_PAGE Copies the scroll page to the nPage member of the SCROLLINFO structure pointed to by lpsi. SIF_POS Copies the scroll position to the nPos member of the SCROLLINFO structure pointed to by lpsi. SIF_RANGE Copies the scroll range to the nMin and nMax members of the SCROLLINFO structure pointed to by lpsi. SIF_TRACKPOS Copies the current scroll box tracking position to the nTrackPos member of the SCROLLINFO structure pointed to by lpsi If the function retrieved any values, the return value is nonzero. If the function does not retrieve any values, the return value is zero. To get extended error information, call GetLastError. The SetFocus Function. The SendMessage function sends the specified message to a window or windows. It calls the window procedure for the specified window and does not return until the window procedure has processed the message. [in] Handle to the window whose window procedure will receive the message. If this parameter is HWND_BROADCAST, the message is sent to all top-level windows in the system, including disabled or invisible unowned windows, overlapped windows, and pop-up windows; but the message is not sent to child windows. [in] Specifies the message to be sent. [in] Specifies additional message-specific information. [in] Specifies additional message-specific information. The return value specifies the result of the message processing; it depends on the message sent. The SendMessage function sends the specified message to a window or windows. It calls the window procedure for the specified window and does not return until the window procedure has processed the message. [in] Handle to the window whose window procedure will receive the message. If this parameter is HWND_BROADCAST, the message is sent to all top-level windows in the system, including disabled or invisible unowned windows, overlapped windows, and pop-up windows; but the message is not sent to child windows. [in] Specifies the message to be sent. [in] Specifies additional message-specific information. [in] Specifies additional message-specific information. The return value specifies the result of the message processing; it depends on the message sent. The LockWindowUpdate function disables or enables drawing in the specified window. Only one window can be locked at a time. [in] Specifies the window in which drawing will be disabled. If this parameter is NULL, drawing in the locked window is enabled. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. If the function fails, the return value is zero, indicating that an error occurred or another window was already locked. Windows NT/2000/XP: To get extended error information, call GetLastError. The GetWindow function retrieves a handle to a window that has the specified relationship (Z-Order or owner) to the specified window. [in] Handle to a window. The window handle retrieved is relative to this window, based on the value of the uCmd parameter. [in] Specifies the relationship between the specified window and the window whose handle is to be retrieved. This parameter can be one of the following values. GW_CHILD The retrieved handle identifies the child window at the top of the Z order, if the specified window is a parent window; otherwise, the retrieved handle is NULL. The function examines only child windows of the specified window. It does not examine descendant windows. GW_ENABLEDPOPUP Windows 2000/XP: The retrieved handle identifies the enabled popup window owned by the specified window (the search uses the first such window found using GW_HWNDNEXT); otherwise, if there are no enabled popup windows, the retrieved handle is that of the specified window GW_HWNDFIRST The retrieved handle identifies the window of the same type that is highest in the Z order. If the specified window is a topmost window, the handle identifies the topmost window that is highest in the Z order. If the specified window is a top-level window, the handle identifies the top-level window that is highest in the Z order. If the specified window is a child window, the handle identifies the sibling window that is highest in the Z order. GW_HWNDLAST The retrieved handle identifies the window of the same type that is lowest in the Z order. If the specified window is a topmost window, the handle identifies the topmost window that is lowest in the Z order. If the specified window is a top-level window, the handle identifies the top-level window that is lowest in the Z order. If the specified window is a child window, the handle identifies the sibling window that is lowest in the Z order. GW_HWNDNEXT The retrieved handle identifies the window below the specified window in the Z order. If the specified window is a topmost window, the handle identifies the topmost window below the specified window. If the specified window is a top-level window, the handle identifies the top-level window below the specified window. If the specified window is a child window, the handle identifies the sibling window below the specified window. GW_HWNDPREV The retrieved handle identifies the window above the specified window in the Z order. If the specified window is a topmost window, the handle identifies the topmost window above the specified window. If the specified window is a top-level window, the handle identifies the top-level window above the specified window. If the specified window is a child window, the handle identifies the sibling window above the specified window. /// GW_OWNER The retrieved handle identifies the specified window's owner window, if any. For more information, see Owned Windows. If the function succeeds, the return value is a window handle. If no window exists with the specified relationship to the specified window, the return value is NULL. To get extended error information, call GetLastError. The ImmIsIME function determines whether the specified input locale has an IME. Input locale identifier. If the specified hKL has an IME, the return value is a nonzero value. Otherwise the return value is zero. The GetKeyboardLayout function retrieves the active input locale identifier (formerly called the keyboard layout) for the specified thread. If the idThread parameter is zero, the input locale identifier for the active thread is returned. Identifies the thread to query or is zero for the current thread. The return value is the input locale identifier for the thread. The low word contains a Language Identifier for the input language and the high word contains a device handle to the physical layout of the keyboard. The ImmGetDefaultIMEWnd function retrieves the default window handle for the IME class. Handle to the window for the application. If the function succeeds, the return value is the default window handle to the IME class. If the function fails, the return value is NULL. The FindWindow function retrieves a handle to the top-level window whose class name and window name match the specified strings. This function does not search child windows. This function does not perform a case- sensitive search. Pointer to a null-terminated string that specifies the class name or a class atom created by a previous call to the RegisterClass or RegisterClassEx function. The atom must be in the low-order word of lpClassName; the high-order word must be zero. If lpClassName points to a string, it specifies the window class name. The class name can be any name registered with RegisterClass or RegisterClassEx, or any of the predefined control-class names. If lpClassName is NULL, it finds any window whose title matches the lpWindowName parameter. Pointer to a null-terminated string that specifies the window name (the window's title). If this parameter is NULL, all window names match. The IsWindowVisible function retrieves the visibility state of the specified window. Handle to the window to test. If the specified window, its parent window, its parent's parent window, and so forth, have the WS_VISIBLE style, the return value is nonzero. Otherwise, the return value is zero. Because the return value specifies whether the window has the WS_VISIBLE style, it may be nonzero even if the window is totally obscured by other windows. The PostMessage function places (posts) a message in the message queue associated with the thread that created the specified window and returns without waiting for the thread to process the message. Handle to the window whose window procedure is to receive the message. The following values have special meanings. HWND_BROADCAST The message is posted to all top-level windows in the system, including disabled or invisible unowned windows, overlapped windows, and pop-up windows. The message is not posted to child windows. NULL The function behaves like a call to PostThreadMessage with the dwThreadId parameter set to the identifier of the current thread. Specifies the message to be posted. Specifies additional message-specific information. Specifies additional message-specific information. The GetFocus function retrieves the handle to the window that has the keyboard focus, if the window is attached to the calling thread's message queue. The return value is the handle to the window with the keyboard focus. If the calling thread's message queue does not have an associated window with the keyboard focus, the return value is NULL. The IsChild function tests whether a window is a child window or descendant window of a specified parent window. A child window is the direct descendant of a specified parent window if that parent window is in the chain of parent windows; the chain of parent windows leads from the original overlapped or pop-up window to the child window. Handle to the parent window. Handle to the window to be tested. The keybd_event function synthesizes a keystroke. The system can use such a synthesized keystroke to generate a WM_KEYUP or WM_KEYDOWN message. The keyboard driver's interrupt handler calls the keybd_event function. Specifies a virtual-key code. The code must be a value in the range 1 to 254. This parameter is not used. Specifies various aspects of function operation. This parameter can be one or more of the following values. KEYEVENTF_EXTENDEDKEY If specified, the scan code was preceded by a prefix byte having the value 0xE0 (224). KEYEVENTF_KEYUP If specified, the key is being released. If not specified, the key is being depressed. Specifies an additional value associated with the key stroke. The GetKeyState function retrieves the status of the specified virtual key. The status specifies whether the key is up, down, or toggled (on, off��alternating each time the key is pressed). Specifies a virtual key. If the desired virtual key is a letter or digit (A through Z, a through z, or 0 through 9), nVirtKey must be set to the ASCII value of that character. For other keys, it must be a virtual-key code. If a non-English keyboard layout is used, virtual keys with values in the range ASCII A through Z and 0 through 9 are used to specify most of the character keys. For example, for the German keyboard layout, the virtual key of value ASCII O (0x4F) refers to the "o" key, whereas VK_OEM_1 refers to the "o with umlaut" key. The return value specifies the status of the specified virtual key, as follows: If the high-order bit is 1, the key is down; otherwise, it is up. If the low-order bit is 1, the key is toggled. A key, such as the CAPS LOCK key, is toggled if it is turned on. The key is off and untoggled if the low-order bit is 0. A toggle key's indicator light (if any) on the keyboard will be on when the key is toggled, and off when the key is untoggled. The GetTextMetrics function fills the specified buffer with the metrics for the currently selected font. Handle to the device context. Pointer to the TEXTMETRIC structure that receives the text metrics. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. If the function fails, the return value is zero. Windows NT/2000/XP: To get extended error information, call GetLastError. This function selects an object into a specified device context. The new object replaces the previous object of the same type. Handle to the device context. Handle to the gdi object to be selected. If the selected object is not a region, the handle of the object being replaced indicates success. If the selected object is a region, one of the following values indicates success. ------------------------------------------------------------------- | Value | Description | |-----------------------------------------------------------------| | SIMPLEREGION | Region consists of a single rectangle. | | COMPLEXREGION | Region consists of more than one rectangle. | | NULLREGION | Region is empty. | ------------------------------------------------------------------- NULL indicates that an error occurred and the selected object is not a region. Otherwise, a GDI_ERROR value is returned. The DeleteObject function deletes a logical pen, brush, font, bitmap, region, or palette, freeing all system resources associated with the object. After the object is deleted, the specified handle is no longer valid. Handle to a logical pen, brush, font, bitmap, region, or palette. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. If the specified handle is not valid or is currently selected into a DC, the return value is zero. Windows NT/2000/XP: To get extended error information, call GetLastError. Do not delete a drawing object (pen or brush) while it is still selected into a DC. When a pattern brush is deleted, the bitmap associated with the brush is not deleted. The bitmap must be deleted independently. The PeekMessage function dispatches incoming sent messages, checks the thread message queue for a posted message, and retrieves the message (if any exist). Pointer to an MSG structure that receives message information. Handle to the window whose messages are to be examined. The window must belong to the current thread. If hWnd is NULL, PeekMessage retrieves messages for any window that belongs to the current thread. If hWnd is INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE, PeekMessage retrieves messages whose hWnd value is NULL, as posted by the PostThreadMessage function. Specifies the value of the first message in the range of messages to be examined. Use WM_KEYFIRST to specify the first keyboard message or WM_MOUSEFIRST to specify the first mouse message. If wMsgFilterMin and wMsgFilterMax are both zero, PeekMessage returns all available messages (that is, no range filtering is performed). Specifies the value of the last message in the range of messages to be examined. Use WM_KEYLAST to specify the last keyboard message or WM_MOUSELAST to specify the last mouse message. If wMsgFilterMin and wMsgFilterMax are both zero, PeekMessage returns all available messages (that is, no range filtering is performed). Specifies how messages are handled. This parameter can be one of the following values. PM_NOREMOVE Messages are not removed from the queue after processing by PeekMessage. PM_REMOVE Messages are removed from the queue after processing by PeekMessage. You can optionally combine the value PM_NOYIELD with either PM_NOREMOVE or PM_REMOVE. This flag prevents the system from releasing any thread that is waiting for the caller to go idle (see WaitForInputIdle). By default, all message types are processed. To specify that only certain message should be processed, specify one or more of the following values. PM_QS_INPUT Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: Process mouse and keyboard messages. PM_QS_PAINT Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: Process paint messages. PM_QS_POSTMESSAGE Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: Process all posted messages, including timers and hotkeys. PM_QS_SENDMESSAGE Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP: Process all sent messages. If a message is available, the return value is nonzero. If no messages are available, the return value is zero. This function draws a rectangle in the style used to indicate that the rectangle has the focus. Handle to the device context. Long pointer to a RECT structure that specifies the logical coordinates of the rectangle. true indicates success. false indicates failure. To get extended error information, call GetLastError. DrawFocusRect works only in MM_TEXT mode. Because DrawFocusRect is an XOR function, calling it a second time with the same rectangle removes the rectangle from the screen. This function draws a rectangle that cannot be scrolled. To scroll an area containing a rectangle drawn by this function, call DrawFocusRect to remove the rectangle from the screen, scroll the area, and then call DrawFocusRect again to draw the rectangle in the new position. Windows XP: The focus rectangle can now be thicker than 1 pixel, so it is more visible for high-resolution, high-density displays and accessibility needs. This is handled by the SPI_SETFOCUSBORDERWIDTH and SPI_SETFOCUSBORDERHEIGHT in SystemParametersInfo. The GetWindowOrgEx function retrieves the x-coordinates and y-coordinates of the window origin for the specified device context. The HDC.Handle to the device context. Pointer to a POINT structure that receives the coordinates, in logical units, of the window origin. A bool value, true if the operation succeeds, otherwise, false. The SetWindowOrgEx function specifies which window point maps to the viewport origin (0,0). Handle to the device context. Specifies the x-coordinate, in logical units, of the new window origin. Specifies the y-coordinate, in logical units, of the new window origin. Pointer to a POINT structure that receives the previous origin of the window, in logical units. If lpPoint is IntPtr.Zero, this parameter is not used. A bool value, true if the operation succeeds, otherwise, false. The SendMessage function sends the specified message to a window or windows. It calls the window procedure for the specified window and does not return until the window procedure has processed the message. Handle to the window whose window procedure will receive the message. If this parameter is HWND_BROADCAST, the message is sent to all top-level windows in the system, including disabled or invisible unowned windows, overlapped windows, and pop-up windows; but the message is not sent to child windows. Specifies the message to be sent. Specifies additional message-specific information. Specifies additional message-specific information. Retrieves the thread identifier of the calling thread. The return value is the thread identifier of the calling thread. Until the thread terminates, the thread identifier uniquely identifies the thread throughout the system. The Ellipse function draws an ellipse. The center of the ellipse is the center of the specified bounding rectangle. The ellipse is outlined by using the current pen and is filled by using the current brush. Handle to the device context. Specifies the x-coordinate, in logical coordinates, of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle. Specifies the y-coordinate, in logical coordinates, of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle. Specifies the x-coordinate, in logical coordinates, of the lower-right corner of the bounding rectangle. Specifies the y-coordinate, in logical coordinates, of the lower-right corner of the bounding rectangle. Retrieves the name of the current visual style, and optionally retrieves the color scheme name and size name. [out] Pointer to a string that receives the theme path and file name. [in] Value of type int that contains the maximum number of characters allowed in the theme file name. [out] Pointer to a string that receives the color scheme name. This parameter may be set to NULL. [in] Value of type int that contains the maximum number of characters allowed in the color scheme name. [out] Pointer to a string that receives the size name. This parameter may be set to NULL. [in] Value of type int that contains the maximum number of characters allowed in the size name. Returns S_OK if successful, or an error value otherwise. Retrieves information about the specified window. The function also retrieves the value at a specified offset into the extra window memory. Handle to the window and, indirectly, the class to which the window belongs. Specifies the zero-based offset to the value to be retrieved. Valid values are in the range zero through the number of bytes of extra window memory, minus the size of an integer. To retrieve any other value, specify one of the following values. GWL_EXSTYLE Retrieves the extended window styles. For more information, see CreateWindowEx. GWL_STYLE Retrieves the window styles. GWLP_WNDPROC Retrieves the pointer to the window procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the window procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the window procedure. GWLP_HINSTANCE Retrieves a handle to the application instance. GWLP_HWNDPARENT Retrieves a handle to the parent window, if there is one. GWLP_ID Retrieves the identifier of the window. GWLP_USERDATA Retrieves the user data associated with the window. This data is intended for use by the application that created the window. Its value is initially zero. The following values are also available when the hWnd parameter identifies a dialog box. DWLP_DLGPROC Retrieves the pointer to the dialog box procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the dialog box procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the dialog box procedure. DWLP_MSGRESULT Retrieves the return value of a message processed in the dialog box procedure. DWLP_USER Retrieves extra information private to the application, such as handles or pointers. If the function succeeds, the return value is the requested value. If the function fails, the return value is zero. To get extended error information, call GetLastError. If you are retrieving a pointer or a handle, this function supersedes the GetWindowLong function. (Pointers and handles are 32 bits on 32-bit Microsoft Windows and 64 bits on 64-bit Windows.) To write code that is compatible with both 32-bit and 64-bit versions of Windows, use GetWindowLongPtr. Retrieves information about the specified window. The function also retrieves the value at a specified offset into the extra window memory. Handle to the window and, indirectly, the class to which the window belongs. Specifies the zero-based offset to the value to be retrieved. Valid values are in the range zero through the number of bytes of extra window memory, minus the size of an integer. To retrieve any other value, specify one of the following values. GWL_EXSTYLE Retrieves the extended window styles. For more information, see CreateWindowEx. GWL_STYLE Retrieves the window styles. GWLP_WNDPROC Retrieves the pointer to the window procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the window procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the window procedure. GWLP_HINSTANCE Retrieves a handle to the application instance. GWLP_HWNDPARENT Retrieves a handle to the parent window, if there is one. GWLP_ID Retrieves the identifier of the window. GWLP_USERDATA Retrieves the user data associated with the window. This data is intended for use by the application that created the window. Its value is initially zero. The following values are also available when the hWnd parameter identifies a dialog box. DWLP_DLGPROC Retrieves the pointer to the dialog box procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the dialog box procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the dialog box procedure. DWLP_MSGRESULT Retrieves the return value of a message processed in the dialog box procedure. DWLP_USER Retrieves extra information private to the application, such as handles or pointers. If the function succeeds, the return value is the requested value. If the function fails, the return value is zero. To get extended error information, call GetLastError. If you are retrieving a pointer or a handle, this function supersedes the GetWindowLong function. (Pointers and handles are 32 bits on 32-bit Microsoft Windows and 64 bits on 64-bit Windows.) To write code that is compatible with both 32-bit and 64-bit versions of Windows, use GetWindowLongPtr. The x86 os will not support GetWindowLongPtr in user32. So this method is needed. Handle to the window and, indirectly, the class to which the window belongs. Specifies the zero-based offset to the value to be retrieved. Valid values are in the range zero through the number of bytes of extra window memory, minus the size of an integer. To retrieve any other value, specify one of the following values. GWL_EXSTYLE Retrieves the extended window styles. For more information, see CreateWindowEx. GWL_STYLE Retrieves the window styles. GWLP_WNDPROC Retrieves the pointer to the window procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the window procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the window procedure. GWLP_HINSTANCE Retrieves a handle to the application instance. GWLP_HWNDPARENT Retrieves a handle to the parent window, if there is one. GWLP_ID Retrieves the identifier of the window. GWLP_USERDATA Retrieves the user data associated with the window. This data is intended for use by the application that created the window. Its value is initially zero. The following values are also available when the hWnd parameter identifies a dialog box. DWLP_DLGPROC Retrieves the pointer to the dialog box procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the dialog box procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the dialog box procedure. DWLP_MSGRESULT Retrieves the return value of a message processed in the dialog box procedure. DWLP_USER Retrieves extra information private to the application, such as handles or pointers. If the function succeeds, the return value is the requested value. If the function fails, the return value is zero. To get extended error information, call GetLastError. Changes an attribute of the specified window. The function also sets a value at the specified offset in the extra window memory. Handle to the window and, indirectly, the class to which the window belongs. The SetWindowLongPtr function fails if the window specified by the hWnd parameter does not belong to the same process as the calling thread. Specifies the zero-based offset to the value to be retrieved. Valid values are in the range zero through the number of bytes of extra window memory, minus the size of an integer. To retrieve any other value, specify one of the following values. GWL_EXSTYLE Retrieves the extended window styles. For more information, see CreateWindowEx. GWL_STYLE Retrieves the window styles. GWLP_WNDPROC Retrieves the pointer to the window procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the window procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the window procedure. GWLP_HINSTANCE Retrieves a handle to the application instance. GWLP_HWNDPARENT Retrieves a handle to the parent window, if there is one. GWLP_ID Retrieves the identifier of the window. GWLP_USERDATA Retrieves the user data associated with the window. This data is intended for use by the application that created the window. Its value is initially zero. The following values are also available when the hWnd parameter identifies a dialog box. DWLP_DLGPROC Retrieves the pointer to the dialog box procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the dialog box procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the dialog box procedure. DWLP_MSGRESULT Retrieves the return value of a message processed in the dialog box procedure. DWLP_USER Retrieves extra information private to the application, such as handles or pointers. Specifies the replacement value. If the function succeeds, the return value is the previous value of the specified offset. If the function fails, the return value is zero. To get extended error information, call GetLastError. Changes an attribute of the specified window. The function also sets a value at the specified offset in the extra window memory. Handle to the window and, indirectly, the class to which the window belongs. The SetWindowLongPtr function fails if the window specified by the hWnd parameter does not belong to the same process as the calling thread. Specifies the zero-based offset to the value to be retrieved. Valid values are in the range zero through the number of bytes of extra window memory, minus the size of an integer. To retrieve any other value, specify one of the following values. GWL_EXSTYLE Retrieves the extended window styles. For more information, see CreateWindowEx. GWL_STYLE Retrieves the window styles. GWLP_WNDPROC Retrieves the pointer to the window procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the window procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the window procedure. GWLP_HINSTANCE Retrieves a handle to the application instance. GWLP_HWNDPARENT Retrieves a handle to the parent window, if there is one. GWLP_ID Retrieves the identifier of the window. GWLP_USERDATA Retrieves the user data associated with the window. This data is intended for use by the application that created the window. Its value is initially zero. The following values are also available when the hWnd parameter identifies a dialog box. DWLP_DLGPROC Retrieves the pointer to the dialog box procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the dialog box procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the dialog box procedure. DWLP_MSGRESULT Retrieves the return value of a message processed in the dialog box procedure. DWLP_USER Retrieves extra information private to the application, such as handles or pointers. Specifies the replacement value. If the function succeeds, the return value is the previous value of the specified offset. If the function fails, the return value is zero. To get extended error information, call GetLastError. Changes an attribute of the specified window. The function also sets a value at the specified offset in the extra window memory. Handle to the window and, indirectly, the class to which the window belongs. The SetWindowLongPtr function fails if the window specified by the hWnd parameter does not belong to the same process as the calling thread. Specifies the zero-based offset to the value to be retrieved. Valid values are in the range zero through the number of bytes of extra window memory, minus the size of an integer. To retrieve any other value, specify one of the following values. GWL_EXSTYLE Retrieves the extended window styles. For more information, see CreateWindowEx. GWL_STYLE Retrieves the window styles. GWLP_WNDPROC Retrieves the pointer to the window procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the window procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the window procedure. GWLP_HINSTANCE Retrieves a handle to the application instance. GWLP_HWNDPARENT Retrieves a handle to the parent window, if there is one. GWLP_ID Retrieves the identifier of the window. GWLP_USERDATA Retrieves the user data associated with the window. This data is intended for use by the application that created the window. Its value is initially zero. The following values are also available when the hWnd parameter identifies a dialog box. DWLP_DLGPROC Retrieves the pointer to the dialog box procedure, or a handle representing the pointer to the dialog box procedure. You must use the CallWindowProc function to call the dialog box procedure. DWLP_MSGRESULT Retrieves the return value of a message processed in the dialog box procedure. DWLP_USER Retrieves extra information private to the application, such as handles or pointers. Specifies the replacement value. If the function succeeds, the return value is the previous value of the specified offset. If the function fails, the return value is zero. To get extended error information, call GetLastError. This method is provided because of in x86 os, the user32 does not support SetWindowLongPtr function. This function converts a string generated by the StringFromCLSID function back into the original class identifier. Long pointer to the null-terminated string that represents the class identifier. Pointer to the class identifier on return. This function creates on the local system a single uninitialized object of the class associated with a specified class identifier. Class identifier associated with the data and code that are used to create the object. If NULL, indicates that the object is not being created as part of an aggregate. If non-NULL, pointer to the aggregate object's IUnknown interface (the controlling IUnknown). Specifies the context in which the code that manages the newly created object will run. The only valid value for this parameter is CLSCTX_INPROC_SERVER. This is from the enumeration CLSCTX. Any other value results in a return value of E_NOTIMPL. Reference to the identifier of the interface to be used to communicate with the object. Address of pointer variable that receives the interface pointer requested in riid. Upon successful return, *ppv contains the requested interface pointer. Upon failure, *ppv contains NULL If return value is S_OK, an instance of the specified object class was successfully created. if return value is REGDB_E_CLASSNOTREG, a specified class is not registed. Initializes the COM library on the current thread and identifies the concurrency model as single-thread apartment (STA). Applications must initialize the COM library before they can call COM library functions other than CoGetMalloc and memory allocation functions. Reserved; must be NULL. Closes the COM library on the current thread, unloads all DLLs loaded by the thread, frees any other resources that the thread maintains, and forces all RPC connections on the thread to close. This method used to get richedit contrl's charformat. The h WND. The MSG. The w param. Specifies the character formatting that applies to the control. It can be one of the following values. SCF_DEFAULT Gets the default character formatting. SCF_SELECTION Gets the current selection's character formatting. The l param. Pointer to a CHARFORMAT structure. If the selection formatting is being retrieved, the structure receives the attributes of the first character and the dwMask member specifies which attributes are consistent throughout the entire selection. Microsoft Rich Edit 2.0 and later: This parameter can be a pointer to a CHARFORMAT2 structure, which is an extension of the CHARFORMAT structure. Before sending the EM_GETCHARFORMAT message, set the structure's cbSize member to indicate the version of the structure. This message returns the value of the dwMask member of the CHARFORMAT structure. Sends the message to get richeidt control's paraformat. The h WND. The MSG. This parameter is not used; it must be zero. Pointer to a PARAFORMAT structure that receives the paragraph formatting attributes of the current selection. If more than one paragraph is selected, the structure receives the attributes of the first paragraph, and the dwMask member specifies which attributes are consistent throughout the entire selection. Microsoft Rich Edit 2.0 and later: This parameter can be a pointer to a PARAFORMAT2 structure, which is an extension of the PARAFORMAT structure. Before sending the EM_GETPARAFORMAT message, set the structure's cbSize member to indicate the version of the structure. This message returns the value of the dwMask member of the PARAFORMAT structure. The GetWindowDC function retrieves the device context (DC) for the entire window, including title bar, menus, and scroll bars. A window device context permits painting anywhere in a window, because the origin of the device context is the upper-left corner of the window instead of the client area. Handle to the window with a device context that is to be retrieved. If this value is NULL, GetWindowDC retrieves the device context for the entire screen. If the function succeeds, the return value is a handle to a device context for the specified window. If the function fails, the return value is NULL, indicating an error or an invalid hWnd parameter. The ReleaseDC function releases a device context (DC), freeing it for use by other applications. The effect of the ReleaseDC function depends on the type of DC. It frees only common and window DCs. It has no effect on class or private DCs. Handle to the window whose DC is to be released. Handle to the DC to be released. The return value indicates whether the DC was released. If the DC was released, the return value is 1. If the DC was not released, the return value is zero. The GetWindowRect function retrieves the dimensions of the bounding rectangle of the specified window. The dimensions are given in screen coordinates that are relative to the upper-left corner of the screen. Handle to the window. Indicates the structure that receives the screen coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners of the window. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. If the function fails, the return value is zero. The MapVirtualKey function translates (maps) a virtual-key code into a scan code or character value, or translates a scan code into a virtual-key code. [in] Specifies the virtual-key code or scan code for a key. How this value is interpreted depends on the value of the uMapType parameter. [in] Specifies the translation to perform. The value of this parameter depends on the value of the uCode parameter. The return value is either a scan code, a virtual-key code, or a character value, depending on the value of uCode and uMapType. If there is no translation, the return value is zero. The GetKeyboardState function copies the status of the 256 virtual keys to the specified buffer. [in] Pointer to the 256-byte array that receives the status data for each virtual key. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. If the function fails, the return value is zero. The ToAscii function translates the specified virtual-key code and keyboard state to the corresponding character or characters. The function translates the code using the input language and physical keyboard layout identified by the keyboard layout handle. [in] Specifies the virtual-key code to be translated. [in] Specifies the hardware scan code of the key to be translated. The high-order bit of this value is set if the key is up (not pressed). [in] Pointer to a 256-byte array that contains the current keyboard state. Each element (byte) in the array contains the state of one key. If the high-order bit of a byte is set, the key is down (pressed). The low bit, if set, indicates that the key is toggled on. In this function, only the toggle bit of the CAPS LOCK key is relevant. The toggle state of the NUM LOCK and SCROLL LOCK keys is ignored. [out] Pointer to the buffer that receives the translated character or characters. [in] Specifies whether a menu is active. This parameter must be 1 if a menu is active, or 0 otherwise. If the specified key is a dead key, the return value is negative. Otherwise, it is one of the following values. The GetCapture function retrieves a handle to the window (if any) that has captured the mouse. Only one window at a time can capture the mouse; this window receives mouse input whether or not the cursor is within its borders. The return value is a handle to the capture window associated with the current thread. If no window in the thread has captured the mouse, the return value is NULL. Sets an input scope for the specified window. The window to set the scope on. The input scope to associate with the window. To remove the input scope association, pass IS_DEFAULT to this parameter. Return S_OK if the method was successfully executed. namespace = default namespace + folder [class name = resource file name] Represents the basic functionality used to get string information this assembly resource. Sets the description visual designers can display when referencing an event, extender, or property. The flag used to indicated whether the description string been replaced. Initializes a new instance of the SRBaseDescriptionAttribute class, using the specified description. The application-defined description text. Gets description text associated with the item monitored. When implemented in a derived class, gets a unique identifier for this . An that is a unique identifier for the attribute. Specifies the category in which the property or event will be displayed in a visual designer. Initializes a new instance of the SRBaseCategoryAttribute class, using the specified category. The application-defined category text. Looks up the localized name of a given category. The name of the category to look up. The localized name of the category. Defines a enumerator for browsing the . Resets the character set enumerator to start the browsing. Gets the current browsed item in the set. A char array indicates a meaning character in the Japanese. Move to next item in the character set. true, there have a item to be browsed. false, the browsing has finished. Defines a character set, all the characters in it may be converted each other. Gets a start point for browsing the character set. It also is the start point of the converting. A char array indicates a item in the character set. Gets the key item in the character set. A char indicates a key item that can be used to identify a character set. Gets the enumerator for the . Returns the enumerator for the . Overridden, Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current Object. The Object to compare with the current Object. true if the specified Object is equal to the current Object; otherwise, false. Serves as a hash function for a particular type, suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a hash table. A hash code for the current Object. Defines the "==" operator, for class. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. If two operands are equal,return true, otherwise, return false. Defines the "!=" operator, for class. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. If two operands are equal,return false, otherwise, return true. Creates a for special character. A char indicates the special character. Return a that contains the converted characters of special character. Creates a for special character. A char indicates the special character. A char indicates a character that follows the special character. Return a that contains the converted characters of special character. Creates a for special character. A string indicates the string. A int indicates a special character in the string. Return a that contains the converted characters of special character in the string. Defines the converted character set for alphabet. Defines the enumerator for AlphabetConvertedCharSet. A enumeration indicates the converted states. Indicates the owner of the enumerator. A char array indicates current state. Initializes a new instance of the . Indicates the owner of the enumerator. Gets the current browsed item in the set. A char array indicates a meaning character in the Japanese. Resets the character set enumerator to start the browsing. Move to next item in the character set. true, there have a item to be browsed. false, the browsing has finished. A char indicates browsing seed. Initializes a new instance of the AlphabetConvertedCharSet class. A char indicates a alphabet character. Gets a start point for browsing the set. A char array indicates a meaning character in the Japanese. Gets the key item in the set. A char indicates a key item that can be used to identify a character set. Gets the enumerator for the . Returns the enumerator for the . Defines the converted character set for the kana characters. Defines the enumerator for the KanaConvertedCharSet. Indicates the characters. A indicates the current step index in the character array. Add the items for Hiragana. Add the items for Full Katakana. Add the items for Half Katakana. Initializes a new instance of the KanaConvertedCharSetEnumerator Indicates the owner of the KanaConvertedCharSetEnumerator. Gets the current browsed item in the set. A char array indicates a meaning character in the Japanese. Resets the character set enumerator to start the browsing. Move to next item in the character set. true, there have a item to be browsed. false, the browsing has finished. A char indicates browsing seed. Initializes a new instance of the KanaConvertedCharSet class. A char indicates a kana character. Initializes a new instance of the KanaConvertedCharSet class. A char indicates a kana character. A char indicates a character that follows the kana character.. Initializes the result of the current instance. Gets a start point for browsing the set. A char array indicates a meaning character in the Japanese. Gets the key item in the set. A char indicates a key item that can be used to identify a character set. I choose the Upper Hiragana as the key. Gets the enumerator for the . Returns the enumerator for the . Defines the enumerator of Normal character set. Defines the enumerator for NormalConvertedCharSet. A enumeration indicates the converted states. Indicates the owner of the enumerator. A char array indicates current state. Initializes a new instance of the . Indicates the owner of the enumerator. Gets the current browsed item in the set. A char array indicates a meaning character in the Japanese. Resets the character set enumerator to start the browsing. Move to next item in the character set. true, there have a item to be browsed. false, the browsing has finished. A char indicates browsing seed. Initializes a new instance of the AlphabetCharacterGroupEnumerator class. A char indicates a alphabet character. Gets a start point for browsing the set. A char array indicates a meaning character in the Japanese. Gets the key item in the set. A char indicates a key item that can be used to identify a character set. Gets the enumerator for the . Returns the enumerator for the . Summary description for Filter class. Indicates whether the character type is included. A bool value indicates whether the char can be auto converted automatically. Initializes a new instance of the Filter class. Gets or sets the include for the filter. A bool value that indicates whether the character type is included. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the char can be converted automatically. A bool value, true if the char can be converted automatically; otherwise, false. Check whether the character is valid. The character to be checked. The value indicating whether the character is valid. Determines whether the specified character is valid. The string contains the checked character. The character index in the string. The character real length whose unit is . if the specified text is valid; otherwise, . Example for : 1. 'A', length is 1. 2. Emoji [U+0023 U+20E3], length is 2. 3. IVS [U+845B U+E0100], length is 3. Check whether the character is valid. The string to be checked. The character index in the string. The convert string. This method hold on old policy When return, If operatoin succsss(return value isn't string.Empty), the should be updated to the next character position; Otherwise(return value is string.Empty), the will hold on old value; Check whether the character is valid. The string to be checked. The character index in the string. Indicates the length of the checked character. The convert string. This method used new policy: When return, the should be updated to the next character position. Convert the character in the special index. The string to be converted. The character index in the string. Indicates the characters number used to converted. The convert string. The character, which is invoked by this method, is an invalid character, so need to convert. For , if converted success(returned value isn't string.Empty), when return, the index is updated to the next character position; Otherwise, it holds on the current position. Case: "ギ" --> "ぎ" the checked character length is 1 ('キ'), but when convert, we must convert 'キ' + '゙' to 'ぎ'. Parses the format string and config the filter. A string the format string. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Emoji character or not. A string. The character position in s. The Emoji character length which unit is . true if the character at position index in s is a Emoji character; otherwise, false. If not Emoji character, is 0. The filter for FullWidthFilter class Initializes a new instance of the DBCSField class. The filter for FullWidthKatakanaFilter class Initializes a new instance of the FullWidthKatakanaFilter class. The filter for DBCSSymbolsFilter class Initializes a new instance of the DBCSSymbolsFilter class. The filter for HalfWidthFilter class Initializes a new instance of the SBCSField class. The filter for HalfWidthKatakanaFilter class Initializes a new instance of the HalfWidthKatakanaFilter class. The filter for SBCSSymbolsFilter class Initializes a new instance of the SBCSSymbolsFilter class. The filter for HiraganaFilter class Initializes a new instance of the HiraganaFilter class. The filter for IntersectFilter class 2004.04.06 Added by Hannah for the new feature 0029 in V3.0 Forbidden charactor with Format Indicates a filter group. Initializes a new instance of the IntersectFilter class. The filters. Represents the IVS char definition table form Unicode.org Please visit http://www.unicode.org/ivd/ for the newest definition table if needed. And current used version is 2012-03-02. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a IVS element or not. A string. The character position in s. The IVS element length which unit is . true if the character at position index in s is a IVS character; otherwise, false. If not IVS character, is 0. This class is used to determine whether given char(s) is of specified JIS encoding. Represents the 'Kuten' range defined by the JISX standard. The constructor of JISRegionRange class. The lower bound. The upper bound. The region ID. Checks whether the given char is of Shift JIS encoding. The char of which the encoding is to be checked. true if the given char is of Shift JIS encoding, otherwise, false. Checks whether the given char is of Shift JIS encoding. The char list of which the encoding is to be checked. true if all the chars within the given list is of Shift JIS encoding, otherwise, false. Checks whether the given char is of JIS X 0208 encoding. The char of which the encoding is to be checked. true if the given char is of Shift JIS X 0208 encoding, otherwise, false. Checks whether the given char is of JIS X 0208 encoding. The char of which the encoding is to be checked. The JIS X 0208 region ID of the given char. true if the given char is of Shift JIS X 0208 encoding, otherwise, false. Checks whether the given char is of JIS X 0201 encoding. The char of which the encoding is to be checked. true if the given char is of Shift JIS X 0201 encoding, otherwise, false. The filter for LimitedFilter class Indicates the character set, which is included. Indicates the character set, which is excluded. Initializes a new instance of the LimitedFilter class. A string value include the chars that can be accepted. A string value include the chars that can not be accepted. The filter for Filters.RangeFilter class Indicates the character set, which is included. Indicates the character set, which is excluded. Initializes a new instance of the LimitedFilter class. A char value indicates the start char of the range. A char value indicates the end char of the range. Defines the class. This filter used to filter the surrogate char. Represents the filter, which can check the character is valid in text editor. Indicates the character type. A string indicates the format string. A CharType indicates which type is allowed. Gets or sets the format string. A string indicates the format string. Gets whether the filter allow DBCS. A bool flag indicates whether the filter allow DBCS. Gets whether the filter allow SBCS. A bool flag indicates whether the filter allow SBCS. Initializes a new instance of the class. Parses the format string and config the filter. A string the format string. Checks whether the special character is upper case. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is upper case, return true, otherwise, return false. Checks whether the special character is lower case. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is lower case, return true, otherwise, return false. Checks whether the special character is a number. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is a number, return true, otherwise, return false. Checks whether the special character is a binary character. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is a binary character, return true, otherwise, return false. Checks whether the special character is a hex character. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is a hex character, return true, otherwise, return false. Checks whether the special character is a symbol character. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is a symbol character, return true, otherwise, return false. Checks whether the special character is a number symbol character. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is a number symbol character, return true, otherwise, return false. Checks whether the special character is a katakana character. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is a katakana character, return true, otherwise, return false. Checks whether the special character is a hiragana character. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is a hiragana character, return true, otherwise, return false. Checks whether the special character is a DBCS character. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is a DBCS character, return true, otherwise, return false. Checks whether the special character is a SBCS character. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is a SBCS character, return true, otherwise, return false. Checks whether the special character is a upper case katakana character. A char indicates the character to be checked. If the character is a upper case katakana character, return true, otherwise, return false. Represents the filter, which can check the character is valid in text editor. Compare with , it supports normal character. Indicates all keyword characters in format. Stores all normal characters defined in format. Indicates whether the format only includes normal character or not. Gets the normal character list. The normal character list. Parses the format string and config the filter. A string the format string. Preprocess the format string. A string the format string. The format string which is exclude normal character. Determines whether the character is normal character or space character or not. The specific character. true if the character is normal character or space character; otherwise, false. Reture false means the character is: Keyword, '^' or '\'. Represents the filter, which can check the character is valid in text editor. Compare with IM5 , it supports include format and exclude format at the same time. A string indicates the format string. Indicates the include TextFilter. Indicates the exclude TextFilter. Initializes a new instance of the class. Gets or sets the format string. A string indicates the format string. Gets or sets the include TextFilter. The include TextFilter. Gets or sets the exclude TextFilter. The exclude TextFilter. Gets a value indicating whether this instance has include TextFilter or not. true if this instance has include TextFilter; otherwise, false. Gets a value indicating whether this instance has exclude TextFilter or not. true if this instance has exclude TextFilter; otherwise, false. Parses the format string and config the filter. A string the format string. Splits the format to include format and exclude format. The entire format string. The include format string. The exclude format string. Creates the sub text filter by the given format. A string value indicates the format string. Preprocess the format string. A string the format string. The format string which is exclude normal character. Preprocess the format string. A string the format string. The format string which is exclude normal character. Convert the specific IVS character to non-IVS or non-IVS character to IVS. Indicates the string to be converted. The character index in the string. Indicates the characters number used to converted. 1. The return value is only contains the converted result from the specific converted charcter. Other text in the input will not contained. 2. If input is IVS character, converted and return the related non-IVS character. 3. IF input is not IVS character, converted and return the related IVS character. The filter for UnionFilter class Indicates a filter group. Initializes a new instance of the UnionFilter class. The filters. The filter for distinguish the Upper and Lower kana. This filter will be used with the HalfWidthKatakanaFilter, FullWidthKatakanaFilter and HiraganaFilter. Initializes a new instance of the HiraganaFilter class. An const char value indicates the DBCS space character. An const char value indicates the SBCS space character. An const char value indicates the SBCS back slash character. An const char value indicates the SBCS caret character. An const char value indicates the horizontal tab character. An const char value indicates the new line character. An const char value indicates the carriage return character. Base class for C1ColorPicker and C1FontPicker controls. This struct is for internal use only. This struct is for internal use only. Initializes a new instance of the C1BasePicker class. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Determines the style of the control's border. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Should be overridden in deviced class and convert string to value. Should be overridden in derived class and convert value to string. Represents a Windows button control supporting additional visual styles. Initializes a new instance of the C1Button class. Releases the resources used by the C1Button. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which a control can be fitted. The custom-sized area for a control. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Gets or sets the visual style of the control. Resets to the default value. Tests whether should be serialized. True if should be serialized, false otherwise. Invokes the VisualStyleChanged event. The event arguments. Occurs when the VisualStyle property has changed. Gets or sets the base visual style of the control. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. True if VisualStyleBaseStyle should be serialized, false otherwise. Gets or sets a value that determines if the foreground is drawn using visual styles, if supported. Default Theme root path. This method is called when theme is changed. New theme. Represents a Windows checkbox control supporting data binding to data source fields of Boolean, String, or Integer types. Initializes a new instance of the C1CheckBox class. Releases the resources used by the C1CheckBox. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. The data source object to which the control is bound. The field of the data source object to which the control is bound. Type of the Value property. Gets or sets whether the checkbox should be disabled when it is bound to an empty data source, i.e. CurrencyManager.Count = 0. Gets or sets the current representation of the visual information contained in the control. Occurs when the Value property has changed. Invokes the ValueChanged event. The event arguments. Invokes the CheckStateChanged event. The event arguments. Translates between string values and check box states. Gets or sets the visual style of the control. Occurs when the VisualStyle property has changed. Invokes the VisualStyleChanged event. The event arguments. Gets or sets the border style of the C1CheckBox control. Gets or sets the border color of the control. Use the BorderColor property to specify the border color of the control. This property is set using a object. Gets or sets the base visual style of the control. Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which a control can be fitted. The custom-sized area for a control. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Default C1CheckBox path in Theme xml file. Default C1Button path in Theme xml file. This method called when theme is changed. New theme. Translates between string values and check box states. Value for Checked state. Value for Unchecked state. Value for Indeterminate state. Determines if DbNull is used for indeterminate state of check box. List of colors defined by Items property in format ColorValue;Alias. System colors. Named colors. Represents a Windows color picker control supporting additional visual styles. Initializes a new instance of the C1ColorPicker class. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the transparent color can de selected. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the empty color can de selected. Gets or sets the current color. Gets or sets a caption for the empty color. Gets or sets the current color representation of the visual information contained in the control. Fires when the property changes. Default path for the control in xml theme file. Represents drop down color picker form. Initializes a new instance of the C1ColorPickerDropDownForm class. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Represents a composite control combining a textbox and a drop-down item list. Initializes a new instance of the C1ComboBox class. Gets or sets an option that controls how candidates searching works in auto-suggest mode. works together with and properties. The works only if CustomSource"/> or ListItems value is used in . The property does not have any effect if is any of AllSystemSources, AllUrl, FileSystem, FileSystemDirectories, HistoryList, None, RecentlyUsedList, HistoryList. The property does not have any effect if is any of Node or Append. Items in Auto-Suggest mode are shown without images and formatting as a plain text. enters in Auto-Suggest mode when user types a character sequence that matches the filtering criteria. This sample shows how to use the AutoSuggestMode property. C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox(); comboBox.AutoCompleteMode = AutoCompleteMode.Suggest; comboBox.AutoCompleteSource = AutoCompleteSource.ListItems; comboBox.AutoSuggestMode = AutoSuggestMode.Contains; comboBox.Items.AddRange(new string[] { "January", "February", "March", "April", "May", "June", "July", "August", "September", "October", "November", "December" }); Determines whether the spinner moves to the first item when it reaches the last, or to the last when it reaches the first. Gets an object representing the collection of the items contained in this ComboBox. Gets or sets the combobox item mode. Gets or sets the pattern to build HTML representation of combobox items. Gets or sets currently selected item in the ComboBox. Gets or sets the index specifying the currently selected item. Gets or sets the ImageList to get the images to display in the combobox items. Gets the style of the drop down form and combobox items. Gets or sets the index of the initially selected item. Gets or sets the data source for items of this C1ComboBox. Gets or sets the property to display items for this C1ComboBox control. Gets or sets the path of the property to use as the actual value for the items in the C1ComboBox control. Gets or sets the path of the property to use as the image for the items in the C1ComboBox. Keeps property synchronized with . does not have any effect if value is not a . Translates to using items data source. Gets whether the selected index changes immediately when the drop-down form is open or after the form is closed by pressing the 'enter' key. Gets or sets the maximum number of items to be shown in the drop-down portion of the . When MaxDropDownItems is 0, the height of DropDown is half of screen height. If MaxDropDownItems does not fit screen height then the result height fit the maximum available space on screen. The default height of item is height of first item of the . Gets or sets a value indicating whether the selected item changes using the mouse wheel when the isn't dropped down. Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the handles the scrolling of the parent control or not. Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the displays a tooltip for the highlighted drop-down list item or not. Gets or sets a value that indicates whether should preload items into the dropdown form after setting the data source. The default value is false which means that all items will be loaded at first drop-down opening. Set this value to true if you want to optimize drop-down opening time for a lot of items. Keep default value if you want to optimize form loading time. The does not support preloading items when the property is set for .
If you change these properties, then will clear the preloaded items: , , , , , .
Gets or set the width of the drop down box in a combo box. To enable autosizing, set this properties to -1. Sets items data source and data member for the C1ComboBox. Data source. Data member. Sets items data source, data member and initially selected item index for the C1ComboBox. Data source. Data member. Initially selected item index. Occurs when the property changes. Occurs when the property changes. Occurs before a tooltip is displayed for a highlighted drop-down list item. Allows to set tooltip options or cancel the tooltip display. Creates a new instance of the item collection. A that represents the new item collection. Raises the event. Raises the event. Raises the event. Clears selected item and index without changing Text or Value. Releases the resources used by the C1ComboBox. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Signals the object that initialization is starting. Signals the object that initialization is complete. Specifies how the visual representation of combo box items is building. C1ComboBox displays text of combo box item in the drop drown list. Each combo box item is fragment of HTML. parses the HTML fragment and displays it as the drop down items. C1ComboBox uses the same subset of HTML as C1SuperLabel does. It does not support the full HTML features. Each combo box item is fragment of HTML defined by property. parses the HTML pattern and replaces any of "{FieldName}" entires with the combo box item field value. C1ComboBox uses the same subset of HTML as C1SuperLabel does. It does not support the full HTML features. Specifies the style. Text portion of the drop down control is editable and the drop down is displayed by clicking the down arrow. This means that the user can enter a new value and is not limited to selecting an existing value. The drop down of the is displayed by clicking on either the text portion of the control or drop down button. The text portion is not editable. This means that the user cannot enter a value not existing in the drop down. Panel that stacks children vertically and also honor sizing options for individual items. Initializes a new instance of the element with specified style options. The object to use. Initializes a new instance of the element. The item width to use at layout. If -1 - use width returned by item layout. The minimum allowed item hight. Gets or sets the combobox item mode. Represents collection of drop down items. Initializes a new instance of the class. Gets or sets the item at the specified index. Gets the number of items contained in the instance. Adds an item to the . The to add to the . Adds items of the specified collection to the end of the . The specified collection of items. Removes all items from the . Determines whether an item is in the . The item to locate in the collection. Searches for the specified item and returns the zero-based index. The specified item. Inserts item into the at the specified index. Index of the item. The specified item. Inserts items into the at the specified index. Index of the item. The specified collection of items. Removes the first occurrence of a specified item from the collection. The specified item. Removes the item at the specified index of the collection. The specified index. Removes all the items that match the conditions defined by the specified predicate. Removes a range of elements from the . Index of the item. The number of items to remove. Returns an enumerator that iterates through the . Occurs when the changes, either by adding or removing an item. see Fires the CollectionChanged event. Fires the CollectionChanged event. Fires the CollectionChanged event. Fires the CollectionChanged event. Fires the CollectionChanged event. Gets a value indicating whether selected item was set after form was initialized. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Style for drop down form and combobox items. Background color of the drop down form. Color of border of the drop down form. Gets or sets padding within the drop down form. Default font of the combo box items. Space around the textual parts of the combo box items. Gets or sets a value that whether text should be allowed to wrap within the combo box items. This property applies to an item when the property is . Default text color of the combo box items. Text color of the combo box items in hot state. Border color of the combo box items in hot state. Background color of the combo box items in hot state. Resets the style to default value. TFS 73648 [C1ComboBox] C1ComboBox cannot search items when DropDownStyle is DropDownList. Provides data for the event. Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class. Index of the highlighted drop-down list item. HTML content to be displayed in the tooltip. Highlighted drop-down list item bounds (size and location of element) within its parent element, in pixels. The X coordinate of the client where the tooltip should be displayed. The Y coordinate of the client where the tooltip should be displayed. Duration of the tooltip, in milliseconds. The default value is 0 (the tooltip is always visible after display). object for setting tooltip options. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event was handled. Gets the index of the highlighted drop-down list item. Gets or sets the HTML content to be displayed in the tooltip. Gets the highlighted drop-down list item bounds (size and location) within it`s parent element, in pixels. Gets or sets the X coordinate of the client where the tooltip should be displayed. The coordinate is counted from the upper left corner of the drop-down window. Gets or sets the Y coordinate of the client where the tooltip should be displayed. The coordinate is counted from the upper left corner of the drop-down window. Gets or sets the duration of the tooltip, in milliseconds. Gets the object for setting tooltip options. This is a legacy control; use C1.Win.Calendar.C1DateEdit instead. Initializes a new instance of the class. Releases the resources used by the . true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Determines the date-time field position when a control receives input focus. Default: . If this property is set to , control used InitialSelection algorithm defined in the property. Determines whether the spinner moves to the when it reaches the , or to the when it reaches the . Gets or sets a value indicating whether to retain the current time value when the date is changed via the drop down calendar. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. The dropdown calendar object. This method is for internal use only. Enumeration value determining the formatting metod, including standard .NET format specifiers, custom and programmatic formatting. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. Performs spin up. This method has the same behavior with the Up key pressed when day field selected and increments value by one day. Performs spin up. The value that indicates the increment when spin up. This method has the same behavior with the Up key pressed. Performs spin down. This method has the same behavior with the Down key pressed when day field selected and decrements value by one day. Performs spin down. The value that indicates the decrement when spin down. This method has the same behavior with the Down key pressed. Updates selection of the text according to the property. Represents drop down calendar. Creates the instance of the class. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. This method is for internal use only. Ambient property name. Ambient property value. Gets or sets the current month display offset. This example shows current month at the center of the multi-dimensional drop down calendar. c1DateEdit1.Calendar.CalendarDimensions = new Size(3, 1); // Display current month at the center of the calendar. // Other possible values: // 0 - (Default) - at the Right // 1 - Center // 2 - Left c1DateEdit1.Calendar.CurrentMonthDisplayOffset = 1; Gets or sets VisualStyle. Resets to the default value. Tests whether should be serialized. True if should be serialized, false otherwise. Gets or sets the base visual style of the control. Gets or sets the value that is used by DateEditMonthCalendar as today's date. The default value is the current system date. Indicates whether the property should be persisted. if the property value has been changed from its default; otherwise, . Sets the property to its default value. Gets or sets the minimum allowable date. The default value is DateTime.MinValue (01/01/0001). The value is greater than the . Indicates whether the property should be persisted. if the property value has been changed from its default; otherwise, . Sets the property to its default value. Gets or sets the maximum allowable date. The value is less than the . Indicates whether the property should be persisted. if the property value has been changed from its default; otherwise, . Sets the property to its default value. Gets or sets the value indicating that no date is currently selected in the calendar. Gets or sets the background color of the control. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the foreground color of the control. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the selection foreground color. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the selection background color. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the line color. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the color of the arrows. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the color of the border around the current date. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets a value indicating the color of days in months that are not fully displayed in the control. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the day names' text color. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets a value indicating the background color of the title area of the calendar. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets a value indicating the foreground color of the title area of the calendar. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets the first day of the first fully shown month. Gets the last day of the last fully shown month. Gets or sets the selected date. Indicates whether the property should be persisted. if the property value has been changed from its default; otherwise, . Sets the property to its default value. Gets or sets the number of columns and rows of months displayed. Indicates whether the property should be persisted. if the property value has been changed from its default; otherwise, . Sets the property to its default value. Gets or sets the first day of the week as displayed in the month calendar. Gets or sets the format to use for the calendar caption. Gets or sets the maximum length of day names. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the title height. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the title font. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the day names font. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the array of System.DateTime objects that determines which nonrecurring dates are displayed in bold. Indicates whether the property should be persisted. if the property value has been changed from its default; otherwise, . Clears . Gets or sets the array of System.DateTime objects that determines which annual days are displayed in bold. Indicates whether the property should be persisted. if the property value has been changed from its default; otherwise, . Clears . Gets or sets the array of System.DateTime objects that determine which monthly days to bold. Indicates whether the property should be persisted. if the property value has been changed from its default; otherwise, . Clears . Gets or sets the array of System.DateTime objects that determines which dates are disabled. Indicates whether the property should be persisted. if the property value has been changed from its default; otherwise, . Clears . Gets or sets a value indicating whether the date represented by the TodayDate property is displayed at the bottom of the control. Gets or sets a value indicating whether today's date is circled. Determines if the Today button of the dropdown calendar is visible. Determines if the Clear button of the dropdown calendar is visible. Gets or sets the text of the "Today" button. Gets or sets the text of the "Clear" button. Gets or sets a value that specifies which rule is used to determine the first calendar week of the year. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the month calendar control displays week numbers (1-52) to the left of each row of days. Gets or sets a value indicating whether control's elements are aligned to support locales using right-to-left fonts. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the control is laid out from right to left. Occurs when the VisualStyle property has changed. Invokes the VisualStyleChanged event. The event arguments. Occurs when Today button is clicked. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when Clear button is clicked. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when Today button visibility is changed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when Clear button visibility is changed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the value of the Date property is changed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the user selects a value for the Date property. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the value of the RightToLeftLayout property changes. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Handles the month change in the Dropdown calendar in C1DateEdit. Occurs when the value of the or property changes. Can be used to set some dates in the month to bold as user scrolls through the months. This example sets a new bolded date in the selected month. private void c1DateEdit1_Calendar_MonthChanged(object sender, EventArgs e) { DateTime dt = c1DateEdit1.Calendar.FirstMonth; c1DateEdit1.Calendar.AddBoldedDate(new DateTime(dt.Year, dt.Month, dt.Month)); } Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Calls SuspendLayout on all DateEditMonthCalendar's child controls. Calls ResumeLayout on all DateEditMonthCalendar's child controls. Indicates whether to invoke the layout logic now. Adds a day that is displayed in bold on an annual basis in the month calendar. The date to be displayed in bold. Adds a day to be displayed in bold in the month calendar. The date to be displayed in bold. Adds a day to be disabled in the month calendar. The date to be disabled. Adds a day that is displayed in bold on a monthly basis in the month calendar. The date to be displayed in bold. Removes all the annually bold dates. Removes all the nonrecurring bold dates. Removes the all disabled dates. Removes all the monthly bold dates. Removes the specified date from the list of annually bold dates. The date to remove from the date list. Removes the specified date from the list of nonrecurring bold dates. The date to remove from the date list. Removes the specified date from the list of disabled dates. The date to remove from the date list. Removes the specified date from the list of monthly bolded dates. The date to remove from the date list. Sets the number of columns and rows of months to display. The number of columns. The number of rows. Sets a date as the currently selected date. The date to be selected. Retrieves date information that represents the low and high limits of the displayed dates of the control. true to retrieve only the dates that are fully contained in displayed months; otherwise, false. The begin and end dates of the displayed calendar. Sets the selected dates in a month calendar control to the specified date range. The beginning date of the selection range. The end date of the selection range. Returns an object with information on which portion of a month calendar control is at a location specified by a System.Drawing.Point. A System.Drawing.Point containing the System.Drawing.Point.X and System.Drawing.Point.Y coordinates of the point to be hit tested. A System.Windows.Forms.MonthCalendar.HitTestInfo that contains information about the specified point on the month calendar. Returns a System.Windows.Forms.MonthCalendar.HitTestInfo with information on which portion of a month calendar control is at a specified x- and y-coordinate. The System.Drawing.Point.Y coordinate of the point to be hit tested. The System.Drawing.Point.X coordinate of the point to be hit tested. A System.Windows.Forms.MonthCalendar.HitTestInfo that contains information about the specified point on the month calendar. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Gets or sets the background image. Gets or sets a value indicating the layout for the BackgroundImage. Gets or sets the Input Method Editor (IME) mode supported by this control. Gets or sets the space between the edges of a control and its contents. Gets or sets the text to display. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Get or sets current culture for the calendar. Required designer variable. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Represents a control that enables the user to select a date using a visual monthly calendar display. Initializes a new instance of the class. Represents how the user changed the date. No changes (default value). Date changed by mouse click. Date changed by keyboard input. Represents data for delegate. Represents how the user changed the date. Initializes a new instance of the class. The to assign. Represents the method that handle the user modified date event. The source of the event. A that contains event data. Fires when user modified the date. Raises the event. A that contains event data. Fires when selected date changed. Raises the event when selected date changed. A that contains event data. Fires when month changed. Raises the event when month changed. A that contains event data. Returns Sunday-based day of week index (0 for Sunday, 1 for Monday etc.) Day of week to test. 0-based absolute day of week index. Gets or sets today's date. Gets or sets the month shown by the calendar. The day/time parts of the DateTime value are ignored. Gets or sets the selected date. The selected date determines the "main" month shown by the calendar. Gets or sets whether leading days should be displayed. Gets or sets whether trailing days should be displayed. Gets or sets the . Gets or sets the current . Gets or sets the . Gets or sets whether to show week numbers. Gets or sets the selection text color. Gets or sets the background color of the selection. Gets or sets the color of the title text. Gets or sets the background color of the title. Gets or sets the line color. Gets or sets the border color of today's date. Gets or sets the trailing text color. Gets or sets the day names color. Gets or sets the first of week. Gets or sets the title format. Gets or sets the title . Gets or sets the day names . Gets or sets the day name length. Gets or sets the title height. Gets or sets the bolded font. Gets or sets the array of bolded dates. Gets or sets the maximum date for the calendar. Gets or sets the minimum date for the calendar. Gets or sets the array of disabled dates. Gets or sets the array of annually bolded dates. Gets or sets the array of monthly bolded dates. Gets or sets whether to show a circle around today's date. Gets the first visible day. Gets the last visible day. Determines whether the specified date is in the current month. The . True if specified date is in the current month; otherwise, false. Determines whether the specified date is shown in bold on the calendar. The . True if specified date is shown in bold on the calendar; otherwise, false. Determines whether the specified date is enabled in the calendar. The . True if specified date is enabled in the calendar; otherwise, false. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Represents drop down calendar form. Creates a new instance of class. Used to defer creating the calendar till really needed. Calendar. This method is for internal use only. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Helper static class that contains AddJapaneseEra function. Clears the all Japanese Eras. Adds era to the Japanese calendar. Era numeric id. Start day of the era. End day of the era. Japanese name of the era. Short Japanese name of the era. Era name in English. Optional. One Latin symbol era name. Reads eras info from the GC configuration file. Section name. Represents a data bound control supporting convenient navigation over data source rows and common data actions such as updating the data source and refreshing data. if true, "Row: X of N" is shown (label + textbox + label) Initializes a new instance of the C1DbNavigator class. Releases the resources used by the C1DbNavigator. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. This method is for internal use only. Ambient property name. Ambient property value. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets value of the Position textbox. If the Position textbox is not visible, it returns empty string. If you set the Text property when the Position textbox is not visible, the action has no effect. Changing the Text property causes the data source position change. Occurs when the Text property value changes. Raises the TextChanged event. An EventArgs that contains event data. Gets or sets the visual style of the control. Resets to the default value. Tests whether should be serialized. True if should be serialized, false otherwise. Gets or sets the base visual style of the control. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. True if VisualStyleBaseStyle should be serialized, false otherwise. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Specifies if navigator buttons have color bitmaps. Specifies if navigator buttons have color bitmaps. If True, navigator buttons show color bitmaps when the mouse hovers over them. Navigator border style. Navigator button style. Vertical alignment of navigator buttons. Vertical margin between the border and the buttons. Horizontal margin between the border and the buttons. Gets or sets the ImageList to use when displaying button images without highlighting. Gets or sets the ImageList to use when displaying button images in highlighted state. Indicates whether tooltips are shown for the buttons. This member overrides Control.ForeColor. This member overrides Control.BackColor. Time delay in milliseconds after pressing Next/Previous button before automatic scrolling begins. Time delay in milliseconds between row moves in automatic scrolling. Number of rows to skip when the user presses PageUp/Down. Specifies whether the editable row position field and row captions are visible in the navigator. This member overrides Control.TabStop. Flags enumeration specifying which buttons are visible. Flags enumeration specifying which buttons are enabled. Whether a confirmation dialog is shown before deleting a record. Whether the control in focus should be validated before a button click is handled by the navigator. The data source object to which the control is bound. "For multi-table data sources, specifies a specific table to which the control is bound. Returns the number of rows in the table. Gets or sets the current row position in the table (from 0 to RowCount - 1). Gets or sets the CurrencyManager object navigated by the control. The size of navigator buttons. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Controls how the text is positioned relative to the image in navigator buttons. Gets or sets the texts displayed on the buttons. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. The string collection defining navigator button tooltips. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets the collection of user interface strings. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Gets or sets an ErrorProvider object used to indicate error state of the current data row. The cursor that is displayed when the mouse is over the navigator buttons. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Occurs when property is changed. Raises event. The event data object. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Performs the action associated with a navigator button. The button whose action is performed. Sets the DataSource and DataMember properties at run time. The data source object to which the control is bound. For multi-table data sources, specifies a specific table to which the control is bound. This method is for internal use only. Invokes the VisualStyleChanged event. The event arguments. Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which a control can be fitted. The custom-sized area for a control. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Occurs when the VisualStyle property has changed. Occurs when the Position has changed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the current row has been modified, some of its fields changed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when a button is clicked, before the action is executed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when Add button is pressed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when Delete button is pressed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when Edit button is pressed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when Update button is pressed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when Refresh button is pressed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when a navigator button has been pressed, after the button action is performed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when an exceptions is thrown performing an action on button click. This method is for internal use only. Event fired when the value of ButtonCursor property is changed. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Changes the theme. New theme. A list of all available navigator buttons First button. Previous button. Next button. Last button. Add button. Delete button. Edit button. Apply button. Cancel button. Update button. Refresh button. Position text box Represents the method that handles a BeforeAction event. The source of the event. A NavigatorBeforeActionEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for a BeforeAction event. The clicked button. Current row index in the data source (only for Delete and Edit buttons). This argument is False by default. If you set it to True in your event code, the navigator control will skip the standard action associated with the button. Represents the method that handles an Adding event. The source of the event. A NavigatorAddingEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for a Adding event. This argument is False by default. If you set it to True in your event code, the navigator control will abort adding a new row. Represents the method that handles a Deleting event. The source of the event. A NavigatorDeletingEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for a Deleting event. The index of the row being deleted. This argument is False by default. If you set it to True in your event code, the navigator control will abort deleting. Represents the method that handles a Editing event. The source of the event. A NavigatorEditingEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for a Editing event. The index of the row being edited. Represents the method that handles a ButtonClick event. The source of the event. A NavigatorButtonClickEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for a ButtonClick event. The clicked button. Represents the method that handles an Error event. The source of the event. A NavigatorErrorEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for an Error event. The clicked C1DbNavigator button. Exception that occurred while performing the button action. This argument is set to true by default. If it is set to False by event code, the standard message box is not shown. Error message shown in the standard message box. The caption of the standard message box. Used by C1DbNavigator.ButtonStyle property. Flat buttons showing "mouse hover". Standard 3D-buttons. Used by C1DbNavigator.VerticalAlign property. Buttons are aligned with the top of the control. Buttons are aligned with the center of the control. Buttons are aligned with the bottom of the control. Used by C1DbNavigator.ButtonTextAlign property. Text appears to the right of the image. Text appears underneath the image. Used by C1DbNavigator.VisibleButtons property. No buttons. Moves to the first row. Moves to the previous row. Moves to the next row. Moves to the last row. Adds a new row to the table. Deletes the current row. Fires the Editing event. Ends edit mode for the current row. Cancels (reverts) modifications in the current row. Fires the UpdateData event. Fires the RefreshData event. First + Previous + Next + Last buttons All buttons. Represents a base drop-down control supporting up/down buttons. Initializes a new instance of the C1DropDownControl class. Releases the resources used by the C1DropDownControl. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Gets or sets the color to treat as transparent in a image. Gets or sets a value indicating whether to open the combo box when the control receives the focus. Determines the time when drop down form is created. Has valid value only if ShowValueImage returns true. Gets or sets the style of the combo box. The DropDownStyle property specifies whether the text portion can be edited. If the value is Default, the text is editable and the dropdown list is displayed by clicking the down arrow. If the value is DropDownList, the text is not editable and the dropdown list is displayed by clicking any part of the control. Gets or sets the button image. Gets or sets the index of the button image in the ImageList. Gets or sets the key of the button image in the ImageList. Gets or sets the ImageList to get the images to display in the drop down items. Gets or sets the image padding. Gets or sets a value specifying which buttons are visible. The default is (UpDown Or DropDown). Determines if the dropdown button is visible. Determines if the up/down buttons are visible. Determines if the modal button is visible. Determines if the modal button is visible. Determines if the up/down buttons intercept and handle Up and Down arrow keys. Specifies the class name of a Form serving as the dropdown window. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Returns dropdown form instance associated with the control. Specifies form class that is used by default as the dropdown for the control. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Run-time read-only property indicating if the dropdown is currently open. Specifies the button width instead of using the default width. Distance in pixels between the control edge and the dropdown. Gets or sets whether the mouse click event is consumed or passed through after closing the dropdown. Alignment of the dropdown form relative to the control. The cursor that is displayed when the mouse is over a button. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the images for buttons This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the cursor that is displayed when the mouse pointer is over the control. This method is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Gets or sets the alignment of the spin button. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This method works exactly as setting the Value property, except that it does not change the internal variable storing the value before editing, so the user can press Esc and restore the previous value. This method works only in edit or DropDownList mode. If the control is not in edit or DropDownList mode, this methods does nothing. Value to set to the control. Shows the dropdown. Closes the dropdown. Closes the dropdown. Performs the spin up action. This method has the same behavior as pressing the up key. Performs the spin down action. This method has the same behavior as pressing the down key. Occurs just before the dropdown is opened. Occurs just before the dropdown is opened. Occurs after the dropdown is opened. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the dropdown has been closed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when UpDown buttons are clicked. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the Modal button is clicked. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the Custom button is clicked. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the value of the DropDownFormAlign property has changed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the value of the DropDownAlign property has changed. This method is for internal use only. Event fired when the value of ButtonCursor property is changed. This method is for internal use only. Event fired when the value of Multiline property is changed. Called when a drop down form is created. The new dropdown form. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Returns image size. The size object. Determines if image should be shown. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Draws image in the control. Grapthics object. Rectangle to draw image in. Draws image in the control. Grapthics object. Device context. Rectangle to draw image in. Default path Resets the style properties to their default values Used by C1DropDownControl.VisibleButtons properties. Show without any button Show up/down buttons. Show dropdown button. Show button to start a modal dialog. Show a custom button. Show all buttons Represents the method that handles a UpDownButtonClick event. The source of the event. An UpDownButtonClickEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for a UpDownButtonClick event. Initializes a new instance of the UpDownButtonClickEventArgs class. Set to 1 if Up button is pressed, to -1 if Down button is pressed. Set to true in the user's UpDownButtonClick event handler. No built-in processing is done. This allows the user to override the default behavior of the buttons. Provides data for a DropDownClosed event. Returns True if a value is selected in dropdown dialog. Initializes a new instance of the DropDownClosedEventArgs class. Represents the method that handles a DropDownClosed event. The source of the event A DropDownClosedEventArgs object that contains the event data. Images for C1DropDownControl buttons TypeConverter class for ButtonImages This property is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Clears all custom images and returns standard images for C1DropDownControl buttons. Returns True if any custom image is assigned Image for Up button This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Image for Down button This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Image for DropDown button This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Image for Modal button This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Image for Custom button This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Used by DropDownForm.Options property. Indicates that none of the options are set. Indicates that DropDownForm can contain focus. The end users are not allowed to change the width of the dropdown form resizing it. The end users are not allowed to change the height of the dropdown form resizing it. If this flag is set, the changes to the control Value can only be cancelled explicitly, with Esc key or using the CloseDropDown method, and implicit cancellation (when the form is closed because it loses focus) is disabled. If this flag is set, pressing the Esc key does not close the form. If this flag is set, pressing the Enter key does not close the form. If set, the dropdown form width is automatically adjusted to the width of the owner control before the form is shown. = FixedWidth + FixedHeight Base class for custom dropdown forms. Initializes a new instance of the DropDownForm class. Releases the resources used by the DropDownForm. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Raises the event. This method is for internal use only. Ambient property name. Ambient property value. Invokes the VisualStyleChanged event. The event arguments. Occurs when the VisualStyle property has changed. This method is for internal use only. Gets a value indicating whether theme should be applied to dropdown form when it applied to . This property returns true by default. Determines the style of the control's border. This property is for internal use only. Determine various behavioral options of the dropdown form. Determines the control on the form that gets input focus when the form is shown. Alignment of the dropdown form relative to the owner control. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Occurs when Value property of the OwnerControl is updated by the dropdown form. Fires the PostChanges event. Contains arguments describing the event. Occurs when changes made by dropdown form are cancelled. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when dropdown form is opened. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when OwnerControl.Text property is changed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when OwnerControl.Value property is changed. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Closes the dropdown form. Closes the dropdown form. Represents a Windows font picker control supporting additional visual styles. Initializes a new instance of the C1FontPicker class. Gets a collection of fonts installed on system. Gets or sets a width of drop down list of fonts. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the current representation of the visual information contained in the control. Gets or sets a value that determines whether the user can set an incorrect string as 's Value or not and provides additional settings for processing incorrect input. A string is incorrect as 's Value if there is no installed font with such FontFamily.Name. Setting to true will set TextDetached property to true. Don't use Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Default path for the control in xml theme file. Represents drop down font picker form. Initializes a new instance of the C1FontPickerDropDownForm class. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. The class represents the settings for property. Initializes a new instance of the class. Returns the string that represents the current object. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the user can set an incorrect string as 's Value or not. An incorrect string is non-empty string that isn't the FontFamily name of any of the installed fonts. Gets or sets a FontFamily name of one of the installed fonts that will be returned as 's Value for any incorrect input. Default value is SystemFonts.DefaultFont.FontFamily.Name. Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Gets or sets the text shown in the 's editor for any incorrect input. Set it to string.Empty to show the user input in the 's editor. Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Determines should be instance serialized or not. True if instance should be serialized, otherwise false. Reset all to default properties. Occurs when a property value changes. Raises the event. Compares two values of property and raises an event if they are different. Type of property. The previous value of property. The new value of property. The name of property. true - if values are different. SelectedFontFamily TypeConverter for PropertyGrid Used by ErrorInfo.ErrorAction property. Control value remains as the user typed it. Control value is set to ValueOnError. Control value is reset to the value control had before entering edit mode. Control value is reset to the value control had before entering edit mode, and an exception is thrown. Settings affecting error handling. If True, the control beeps signaling an error. Default: False. If True (default), the standard error message is shown. Error message shown in the standard message box and/or in the exception. The text to display in the title bar of the error message box. Enumerated value that determines what action is performed on the control value when an error occurs. Determines whether or not the control is allowed to lose focus after the error. Works only if the ErrorAction is set to SetValueOnError or ResetValue. Value used to reset the control if ErrorAction = SetValueOnError. This method is for internal use only. Boolean property used to set ValueOnError to DbNull (only necessary at design time). Gets or sets an ErrorProvider object used to indicate error state of the control. Gets or sets an C1SuperErrorProvider object used to indicate error state of the control. Run-time-only read-only property returning the original exception object that caused the error. Type of the Value property. Resets whole ErrorInfo property in base control Represents the method that handles a FormatError event. The source of the event. A FormatErrorEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for a FormatError event. Source value for formatting. Formatting target (ForEdit or ForDisplay). The text to show in the control. Your code in FormatError event can set this argument to a text you want to show in the control in case of a formatting error. FormatInfo object that fired the event. Error description shown as the tooltip in the ErrorProvider icon, if ErrorInfo.ErrorProvider property is set. Used by ValidationErrorEventArgs.Reason and ValidationException.Reason properties. All validation checks were successful. Value does not match the edit mask. Value was rejected before parsing (in PreValidation). Parsing failed. Value rejected after parsing (in PostValidation). Value rejected by the data source, setting the data source field to that value failed. Represents the method that handles a ValidationError event. The source of the event. A ValidationErrorEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for a ValidationError event. Validation phase on which the error has been detected. The input text that caused the error. If Reason = ErrorReasonEnum.PostValidationError, this is the value that caused the error. Otherwise, this property is null or DBNull. Error information. An exception that follows the ValidationError event if ValidationErrorEventArgs.ErrorInfo is set to ErrorActionEnum.ThrowException. Initializes a new instance of the ValidationException class. Initializes a new instance of the ValidationException class. Initializes a new instance of the ValidationException class. Initializes a new instance of the ValidationException class. Control that fired the exception. Validation phase on which the error has been detected. The input text that caused the error. The typed value that caused the error. An exception thrown by C1Input when a control's Value property is set, but the new value is rejected by the data source, setting the data field to that value is cancelled by the data source throwing an exception. Initializes a new instance of the DataSourceException class. Initializes a new instance of the DataSourceException class. Initializes a new instance of the DataSourceException class. Initializes a new instance of the DataSourceException class. Control that caused the exception. Current value in the control that caused the exception. Used by FormatInfo.Inherit property. Indicates that none of the properties are inherited from the control. Indicates that the FormatType property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the CustomFormat property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the NullText property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the EmptyAsNull property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the TrimStart property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the TrimEnd property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the CalendarType property is inherited from the control. Indicates that values of FormatType, CustomFormat, NullText, EmptyAsNull, TrimStart, TrimEnd, CalendarType properties are inherited from the control. Used by FormatEventArgs.Target property. Formatting (or Formatted) event was called while the control is not in edit mode. Formatting (or Formatted) event was called while the control is in edit mode. Represents the method that handles Formatting or Formatted events. The source of the event. A FormatEventArgs object that contains the event data Provides data for Formatting or Formatted events. Source value for formatting. Formatting target (ForEdit or ForDisplay). The out parameter for the resulting string (in Formatting), or the in parameter for the formatted string (in Formatted). FormatInfo object that fired the event. The out parameter for specifying error description if Succeeded is set to False. Formatting result (assigned in the event code in Formatting). Default: True Settings for data formatting, converting data to string. Manages inheritance of the FormatInfo properties from the host control properties. Enumeration value determining the formatting method, including standard .NET format specifiers, custom and programmatic formatting. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Calendar, used to format date. Custom format specifier used if FormatType = FormatTypeEnum.CustomFormat. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. String representing a DbNull value. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. If True, empty strings are interpreted as null values (DbNull). This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. If True, leading spaces are removed. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. If True, trailing spaces are removed. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Resets whole FormatInfo property of base control Formats a value, converts it to a string. Typed value to convert to a string Formats a value, converts it to a string. Typed value to convert to a string. Format method or specifier used for conversion. Culture used for conversion. Contains edit mask settings. The edit mask string restricting user input. This method is for internal use only. Manages inheritance of the MaskInfo properties from the host control properties. True if comparison with mask literals is case-sensitive; otherwise, False. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. If True, text copied to the clipboard includes literals. If True, empty strings are interpreted as null values (DbNull). This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Error message shown in the standard message box and/or if an exception occurs. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. If True, focus automatically moves to the next control when the mask is filled. Character displayed on empty mask positions in edit mode. If True (default), optional mask positions are automatically skipped until the first position allowing the typed character. If True (default), the stored text includes literals. If True, the stored text includes blank positions as StoredEmptyChar. Character stored in empty mask positions. Literal display method. The collection of user-defined mask characters. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Returns the number of editable positions in the edit mask. Text entered by the user without literals (mask literals stripped). Text in a readable format, with literals and without blanks. The stored string obtained from the user input string. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Returns True if EditMask is non-empty and the control is in edit mode. Indicates when used MaskedMode with edit mask Resets whole MaskInfo property of base control Resets the text to the string representing a DBNull value. Returns a string formatted for display using edit mask. String containing characters entered by the user, including those on optional positions that were left blank (skipped). If set to True, the result will omit blank positions. If set to False, the resulting text will contain PromptChar on blank positions Returns the string that will be stored in the database, in accordance with current values of SaveLiterals, SaveBlanks and StoredEmptyChar properties. String containing characters entered by the user, including those on optional positions that were left blank (skipped). Returns the string containing characters entered by the user, including those on optional positions that were left blank (skipped). Text to parse. Same as MaskInfo.SaveLiterals property. Same as MaskInfo.SaveBlanks property. Same as MaskInfo.StoredEmptyChar property Returns True if the input string is valid with respect to the edit mask. Replace custom keywords with literals diapasone to build correct pattern for MS Regex. A regexp mask to convert. Indicates when used MaskedMode with MS Regex Gets ot sets a value that indicate of the mask in regular expression style. is mask based on MS Regex with support of custom RegexpEditMask keywords. It is only validated on exit from edit mode. is regular expression mask based on custom regex parser. It can be validated during entering text. A representing the mask in regular expression style with custom keywords. Gets a value indicates whether the mask pattern in regular expression style was succesfully recognized or not. True when or pattern was recognized successfully or empty, false otherwise. Used by MaskInfo.Inherit property. Indicates that none of the properties are inherited from the control. Indicates that the CaseSensitive property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the EmptyAsNull property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the ErrorMessage property is inherited from the control. Indicates that all properties are inherited from the control. Used by MaskInfo.ShowLiterals property. The whole mask is shown when editing begins (empty spaces filled with PromptChar). The mask is validated on exit (no literals or prompt chars displayed automatically). The literals will be inserted after the user enters the first character of the field that follows the literals. Literals that follows the input mask will be inserted after the user enters the last character in the current field. Defines rules to filter keyboard input. Only single byte characters are allowed. Only double byte characters are allowed. Letters allowed. Numbers are allowed. Symbols are allowed. Only upper case letters are allowed. Only lower case letters are allowed. Only katakana is allowed. Only hiragana is allowed. Only big kana letters are allowed. Auto conversion if possible. Used to determine the way of the RegexpEditMask pattern processing and validation. based on MS Regex with some restrictions for avaliable keywords. It will not provide any edit mask. It can be validated on exit from edit mode only. uses custom parser. It don't support complicated regular expressions. It provides edit mask for user input. It can be validated during entering text. Both types allows to use custom RegexpEditMask keywords for Japanese and half-width/double-width characters sets. The new style of regular expression mask based on MS Regex with support of custom RegexpEditMask keywords. It is only validated on exit from edit mode. Regular expression with custom RegexpEditMask keywords for Japanese and half-width/double-width characters sets is preprocessed to get the pattern string for standart MS Regex. It is only validated on exit from edit mode. It don't provides editmask for input field and supports ShowLiterals = ShowLiteralsEnum.FreeFormatEntry only. The old style of regular expression mask based on custom regex parser. It can be validated during entering text. C1RegexpEditMask supports online checking user input and builds editmask for input field. Used by C1TextBox.NumericInputKeys property. Indicates that none of the Input Keys are used. Indicates that F2 enters negative infinity (-Infinity). Indicates that F3 enters positive infinity (+Infinity). Indicates that F4 enters the "not a number" value (NaN). Indicates that F9 toggles the sign of the displayed number. Indicates that '-' makes the displayed number negative. Indicates that '+' makes the displayed number positive. Indicates that Decimal key enters a decimal separator regardless of culture settings. Indicates that the X key starts entry of the exponent part in scientific-notation numbers. This value is a combination of the F9, Minus, Plus, Decimal, and X values. This value is a combination of all enum values Used by ParseInfo.Inherit property. Indicates that none of the properties are inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the CaseSensitive property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the FormatType property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the CustomFormat property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the NullText property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the EmptyAsNull property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the ErrorMessage property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the TrimStart property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the TrimEnd property is inherited from the control. Indicates that all properties are inherited from the control. Used by ParseInfo.NumberStyle property. Indicates that none of the bit styles are allowed. Indicates that the numeric string is parsed as currency if it contains a currency symbol; otherwise, it is parsed as a number. Indicates that the numeric string can have a decimal point. Indicates that the numeric string can be in exponential notation. Indicates that the numeric string can have notation that signifies that the number is hexadecimal. Indicates that the numeric string can have a leading sign. Indicates that a leading white-space character is ignored during parsing. Indicates that the numeric string can have one pair of parentheses enclosing the number. Indicates that the numeric string can have group separators. Indicates that the numeric string can have a trailing sign. Indicates that trailing white-space character must be ignored during parsing. Indicates that all the AllowXXX bit styles are used. Indicates all styles except AllowExponent and AllowHexSpecifier. Indicates that the AllowLeadingWhite, AllowTrailingWhite, AllowLeadingSign, AllowDecimalPoint, and AllowExponent styles are used. Indicates that the AllowLeadingWhite, AllowTrailingWhite, and AllowHexSpecifier styles are used. Indicates that the AllowLeadingWhite, AllowTrailingWhite, and AllowLeadingSign styles are used. Indicates that the AllowLeadingWhite, AllowTrailingWhite, AllowLeadingSign, AllowTrailingSign, AllowDecimalPoint, and AllowThousands styles are used. Used by ParseInfo.DateTimeStyle property. Indicates that the default formatting options must be used. Indicates that extra white space characters in the middle of the string must be ignored during parsing. Indicates that leading white space characters must be ignored during parsing. Indicates that trailing white space characters must be ignored during parsing. Indicates that extra white space characters anywhere in the string must be ignored during parsing. Indicates that, if the parsed string contains only the time and not the date, the parsing methods assume the Gregorian date with year = 1, month = 1, and day = 1. If this value is not used, the current date is assumed. Represents the method that handles Parsing or Parsed events. The source of the event. A ParseEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for Parsing or Parsed events. Source string for parsing. Data type to convert the string to. Parse result (assigned in the event code in Parsing). Default: True Property to save the result to (in Parsing) or to get the resulting value from (in Parsed). Error information in case of parsing failure. Can be set in event code in Parsing. ParseInfo object that fired the event. Contains settings affecting parsing, that is, converting a string to the required data type. Manages inheritance of the ParseInfo properties from the host control properties. True if string comparisons are case-sensitive; otherwise, False. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. The format used for parsing. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Custom format specifier (in parsing used for DateTime and Boolean types only). This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. The string representing DbNull value. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. If True, empty strings are interpreted as null values (DbNull). This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Error message shown in the standard message box and/or in the exception. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. If True, leading spaces are removed before parsing. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. If True, trailing spaces are removed before parsing. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Determines the styles (flags) permitted in input strings representing numbers. Determines the styles (flags) permitted in input strings representing date/time. This property is for internal use only. Resets whole ParseInfo property of base control Returns True if the argument represents a null value (DBNull). The string to parse. Culture used in parsing. Converts the text to a Decimal value using a fixed numeric format. The string to parse. Format type used in parsing. Culture used in parsing. Converts the text to a Double value using a float numeric format. The string to parse. Format type used in parsing. Culture used in parsing. Converts the text to Int64 value using an integer numeric format. Converts the text to a Boolean value. The string to parse. Format type used in parsing. Culture used in parsing. Converts text to a value using one of DateTime formats. The string to parse. Format type used in parsing. Culture used in parsing. Converts text to the specified data type. The string to parse. Type to which the string is converted. Conversion result. Object detailing error information, if an error occurred. Used by PostValidation.Inherit property. Indicates that none of the properties are inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the CaseSensitive property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the ErrorMessage property is inherited from the control. Indicates that all properties are inherited from the control. Used by PostValidation.Validation property. Validation using Values and Intervals. Using the PostValidating event. Represents the method that handles PostValidating or PostValidated events. The source of the event. A PostValidationEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for PostValidating or PostValidated events. The value to validate. PostValidation object that fired the event. Error information in case of validation failure. Can be set in event code in PostValidating. Validation result (assigned in the event code in PostValidating). Default: True An interval in a collection of intervals of possible values used in post-validation. Initializes a new instance of the ValueInterval class. ValueInterval Constructor. MinValue property value. MaxValue property value. IncludeMin property value. IncludeMax property value. Initializes a new instance of the ValueInterval class. The type of lower and upper bounds (taken from the control’s DataType). Lower bound. This method is for internal use only. Upper bound. This method is for internal use only. If False (default), the lower bound is negative infinity. If False (default), the upper bound is positive infinity. If True (default), the lower bound is included. If True (default), the upper bound is included. A collection of ValueInterval objects used by a PostValidation object. The collection is used if the Validation = PostValidationTypeEnum.ValuesAndIntervals or if the user calls the ValidateValuesAndIntervals method. Gets the collection element at the specified index. Adds the elements of an array to the end of the collection. The array whose elements should be added to the end of the collection. Adds a new value interval to the collection. The ValueInterval to add. Inserts a new value interval to the collection at the specified position. The zero-based index at which ValueInterval should be inserted. The ValueInterval to insert. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Returns True if the collection contains the specific value interval, False otherwise. The ValueInterval to locate in the collection. Determines the index of a specific value interval in the collection, return -1 if this item not found. The ValueInterval to locate in the collection. Removes a specific value interval from the collection. The ValueInterval to remove from the collection. Copies elements of the collection to an array starting at a particular array index. The one-array that is the destination of the elements copied from the collection. The zero-based index in array at which copying begins. Validating the typed value after parsing, after the input string has been converted to the DataType. Validation method. Determines whether it is possible to enter DbNull value in the control. Manages inheritance of the PostValidation properties from the host control properties. True if string comparisons are case-sensitive; otherwise, False. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Error message shown in the standard message box and/or in the exception. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Predefined values used for matching the input value. This method is for internal use only. List of values that are not permitted as input value. This method is for internal use only. Collection of intervals. The input value must belong to one of these intervals. This method is for internal use only. Resets whole PostValidation property of base control Performs validation of the value against the collections of Values, ValuesExcluded and Intervals. The value to validate. Error information filled in case of failure. Performs validation using the current settings of the PostValidation object. Returns true if vaidation was successful. The value to validate. Error information filled in case of failure. Used by PreValidation.Inherit property. Indicates that none of the properties are inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the CaseSensitive property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the ErrorMessage property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the TrimStart property is inherited from the control. Indicates that the value of the TrimEnd property is inherited from the control. Indicates that all properties are inherited from the control. Used by PreValidation.Validation property. The PatternString property contains a list of possible values separated by the ItemSeparator. Using the PreValidating event. The PatternString property contains a list of wildcard patterns separated by the ItemSeparator. The PatternString property contains a regular expression. Used by PreValidation.RegexOptions property. Specifies that no options are set. Enables ECMAScript-compliant behavior for the expression. This flag can be used only in conjunction with the IgnoreCase, Multiline, and Compiled flags. Specifies that the only valid captures are explicitly named or numbered groups of the form. Eliminates unescaped white space from the pattern and enables comments marked with #. Multiline mode. Changes the meaning of ^ and $ so they match at the beginning and end, respectively, of any line, and not just the beginning and end of the entire string. Specifies that the search will be from right to left instead of from left to right. Specifies single-line mode. Changes the meaning of the dot (.) so it matches every character (instead of every character except \n). Represents the method that handles PreValidating or PreValidated events. The source of the event. A PreValidationEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for PreValidating or PreValidated events. The text to validate. PreValidation object that fired the event. Error information in case of validation failure. Can be set in event code in PreValidating. Validation result (assigned in the event code in PreValidating). Default: True. Validating the input string entered by the user, before parsing. Validation method. Manages inheritance of the PreValidation properties from the host control properties. True if string comparisons are case-sensitive; otherwise, False. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Error message shown in the standard message box and/or in the exception. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. If True, leading spaces are removed before validation. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. If True, trailing spaces are removed before validation. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. String containing the validation pattern. String separating list items in PatternString. The collection of user-defined characters to use in a wildcard pattern. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Settings affecting regular expression matching. Resets whole PreValidation property of base control Returns True if the input text matches one of the exact list items specified in PatternString. The input string to match. Error information filled in case of failure. Returns True if the input text matches the specified wildcard pattern passed as argument. The input string to match. The wildcard pattern. Returns True if the input text matches at least one of the wildcard patterns specified in PatternString. The input string to match. Error information filled in case of failure. Returns True if the input text matches the regular expression pattern specified in PatternString. The input string to match. Error information filled in case of failure. Returns True if the text successfully passes validation using the current settings of the PreValidation object. The input string to validate. Error information filled in case of failure. Represents the method that handles DateValueChanged and DateValueSelected events. The source of the event. A NullableDateTimeEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for DateValueChanged and DateValueSelected events. The date value. Set to True if the date value is null. Determines when drop down form will be created. At the host control creation time. On first call of the drop down form. Defines the LengthUnit enumeration. Indicates the calculational unit is a .Net character when calculating the length of the string. Indicates the calculational unit is a byte when calculating the length of the string. Determines the visual style of a control. Custom style. Standard system style. MS Office 2007 Blue color scheme. MS Office 2007 Black color scheme. MS Office 2007 Silver color scheme. MS Office 2010 Blue color scheme. MS Office 2010 Black color scheme. MS Office 2010 Silver color scheme. Used by property. Conversion using TypeConverter.ConvertToString(). Conversion performed by user code in the Formatting (or Parsing) event. Formatting uses the string assigned to the CustomFormat property. Parsing uses NumberStyle, DateTimeStyle, and CustomFormat properties. The number is converted to the most compact decimal form, using fixed point or scientific notation. The number is converted to a string that represents a currency amount. The number is converted to a string of the form “-ddd.ddd…” where each 'd' indicates a digit (0-9). The number is converted to a string of the form "-d,ddd,ddd.ddd…", where each 'd' indicates a digit (0-9). The number is converted to a string that represents a percent as defined by the property or the property. The number is converted to a string of the form "-d.ddd…E+ddd" or "-d.ddd…e+ddd", where each 'd' indicates a digit (0-9). The round-trip specifier guarantees that a numeric value converted to a string will be parsed back into the same numeric value. This format is supported by floating-point types only. Displays number as a string that contains the value of the number in Decimal (base 10) format. This format is supported for integral types only. The number is converted to a string of hexadecimal digits. This format is supported for integral types only. Converts to Boolean and shows No for false, Yes for true. Converts to Boolean and shows True or False. Converts to Boolean and shows Off for false, On for true. General date/time pattern (short time). Displays a date according to specified CultureInfo's long date format. Displays a date using the medium date format ("dd-MMM-yy"). Displays a date using specified CultureInfo's short date format. Displays a time using your locale's long time format; includes hours, minutes, seconds. Displays time in 12-hour format using hours and minutes and the AM/PM designator ("hh:mm tt"). Displays a time using the 24-hour format, for example, 17:45. Displays the long date and short time according to specified CultureInfo's format. Displays the long date and long time according to specified CultureInfo's format. Displays the short date and short time according to specified CultureInfo's format. Displays the short date and long time according to specified CultureInfo's format. Displays the month and the day of a date. Formats the date and time as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Formats the date and time as a sortable index. Formats the date and time as a GMT sortable index. Formats the date and time with the long date and long time as GMT. Formats the date as the year and month. This enum is for internal use only Any type of data. Only number data type. Only DateTime data type. Used by and properties. In a , the alignment of the dropdown form is determined by the property of the drop down form. Left alignment. Center alignment. Right alignment. Used by property. Text is aligned with the top of the enclosing control. Text is aligned with the center of the enclosing control. Text is aligned with the bottom of the enclosing control. Used by and properties. No daylight-saving time adjustments. Use this option if the GMTOffset property corresponds to the standard time offset. For the daylight-saving time GMTOffset should be advanced by an hour. Use this option if the GMTOffset property is set to the daylight time offset. So, for the standard time it should be set back by an hour. Used by property. The whole text is selected. Nothing selected, the caret is moved at the beginning of the text. Nothing selected, the caret is moved at the end of the text. Control uses the behavior of a base text box. Used by property and method. Used the default date-time field. uses this value to use the instead of the property to specify initial selection. The date-time field that contains the DayOfMonth part of the value. The date-time field that contains the Month part of the value. The date-time field that contains the Year part of the value. The date-time field that contains the Era part of the value. The date-time field that contains the AMPM part of the value. The date-time field that contains the Hour part of the value. The date-time field that contains the Minute part of the value. The date-time field that contains the Second part of the value. Used by C1TextBox.ValueChangedBehavior. The ValueChanged event is fired only when the Value property changes. The ValueChanged event is fired on any text change. Specifies the action for the left or right arrow key. The left or right key causes focus to be lost when the caret is at the left-most or right-most position. Specifies no action. Specifies to move to the previous control when pressing left or Ctrl+left keys on the first character of the control. Specifies to move to the next control when pressing right or Ctrl+right keys on the last character of the control. Specifies to move to the previous or next control when pressing the left or right or Ctrl+left or Ctrl+right keys on the first or last character of the control. Represents the method that handles a CultureInfoSetup event. The source of the event. A CultureInfoSetupEventArgs object that contains the event data. Provides data for a CultureInfoSetup event. Regional settings. Represents the four margins around a control’s content. Initializes a new instance of the Margins class. Initializes a new instance of the Margins class. Gets or sets the left margin, in pixels. Gets or sets the right margin, in pixels. Gets or sets the top margin, in pixels. Gets or sets the bottom margin, in pixels. Creates an identical copy of the current Margins. Overloaded. Determines whether two Object instances are equal. Serves as a hash function for a particular type, suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a hash table. Converts this Margins to a human readable string. Overloaded. Sets the margin values. Overloaded. Sets the margin values. Sets all margins to zero. Returns true if at least one margin differs from the default zero value. Otherwise, returns false. Custom user-defined characters (placeholders) used in edit mask and in wildcard patterns in pre-validation Initializes a new instance of the CustomPlaceholder class. Initializes a new instance of the CustomPlaceholder class. The value of the Placeholder property. The value of the Optional property. The value of the LookupChars property. The value of the CaseSensitive property. The value of the Excluding property. Initializes a new instance of the CustomPlaceholder class. The value of the Placeholder property. The value of the Optional property. The value of the LookupChars property. The value of the CaseSensitive property. The value of the Excluding property. Initializes a new instance of the CustomPlaceholder class. The special character used as a user-defined placeholder. True if character is optional and can be omitted. The list (string) of characters matching the placeholder (see also Excluding). True if string comparison is case-sensitive; otherwise, False. Specifies whether the LookupChars are interpreted as allowed or disallowed characters. A collection of CustomPlaceholder objects. Occurs when PlaceholderCollection is changed Gets or sets the the special character at the specified index. The zero-based index of the element to get or set. Adds the special characters of an ICollection to the end of the PlaceholderCollection. The ICollection whose elements should be added. Checks validity of the placeholder Adds a new special character to the collection. The CustomPlaceholder to add. Inserts a new special character to the collection at the specified position. The zero-based index at which CustomPlaceholder should be inserted. The CustomPlaceholder to insert. This method is for internal use only. Determines whether a character is in the placeholder collection. The character argument. Returns the index of a character in the placeholder collection, or –1 if it does not belong to the collection. The character argument. Removes a specific character from the collection. The character to remove from the collection. Copies elements of the collection to an array starting at a particular array index. The one-array that is the destination of the elements copied from the collection. The zero-based index in array at which copying begins. Returns the CustomPlaceholder object corresponding to the character argument, or null if it does not belong to the collection. The character argument. This method is for internal use only. Represents a Windows read-only data bound control displaying formatted data. Initializes a new instance of the C1Label class. Releases the resources used by the C1Label. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Gets or sets the visual style of the control. Gets or sets the base visual style of the control. Gets or sets the border color of the control. Use the BorderColor property to specify the border color of the control. This property is set using a object. The BorderColor property has an effect only when the property is set to FixedSingle. Indicates whether to honor the ColumnStyle properties defined on the C1ViewColumn object that this control is bound to. The culture ID. The name selected for the Culture property in the Properties grid. If True, current user regional settings override the selected culture. The current CultureInfo object (available at runtime). Format used to display the value. Edit mask settings. True if string comparisons are case-sensitive; otherwise, False. Enumeration value determining the formatting metod, including standard .NET format specifiers, custom and programmatic formatting. Custom format specifier used if FormatType = FormatTypeEnum.CustomFormat. String representing a DbNull value. If True, empty strings are interpreted as null values (DbNull). If True, leading spaces are removed. If True, trailing spaces are removed. If True, the control�s stored Value is in current time zone; otherwise, the Value is adjusted to the time zone defined by the GMTOffset property. The time zone of the Value property used if CurrentTimeZone = False. The value specified in the GMTOffset property can be advanced or set back due to daylight-saving time changes (used only if CurrentTimeZone = False). Gets or sets the object that contains data about the control. Gets or sets an ErrorProvider object used to indicate error state of the control. The current text in the control. Specifies whether the Value and Text properties can be set independently. The data source object to which the control is bound. The field of the data source object to which the control is bound. Type of the Value property. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Value is DbNull. Gets or sets the current representation of the visual information contained in the control. This property is for internal use only. Gets or sets the padding within the control. Occurs when the BorderColor property has changed. Occurs when the VisualStyle property has changed. CultureInfo can be set up (on startup) or has been changed. Error occured while formatting the stored value. Formatting the value programmatically. Occurs after the value has been formatted. Occurs when the DataType property changes. Occurs when the Value changes. Occurs when Value is retrieved from the data source. This event is for internal use only. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate. The OnBorderColorChanged method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class. Notes to Inheritors. When overriding OnBorderColorChanged in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnBorderColorChanged method so that registered delegates receive the event. Invokes the event. An that contains the event data. Invokes the VisualStyleChanged event. The event arguments. Invokes the event. An that contains the event data. Invokes the event. An that contains the event data. Invokes the event. An that contains the event data. Invokes the event. An that contains the event data. Invokes the event. An that contains the event data. Invokes the event. An that contains the event data. Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which a control can be fitted. The custom-sized area for a control. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Default path for the control in xml theme file. This method called when theme is changed. New theme. C1DescriptionAttribute replaces the DescriptionAttribute and uses the StringsManager and DesignStrings classes to return the localized Attribute string. C1CategoryAttribute replaces the CategoryAttribute and uses the StringsManager and DesignStrings classes to return the localized Attribute string. The class contains static properties used for design-time UI localization. The object used for lookup resources. Set this property to the valid value if you define resources in a Custom Control assembly. Returns default object used as fallback culture. The class contains static properties used for run-time UI localization. Represents a handler for an item related event. Provides data for an item related event. Gets key of the item being added or changed. The key. Gets the string value. The value. Gets a value indicating whether this instance is default. true if this instance is default; otherwise, false. Gets the description. The description. Represents a collection of end user visible UI strings. Gets or sets the string value for the specified key. The key of the string. The string corresponding to the specified key. Used for serialization of strings. Gets or sets the description shown in Properties window in the IDE. Gets the number of elements contained in the collection. For internal use. For internal use. Adds a string to the collection, specifying the ordinal. The key of the string. The ordinal of the string. The string. The description of the string. Adds a string to the collection in alphabetical order. The key of the string. The string. The description of the string. Adds a string to the collection, preserving the order. The key of the string. The string. The description of the string. Sets all strings in collection to their default values. Indicates whether any of the strings in the current collection have non-default values. true if any of the strings have non-default values, false otherwise. Tests whether a string in the collection has default value. The key of the string to test. true if the string has default value, false otherwise. Returns the description of a string. The key of the string to get the description of. The string's description Resets a string to its default value. The key of the string to reset. For internal use. For internal use. Returns the key of an item with the specified index. The item index. The item's key. Gets the string by its index. The string index. The string. Sets the value of a string with the specified index. The string index. The new string value. For internal use. For internal use. Occurs when a new item is added to the collection. Fires the event. The event data. Occurs when an item in the collection is changed. Fires the event. The event data. Occurs when the collection has been changed. Fires the event. The event data. Provides type conversion for the type. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. The calculator used as a dropdown in the C1NumericEdit control. Initializes a new instance of the NumericEditCalculator class. Releases the resources used by the NumericEditCalculator. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. This method is for internal use only. Ambient property name. Ambient property value. Gets or sets the font of the text displayed by the control. Gets or sets a value indicating whether to display a decimal separator when typing a number if no decimal part of the number is entered. Gets or sets the visual style of the control. Resets to the default value. Tests whether should be serialized. True if should be serialized, false otherwise. Invokes the VisualStyleChanged event. The event arguments. Occurs when the VisualStyle property has changed. Gets or sets the base visual style of the control. Determines the style of the dropdown calculator buttons. // patch: localization: added after StringTables.cs was created Custom format specifier used to format the stored value of the dropdown calculator. Gets or sets whether StoredFormat should be applied to the value entered in the dropdown calculator. This property is for internal use only. The collection of user interface strings. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the shortcut menu associated with the control. Gets or sets whether Static Memory context menu should appear for the dropdown calculator. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Raises the System.Windows.Forms.Control.FontChanged event. An System.EventArgs that contains the event data. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Gets or sets the space between controls. Gets or sets the size that is the upper limit that GetPreferredSize can specify. Gets or sets the size that is the lower limit that GetPreferredSize can specify. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This event is for internal use only. This method called when theme is changed. New theme. This method called when theme is changed. New theme. Base visual style. Represents a composite control combining a NumericUpDown and a drop-down calculator for easy numeric values editing. Initializes a new instance of the C1NumericEdit class. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Type of the Value property. Enumeration value determining the formatting method, including standard .NET format specifiers, custom and programmatic formatting. Indicates the amount to increment/decrement when the user clicks up/down buttons. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. The dropdown calculator object. This method is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Performs spin up. property is used to define the increment. This method has the same behavior with the Up key pressed. Performs spin up. The value that indicates the increment when spin up. This method has the same behavior with the Up key pressed. Performs spin down. property is used to define the decrement. This method has the same behavior with the Down key pressed. Performs spin down. The value that indicates the decrement when spin down. This method has the same behavior with the Down key pressed. This method is for internal use only. Shows the dropdown. This method is for internal use only. Default path for the control in xml theme file. Represents the class of dropdown calculator form. Initializes a new instance of the DropDownCalculator class. Releases the resources used by the DropDownCalculator. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. The calculator used in a DropDownCalculator form. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Represents a Windows PictureBox control supporting data binding to data source fields containing image data. Initializes a new instance of the C1PictureBox class. Releases the resources used by the C1PictureBox. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. The data source object to which the control is bound. The field of the data source object to which the control is bound. Gets or sets whether the image should be put into the data source right after the Image property has been changed or it shouldn't be put there until the following call of the CurrencyManager.EndCurrentEdit() method. The image displayed in the control. Gets or sets the value indicating whether the picture box receives focus when clicked. Returns the contents of an image. Image to return as a byte array. Format in which to return the image contents. Converts a byte array to an image. The contents of an image. Copies the image currently in the control to the clipboard. If the clipboard contains an image, this method replaces the contents of the Image property of the control Occurs when Image is retrieved from the data source. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when Image is stored in the data source. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the Image changes. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Represents a Windows range slider control supporting additional visual styles. Initializes a new instance of the C1RangeSlider class. Releases the resources used by the C1RangeSlider. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Gets or sets the current lower magnitude of the range control. Gets or sets the current upper magnitude of the range control. Gets or sets the minimum possible value of the range element. Gets or sets the maximum possible value of the range element. Gets or sets the value to be added to or subtracted from the LowerValue or UpperValue properties when the lower value thumb or upper value thumb is moved a small distance. Gets or sets the value to be added to or subtracted from the LowerValue or UpperValue properties when the lower value thumb or upper value thumb is moved a large distance. Gets or sets a value that indicates whether C1RangeSlider bar should be displayed. Gets or sets a value indicating the horizontal or vertical orientation of the C1RangeSlider. Gets or sets the direction of increasing value. Gets or sets how thumbs will be moved when mouse click will be performed outside selected area. Gets or sets custom thumb path for lower value. Gets or sets custom thumb path for upper value. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the control can respond to user interaction. Gets or sets a collection of named Style objects. Gets or sets the visual style of the control. Resets to the default value. Tests whether should be serialized. True if should be serialized, false otherwise. Invokes the VisualStyleChanged event. The event arguments. Occurs when the VisualStyle property has changed. Gets or sets the base visual style of the control. Represents a collection of named Style objects. Represents a collection of named Style objects for bar. Gets or sets background color of bar. Gets or sets border color of bar. Gets or sets background color of bar if control is disabled. Gets or sets border color of bar if control is disabled. Gets or sets color of selected area. Represents a collection of named Style objects for thumb. Gets or sets background color of thumb. Gets or sets border color of thumb. Gets or sets background color of thumb if mouse is over it. Gets or sets border color of thumb if mouse is over it. Gets or sets background color of thumb when user performs mouse click on it. Gets or sets border color of thumb when user performs mouse click on it. Gets or sets background color of thumb if control is disabled. Gets or sets border color of thumb if control is disabled. Gets or sets corner radius of thumb. Gets or sets padding within the thumb. Gets or sets a collection of named Style objects for bar. Gets or sets a collection of named Style objects for thumb. Fires when the property changes. This method is for internal use only. Fires when the property changes. This method is for internal use only. Fires when any of the properties: LowerValue or UpperValue changes. This method is for internal use only. Fires when the property changes. This method is for internal use only. Fires when the property changes. This method is for internal use only. Raises the System.Windows.Forms.Control.MouseWheel event. This method is for internal use only. A System.Windows.Forms.MouseEventArgs that contains the event data. Default Theme root path. This method is called when theme is changed. New theme. Represents a composite button control supporting additional visual styles and drop down item list. Initializes a new instance of the C1SplitButton class. Releases the resources used by the C1SplitButton. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Gets the style of components on this button. This property works when the property is set to . Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Gets the collection of components on this button. The ImageList to get the images to display in the drop down items. Gets or sets the default drop down item. Occurs when a is clicked. Raises event. A that contains the event data. Occurs when the dropdown has been closed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs after the dropdown is opened. This method is for internal use only. Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which a control can be fitted. The custom-sized area for a control. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Gets a value that determines whether the control is currently in design mode. Run-time property indicating if the dropdown is currently open. Reapply the current theme to all input components. Default path for the control in xml theme file. Represents collection of drop down items. Gets or sets the item at the specified indexed location in the collection. The indexed location of the item in the collection. An that represents the item at the specified indexed location. Adds the specified item to the end of the collection. The to be added to the end of the collection. The zero-based index value of the added to the collection. Returns the zero-based index of the first occurrence of a value in the list. The item to locate in the list. The zero-based index of the first occurrence of value within the entire list, if found; otherwise, -1. Inserts the specified item into the collection at the specified location. The indexed location within the collection to insert the item. The item to insert. Removes the specified item from the collection. The item to remove from the collection. Indicates whether the collection contains a specific . The object for which to search. Whether the collection contains the specific object. Performs additional custom processes after inserting an into the instance. Performs additional custom processes after removing an from the instance. Performs additional custom processes after setting an in the instance. Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of the instance. Performs additional custom processes after clearing the contents of the instance. Represents drop down item for control. Creates an instance of DropDownItem class. Releases the resources used by the DropDownItem. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Gets the that this belongs to. Gets the collection of child items in that is associated with this DropDownItem. Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the item should toggle its pressed state when it is clicked. Gets or sets the text associated with the component. Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the item is checked. Gets or sets the dialog-box result produced in a modal form by clicking the button. Gets or sets the image associated with the . Gets or sets the index of the image in the ImageList. This property is for internal use only. Gets or sets the image key in the ImageList. Gets or sets the size of the image that will be displayed on the button. Gets or sets the alignment of the image within the bounds specified by the property. The value of this property is only used if = Clip and exceeds the original size of the image. Gets or sets how the image will be scaled to fit within the bounds specified by the property. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the item can respond to user interaction. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the item is visible. Gets or sets the object that contains data about the item. Gets a value indicating whether the component has been disposed. Fires when the drop-down portion of this element is shown. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Indicates that the drop-down portion of this element has closed. Raises the event. Fires when the component is clicked. Raises the event. Fires when a key is pressed while the component has focus. Raises the event. that contains the event data. Fires when a key is pressed while the component has focus. Raises the event. that contains the event data. Fires when a key is released while the component has focus. Raises the event. that contains the event data. Fires when the component receives the focus. Raises the event. Fires when the component loses the focus. Raises the event. Fires when the component is double-clicked. Raises the event. The class represents the styles for the component. Gets or sets the used to paint the text. Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Gets or sets the used to paint the background. Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Gets or sets the used to paint the image bar background. Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Gets or sets the used to paint the text of seleced item. Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Gets or sets the used to paint the background of seleced item. Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Gets or sets the used to paint the text of disabled item. Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Gets or sets the used to paint the arrow. Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Gets or sets the used to paint the image bar separator. Specifies whether to save the value of the property. Returns true if the property has changed; otherwise, returns false. Restores the default value of the property. Occurs when a property value changes. Fires the event. Base class for all panes that appear in a drop-down. Gets whether this element and all its ancestors are enabled. Scrolls a given into view. to scroll into view. Scrolls a given into view. to scroll into view. Internal element for the drop-down pane of the InputMenu component. Menu timer with threading support. Opens the submenu items of the selected(hovered) object with a delay. Releases all unmanaged resources. Releases all unmanaged resources. Internal element for the InputButton component. Internal button element for the XInputButton. The base class for all input button elements. A repeat button that can be pressed when the host application is inactive. A dock panel that can fire the HotChanged event. A TextElement that supports AutoEllipsis. This element incapsulates the TextBox control. This method is for internal use only. Adds the sizing/alignment/scaling features to the ImageElement. Base class for all elements with the drop-down. Internal drop-down button element for the XInputDropDown. Base class for internal elements of the input panel components. Derived classes may override this method to dispose unmanaged resources. Internal element for the InputMenu component. Internal drop-down button element for the XInputMenu. Internal element for the InputSeparator component. Releases the resources used by the BasePopupForm. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Releases all unmanaged resources. Defines style elements that override the defaults provided by the VisualStyle. Gets or sets the used by the . Gets or sets whether the should use padding to avoid text clipping. Gets or sets the used to display text in the . Gets or sets how content is horizontally aligned within the . Gets or sets how content is vertically aligned within the . Releases all unmanaged resources. Releases all unmanaged resources. An instance for each VisualStyle is stored (with all images). So we should not dispose images obtained using this class. Returns the saved dropdown arrow image of the specified state. Do not dispose it. Returns the saved image for the ImageCell of the specified style. Do not dispose it. Returns the saved background image. Do not dispose it. Returns the saved separator image. Do not dispose it. Returns the saved submenu arrow image of the specified state. Do not dispose it. Returns the saved toggle button image of the specified state. Do not dispose it. Specifies whether the layout should break the flow after the component. The layout should not break the flow after the component. Causes next component to be placed in a new row within the flow. Creates a new column after this component. Creates a new row starting below the current component, at the left edge of the current group. Defines values for the content alignment within the . Default value. Near. Far. Center. Spread. Determines whether the user can edit a value in the text portion of the . The text portion is editable. The user cannot directly edit the text portion. Defines values for the content alignment within the . Default value. Near. Far. Center. Spread. Specifies the image alignment on the input components. Image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned on the left. Image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned at the center. Image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned on the right. Image is vertically aligned in the middle, and horizontally aligned on the left. Image is vertically aligned in the middle, and horizontally aligned at the center. Image is vertically aligned in the middle, and horizontally aligned on the right. Image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned on the left. Image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned at the center. Image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned on the right. Specifies the layout logic used to display the background image in a rich tooltip. The image is left-aligned at the top across the control's client rectangle. The image is tiled across the control's client rectangle. The image is centered within the control's client rectangle. The image is stretched across the control's client rectangle. The image is enlarged within the control's client rectangle. The image is split into nine pieces and tiled within the control's client rectangle. Center tiles are stretched, corner tiles are rendered with the original size. Specifies the image scaling on the input components. Use the image's original size, clipping it to the display area if necessary. Stretch the image to fill the display area. This mode will usually change the image's aspect ratio. Scale the image to fit the display area. This mode may increase or reduce the size of the image while maintaining its aspect ratio. Tile the image to fill the display area. Tile the image into the 3x3 matrix and stretch it to fill the display area. Tile the image into the row of 3 images and stretch it to fill the display area. Tile the image into the column of 3 images and stretch it to fill the display area. A list of all available navigator buttons. The 'Move First' button. The 'Move Previous' button. The 'Move Next' button. The 'Move Last' button. The 'Add New' button. The 'Delete' button. The 'Edit' button. The 'Apply' button. The 'Cancel' button. The 'Save Data' button. The 'Reload Data' button A set of navigator items. No items are in the set. The 'Move First' button. The 'Move Previous' button. The input box that changes the current position. The text label that displays the total number of items. The 'Move Next' button. The 'Move Last' button. The 'Add New' button. The 'Delete' button. The 'Apply' button. The 'Cancel' button. Includes all available items. Specifies the display state of a component. Display the component. Do not display the element, but reserve space for the element in layout. Do not display the element, and do not reserve space for it in layout. Implemented by the C1InputPanel control and its components. This is a marker interface that indicates the component supports accelerator keys. Passes the owner element properties to the ButtonImageElement. Represents the method that will handle the event of the class. Provides data for event. Initializes a new instance of the DropDownItemClickedEventArgs class for the specified control. The to store in this event. Returns the clicked item. Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the should close the dropdown after the item is clicked or not. Gets or sets a value which determines the filtering criteria for items which appear in the dropdown that is displayed when the AutoCompleteMode property is set to 'Suggest' or 'SuggestAppend'. The search is case-insensitive. Default filtering method. Same to . Beginning of a candidate string matches the entered string. A candidate string contains the entered string. The main data bound control used for entering and editing information in a text form. Supports data formatting for all data types, including special features for date-time formats. Also supports edit mask, data validation and other features. Initializes a new instance of the C1TextBox class. Releases the resources used by the C1TextBox. Makes Fixed3D borders old-style looking (flat) for System VisualStyle. This property is only for compatibility with legacy applications only. Draws a red dotted line if Value is empty. Gets or sets the textual place holder, that is displayed by to prompt the user for information. Gets or sets the value indicating whether the floating placeholder is enabled. The floating placeholder allows the placeholder text to be displayed above the editor text. However, the floating placeholder will only be displayed if the control has sufficient height. Gets or sets the border color of the control. Use the BorderColor property to specify the border color of the control. This property is set using a object. The BorderColor property has an effect only when the property is set to FixedSingle. Gets or sets the visual style of the control. Resets to the default value. Tests whether should be serialized. True if should be serialized, false otherwise. Gets or sets the base visual style of the control. This method is for internal use only. Gets or sets the foreground color of the disabled control. Gets or sets the foreground color of the control which contains negative value. Indicates whether to honor the ColumnStyle properties defined on the C1ViewColumn object that this control is bound to. The culture ID. Calendar, used to format date. The name selected for the Culture property in the Properties grid If True, current user regional settings override the selected culture. The current CultureInfo object (available at runtime). Format used to display the value when the control is not in edit mode (does not have input focus or is read-only). Format used to display the value when the control is in edit mode (has input focus and is not read-only). Defines rules to filter keyboard input. Settings affecting parsing, that is, converting the string entered by the user to the data type. Edit mask settings. Gets or sets the maximum number of characters the user can type or paste into the text box control. The number of characters or bytes (determined by the LengthAsByte property) that can be entered into the control.
The default is zero.
The MaxLength property allows you to limit the number of characters a user can enter in the control. The default value is 0, which does not limit the number of characters. Any number greater than 0 indicates the maximum number of characters. The effects the displayed result along with the MaxLength property. If value is less than zero, an ArgumentOutOfRangeException is thrown.
Gets or sets the maximum number of lines. An int value that indicates the maximum number of lines.
The default is zero.
MaxLineCount limits the acceptable lines of text when the property is . This property does not work with wrapped lines, so preferrable is to use MaxLineCount when property is . The default value of this property, zero, means no limit.
Gets or sets whether the maximum number of characters that fit in the control are handled based on bytes, characters, or text elements. Determines the unit for counting for the property. The value LengthUnit.Byte means the MaxLength is counted by Byte. The value LengthUnit.Char means the MaxLength is counted by Char. True if string comparisons are case-sensitive; otherwise, False. Default: False Enumeration value determining the formatting method, including standard .NET format specifiers, custom and programmatic formatting. Custom format specifier used if FormatType = FormatTypeEnum.CustomFormat. String representing a DBNull value. If True, empty strings are interpreted as null values (DBNull). If True, leading spaces are removed. If True, trailing spaces are removed. The edit mask string restricting user input. Sets or gets a value indicating whether a special edit mode is used for numeric values. Enables/disables the special keys used when NumericInput = True. Default: NumericInputKeyFlags.Standard. Whether or not a special edit mode is applied to DateTime values. If True, the control's stored Value is in current time zone; otherwise, the Value is adjusted to the time zone defined by the GMTOffset property The time zone of the Value property used if CurrentTimeZone = False. If this property is False the month will be automatically incremented when the user spins the date past the end of the month. The same about other parts of the date/time value. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the position of the caret is automatically moved to the first field when the last field is filled. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the position of the character is automatically changed The value specified in the GMTOffset property can be advanced or set back due to daylight-saving time changes. Default: NoAdjustments. The minimum year that can be entered without leading zeros. Validation rules applied before parsing, that is, before converting the string entered by the user to the DataType (raw string validation). Validation rules applied after parsing, that is, after converting the string entered by the user to the DataType (typed validation). Gets or sets a value indicating whether the control causes validation (i.e. calls Validated and Validating events) Gets or sets the object that contains data about the control This method is for internal use only. Gets the length of text in the control. The lines of text in a multiline control. Specifies whether the Value and Text properties can be set independently. The data source object to which the control is bound. The field of the data source object to which the control is bound. Type of the Value property. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Value is DBNull. For internal use. Works same as property but does not cause an exception if entered text can not be parsed. Gets or sets the current representation of the visual information contained in the control. Settings affecting error handling in the control. Indicates if the Escape key that cancels modified value is handled by the control without passing it to the owner form (AcceptsEscape=True), or it is then passed to the form and can close it if the form has CancelButton (AcceptsEscape=False). Indicates if Tab and Shift+Tab keys are accepted by control and move the focus to the next (previous) group of input characters in edit mask and in DateTimeInput mode. Gets or sets a value that indicates that the control has been modified by the user since the control received the input focus or its Value last set. Returns True, if the control has input focus and TextDetached = False. Label control associated with this input field. Determines the selection position when a control receives input focus. Default: InitialSelectionEnum.SelectAll. Gets or sets whether the text box should be disabled when it is bound to an empty data source, i.e. CurrencyManager.Count = 0. Specifies whether a focus rectangle should be displayed around the client area when the control has the input focus. Specifies whether the context menu can be displayed for the control. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the height of the control automatically adjusts when the font assigned to the control is changed. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the control can respond to user interaction. Gets or sets the vertical alignment of the content in the control. The default is VerticalAlignEnum.Top. Gets or sets the spacing between the input control content and its edges, in pixels. Default: all margins are set to 0. Allows backward compatibility with the old behavior, when the ValueChanged event previously fired on any text change. Gets or sets whether the next control in the tab order receives the focus as soon as the control is filled at the last character. if the focus is moved to the next control in the tab order as soon as the control is filled at the last character defined by the input control; otherwise, .
The default is .
The input focus moves to the next control when the last entered character causes the text to exceed the limit of the control.
Gets or sets whether the focus automatically moves to the previous or next control in the tab order when pressing the left or right arrow keys. One of the enumeration values.
The default is .
The value of this property indicates the key which moves the input focus to the next control. When the caret is at the last character of this control, focus moves out by pressing the right arrow key. When the caret is before the first character of this control, focus moves out by pressing the left key.
Gets a value indicating that the method was called and the method was not called. This method works exactly as setting the Value property, except that it does not change the internal variable storing the value before editing, so the user can press Esc and restore the previous value. This method works only in edit mode. If the control is not in edit mode, this methods does nothing. Value to set to the control. This method temporarily disables numeric input mode True to suspend numeric input, False to resume it If True, control's Value is updated, obtained from the current control text. Parses the Text string. Output parameter: Parsing result Output parameter: Object detailing error information, if an error occurred. Sets culture. New culture. Sets culture. New culture. Checks the result of the ParseContent method. Value indicating the reason of validation failure Parsed value of type DataType that was undergoing validation Object detailing error information, if an error occurred Triggers parsing of the Text property and updating the Value. Increments the currently selected field in DateTimeInput mode. Decrements the currently selected field in DateTimeInput mode. Validates current Text property in the same manner as it usually validated after the control loses focus. This method is for internal use only. Moves the selection to the specified date-time field. Works only if the property is set to and the date-time input is active. Field to select. a value that determines whether the text should be updated. returns true if success. Can be used in the method to customize initial selection if the value type is date-time. Updates selection of the text according to the property. Handle Win11 borders. This method is for internal use only. Gets the disabled back color. Indicates whether the placeholder should be drawn. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Invokes the VisualStyleChanged event. The event arguments. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the BorderColor property has changed. Occurs when the VisualStyle property has changed. CultureInfo can be set up (on startup) or has been changed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the control receives data that cannot be formatted according to the current format and edit mask settings. This method is for internal use only. Formatting the value programmatically. This method is for internal use only. Occurs after the value has been formatted. This method is for internal use only. Programmatic parsing of the input string. This method is for internal use only. Occurs after the input string value has been converted to the DataType. This method is for internal use only. Programmatic input string validation. This method is for internal use only. Occurs after the input string value has been validated. This method is for internal use only. Programmatic typed value validation. This method is for internal use only. Occurs after the typed value has been validated This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the DataType property changes. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the Value changes. This method is for internal use only. Error occurred while parsing or validating the input string. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when Value is retrieved from the data source. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when Value is stored in the data source. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the value of the VerticalAlign property has changed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the Margins property or one of the margins has changed. This method is for internal use only. Occurs when the value of the BackgroundImage property changes. Raises the event. An that contains the event editor. Occurs when invalid character is in input. Raises the ModifiedChanged event. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate. The OnBorderColorChanged method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class. Notes to Inheritors. When overriding OnBorderColorChanged in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnBorderColorChanged method so that registered delegates receive the event. Updates the control's Text with the current Value. This member is for internal use only. This member is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. _displayFormat This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Default path for the control in xml theme file. This method is called when theme is changed. New theme. Use this method for overriding in inherited control. New theme. This class is for internal use only. Gets or sets the visual style of the control. Resets to the default value. Tests whether should be serialized. True if should be serialized, false otherwise. Invokes the VisualStyleChanged event. The event arguments. Occurs when the VisualStyle property has changed. Gets or sets the base visual style of the control. Calculates and returns the desired size (incl. borders etc.). The desired size. If Size.Empty is returned, the toolbar does not contain any visible buttons and can be hidden. For testing. Indicates whether the theme is actually applied Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. This event is for internal use only. This property is for internal use only. Gets or sets the value indicating whether to use button images from ImageListHi to highlight the hot button. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. This method is for internal use only. Calendar used with C1DateEdit. Represents default calendar. Represents Chinese Lunisolar Calendar Represents East Asian Lunisolar Calendar Represents Gregorian Calendar Represents Hebrew Calendar Represents Hijri Calendar Represents Japanese Calendar Represents Japanese Lunisolar Calendar Represents Julian Calendar Represents Korean Calendar Represents Korean Lunisolar Calendar Represents Taiwan Calendar Represents Taiwan Lunisolar Calendar Represents Thai Buddhist Calendar Represents UmAlQuraCalendar Represents the Persian calendar. Specifies how thumbs will be moved when mouse click will be performed outside selected area. Both thumbs will not move. Closest thumb will be moved to direction of mouse by a large distance. Both thumbs will be moved to direction of mouse by a large distance. Specifies alignment of spin button of a . Vertically stacked Up and Down buttons. Up button on the left and down button on the right. Up button on the right and down button on the left. Represents the helper class for System.Windows.Forms.Control. Move focus to other control from focus control. The focus control. true to move forward in the tab order; false to move backward in the tab order. true if a control was activated; otherwise, false. Check to see if a flags enumeration has a specific flag set. Flags enumeration to check Flag to check for Returns true if running under Windows XP or better OS. Returns true if running under Vista OS or better OS. Returns true if running in 120DPI mode. Returns true if the specified object has any properties which should be serialized. Defines the category of a Unicode character. Indicates that the character is not of a particular category. Indicates that the character is a control code. Indicates that the character is a numeric digit. Indicates that the character is a mathematical symbol. Indicates that the character is a symbol. Indicates that the character is a punctuation. ( Open & Close ) Indicates that the character is a space character. Indicates that the character is an upper case letter. Indicates that the character is a lower case letter. Indicates that the character is a Japanese Katakana character. Indicates that the character is a Japanese Hiragana character. Indicates that the character is a CJK punctuation. Indicates that the character is a Hangal character. Indicates that the character is of full width. Provides a set of static methods to work with Japanese encodings. Shows how to use in event handler for conditioning filtering inputs. private void c1TextBox1_KeyPress(object sender, KeyPressEventArgs e) { if (CharHelper.IsKatakana(e.KeyChar)) e.KeyChar = CharHelper.ToHiragana(e.KeyChar); } Defines the Null char. Defines the control char: Backspace Defines the control char: Tab. Defines the control char: Space. Character groups (character codes) based on Unicode 3.1. Character blocks categorized base on the Unicode standard. Table of multi-width character blocks. Type of multi-width characters. Mapping table of full width Katakana. Mapping table of half-width Katakana. Mapping table for accents for the Japanese language. Represents the smallest possible value of a Char. This field is constant. Represents the largest possible value of a Char. This field is constant. Retrieves the type of character. A Unicode character. A CharType representing the type of character of c. Determines whether the specified character is of the specified type. A Unicode character. A CharType type. true if specified c and type matches the type of the character; otherwise false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a multi-width character. A Unicode character. true if c is a multi-width character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in a specified string is categorized as a multi-width character. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a multi-width character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is a full width character. Usually CJK characters are considers as full widths. A Unicode character. true if c is a full width character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a full width character. Usually CJK characters are considers as full widths. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a full width character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether a Unicode character doesn't belong to any specific letter. A Unicode character. true if c is doesn't a Katakana character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a control code. A Unicode character. true if c is a control code; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a control code. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a control code; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Katakana letter. A Unicode character. true if c is a Katakana character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Katakana character. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Katakana character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Hiragana letter. A Unicode character. true if c is a Hiragana character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Hiragana character. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Hiragana character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Numeric digit. A Unicode character. true if c is a Numeric character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Numeric digit. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Numeric digit; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Punctuation character. A Unicode character. true if c is a Punctuation character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Punctuation character. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Punctuation character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a mathematical symbol. A Unicode character. true if c is a mathematical character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a mathematical symbol. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a mathematical character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Symbol character. A Unicode character. true if c is a Symbol character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Symbol character. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Symbol character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Lowercase letter. A Unicode character. true if c is a Lowercase letter; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Lowercase letter. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Lowercase letter; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Uppercase letter. A Unicode character. true if c is a Uppercase letter; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Uppercase letter. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Uppercase letter; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Numeric or a Math symbol. A Unicode character. true if c is a numeric or symbol character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Numeric or a Math symbol. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Numeric or a Math symbol; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a alphabet letter. A Unicode character. true if c is a alphabet letter; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a alphabet letter. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a alphabet letter; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a alphabet letter or digit. A Unicode character. true if c is a alphabet letter or digit; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a alphabet letter or digit. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a alphabet letter or digit; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a upper (capital) case kana. A Unicode character. true if c is a kana upper (capital) case; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a big (capital) case kana. A Unicode character. true if c is a kana upper (capital) case; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a lower (normal) case kana. A Unicode character. true if c is a kana lower (normal) case; otherwise, false. Determines whether the related kana has a related lower case. A Unicode character. true if c has a related lower case kana; otherwise, false. Transforms the specified character to a full width character if possible. Ranges are Latin basic, Katakana and Hangul characters. A Unicode character. Full width character of c, otherwise original character returned. Tansforms the specified character to a full width character if possible. This method differs from the other where it takes on an array of characters. In FarEast country there are times when multiple half width characters make a one full width character. An array of characters. When the soundex character is processed a true is returned; otherwise, a false returned. Full width character of c, otherwise the original character is returned. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's half width equivalent. Ranges are Latin basic, Katakana and Hangul characters. A Unicode character. The half width equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is already a half width or not a multi-width character. Transforms the specified character to a half width character if possible. This method differs from the ToHalfWidth method where it tries to return the accurate half width character - which most likely happens in FarEast countries. A Unicode character. A character array representing c in half width form. In most cases this array will have only one element. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's "Katakana" equivalent. Special character handling for the Japanese language. A Unicode character. The Katakana equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is already a Katakana or not Hiragana. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's "Katakana" equivalent with an optional setting of full or half width. Special character handling for the Japanese language A Unicode character. true to return a full width Katakana, and false to return a half width Katakana. The Katakana equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is already a Katakana or not Hiragana. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's "Hiragana" equivalent. Special character handling for the Japanese language. A Unicode character. The Hiragana equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is already a Hiragana or not Katakana. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's ANSI equivalent. A Unicode character. An Ansi character equivalent of c in the current culture. Encodes the specified Unicode character to an ANSI character using the current culture. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's ANSI equivalent using the specified culture information. A Unicode character. A CultureInfo object. If a null reference is passed, the current culture is assumed. An Ansi character equivalent of c using the specified culture. Converts the value of a JIS (Japanese encoding) character to it's Shift-JIS equivalent. A JIS character. The Shift-JIS equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is not a full width character. Converts a JIS character to it's equivalent Shift-JIS character - used in the Japanese language. Please note that this method does not take a Unicode character as it's parameter - use the character value returned by the "ToJIS" method. Converts the value of a Shift-JIS (Japanese encoding) character to it's JIS equivalent. A Shift-JIS character. The JIS equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is not a full width character. Converts a Shift-JIS character to it's equivalent JIS character - used in the Japanese language. Please note that this method does not take a Unicode character as it's parameter - use the character value returned by the "ToSJIS" method. Converts the value of an ANSI character to it's Unicode equivalent. An ANSI character. A Unicode character equivalent of c. Converts the value of a ANSI character to it's Unicode equivalent using the specified culture information. An ANSI character. A CultureInfo object. If a null reference is passed, the current culture is assumed. An Unicode character equivalent of c using the specified culture. Converts an lower (normal) case kana into a upper (capital) case. A Unicode character. The equivalent kana upper case character. Converts an upper (capital) case kana into a lower case (normal). A Unicode character. The equivalent kana lower case character. Retreives the Unicode character block the specified character belongs to. Current version supports a range from '\u000' through '\uffff'. A Unicode character. A Unicode block the specified character belongs to. Returns further detail information of the character, since it lies in a range where it holds a fixture of different character widths. A Unicode character. An CharType describing the type of the character, and also the width whether it's full or half. Determines whether the specified block has to do with CJK... ( only CJK have concepts of wide ) A unicode char block. A to process. true if the block is related to CJK; otherwise false. Converts a byte array into a char type. (Internal usage) A byte array. A character equivalent of value. Converts a single character into a byte array. (Internal usage) A character. A byte array equivalent of c. Conversion between half and full width characters for Japanese special characters. A character. true to convert to full width; otherwise, false. The converted character. means conversion didn't take place. Gets the byte length of the specifed string segment. A string indicates the whole string. An int indicates the start of the string segment. An int indicates the length of the string segment. The byte length of string segement. Gets the byte length of the specifed string. A string indicates the whole string. The byte length of string segement. Returns true if running under Windows XP or better OS. Returns true if running under Vista OS or better OS. Flattens all possible Office 2007 textbox control states. Defines the sub-style of buttons. Like buttons in office comboboxes. Like buttons in office toolbars. Flattens all possible Office 2007 button states. Colors used to draw a button (some colors are start/end of gradients). Interface providing visual style rendering capabilities. NOTE: implementing classes must not cache any information about the control being rendered. A single instance of IVisualStyleRenderer may be created for a class of controls. Gets the visual style associated with the renderer. Gets the list of properties that are set by this style Updates the target properties if needed. Should be called by the styled control when its state changes in a way that could concievably cause the need to change styled properties such as colors (e.g. the control became disabled). The styled control. Resets styled properties to their default values. Should be called e.g. when an office 2007 style is changed to custom. Tests whether the property is set by the visual style. It is the responsibility of the styled control to call this before trying to change any property that might be affected by a style. The name of the property to test. True if the property is set by the style, false otherwise. Tests whether the current property value was set by the visual style. The styled control. The name of the property to test. The value of the property to test. True if the property has value set by the style, false otherwise. Defines a "Custom" visual style renderer. A custom style consists of a base style (which can NOT be custom, but can be any other style), with some style related properties overridden by the user. The base style is persisted in the host class (control) as VisualStyleBaseStyle (hidden from users). Indicates that the button or its host control is acive (hovered or focused). fills style props with values from the specified path reference to the framework style, for which hot style should be applied xml path to the hot style Used in: C1DockingTab\Style Borders are shown only for headers of columns. No borders. Only left and right borders of columns are shown. Used in: C1TreeView\Style Borders are shown only for headers of columns. No borders. Only left and right borders of columns are shown. Borders are shown for all cells. Used in: C1TreeView\Style C1MultiSelect\C1CheckList\Style Standard system view. Like a MS Office 2007 Black. Like a MS Office 2007 Blue. Like a MS Office 2007 Silver. Like a MS Office 2010 Black. Like a MS Office 2010 Blue. Like a MS Office 2010 Silver. Like a MS Office 2013. Like a Windows 10. Used in: C1TrueDBGrid\Style For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. The image is stretched and aspect ratio is saved. Used in: C1TrueDBGrid\GridBorder No borders. Borders have a Flat appearance. Borders have a 3D raised appearance. Borders have a 3D inset appearance. A line around the inside of the border. A fillet type border. Borders have a 3D raised with a bevel. Borders have a 3D inset with a bevel. Used in: C1TrueDBGrid\Style Image is rendered in the near side of the cell. Image is rendered in the far side of the cell. Image is rendered to the left of any text in the cell. Image is rendered to the right of any text in the cell. Image is rendered on top of any text in the cell. Image is rendered below any text in the cell. Text is not displayed. Image is not displayed. Used in: C1TrueDBGrid\Style Text is aligned Near and numeric values Far Text is aligned to the left. Text is aligned centered. Text is aligned to the right. Text is aligned with respect to the cells boundries. Used in: C1TrueDBGrid\Style Text is rendered at the top of the cell. Text is rendered at the center of the cell. Text is rendered at the bottom of the cell. Used in: C1TrueDBGrid\GridLines No line. Single line. Double line. Line with 3D raised appearance. Line with 3D inset appearance. Used in: C1Schedule\PaletteType Office 2007 palette includes back and border colors of free and working hours and days, day headers, grid borders and calendar tabs. Office 2010 palette includes back and border colors of free and working hours and days, day headers, grid borders and calendar tabs. Office 2016 palette includes accent color to use in calendar headers and additional darker color for current day. Office 2016 dark palette includes accent color to use in calendar headers and additional darker color for current day. Used in: C1Schedule\GroupTabStyle Group headers of rectangular shape take the full width of the corresponding group. Group headers of Office2007 appearance. Group headers of Office2016 appearance. Used in: C1Schedule\WeekTabStyle Week tabs of Office2007 appearance. Week tabs of Office2016 appearance. Use no background gradient. Use a gradient that matches the current system Visual Style. Use a silver background gradient. Use a blue background gradient. Use a gold background gradient. Use an olive background gradient. Use the Vista-style background gradient. No gradient. Horizontal gradient (left to right). Vertical gradient (top to bottom). Diagonal gradient (left-top to right-bottom). Diagonal gradient (left-bottom to right-top). Radial gradient. Image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned on the left. Image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned at the center. Image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned on the right. Image is vertically aligned in the middle, and horizontally aligned on the left. Image is vertically aligned in the middle, and horizontally aligned at the center. Image is vertically aligned in the middle, and horizontally aligned on the right. Image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned on the left. Image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned at the center. Image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned on the right. Use the image's original size, clipping it to the display area if necessary. Stretch the image to fill the display area. This mode will usually change the image's aspect ratio. Scale the image to fit the display area. This mode may increase or reduce the size of the image while maintaining its aspect ratio. Tile the image to fill the display area. Tile the image into the 3x3 matrix and stretch it to fill the display area. Tile the image into the row of 3 images and stretch it to fill the display area. Tile the image into the column of 3 images and stretch it to fill the display area. Hide the image. Default value. Near. Far. Center. Spread. Text is drawn in the horizontal direction, left to right. Text is draw vertically, from the bottom up. Text is draw vertically, from the top down. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. Describes the image set used for toolbar images of the preview actions. Classic image set. Flat image set. XP image set. XP alternative image set. XP second alternative image set. Adobe image set. Os X image set. Original (C1Preview "classic") image set. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. Hides the border. Specifies a solid line. Specifies a line consisting of dashes. Specifies a line consisting of dots. Specifies a line consisting of a repeating pattern of dash-dot. Specifies a line consisting of a repeating pattern of dash-dot-dot. Specifies a solid line. Specifies a line consisting of dashes. Specifies a line consisting of dots. Specifies a line consisting of a repeating pattern of dash-dot. Specifies a line consisting of a repeating pattern of dash-dot-dot. No gradient filling. From left (first color) to right (second color). From center (first color) to left and right (second color). From top (first color) to bottom (second color). From center (first color) to top and bottom (second color). From left-bottom (first color) to right-top (second color). From center (first color) to left-bottom and right-top (second color). From left-top (first color) to right-bottom (second color). From center (first color) to left-top and right-bottom (second color). From center (first color) to corners (second color) in radial direction. From center (first color) to corners (second color). For internal use. Abstract base class for all classes representing a brush in a theme. Use the method to get an actual matching GDI+ brush. Classes derived from override Equals() and GetHashCode() methods and compare objects by content rather than by references. For internal use. For internal use. Assigns (copies) properties from another to the current object. The source object to copy properties from. Creates an exact copy of this . The this method creates. Returns a GDI+ brush matching the theme brush. It is the caller's responsibility to dispose this brush when it is no longer needed. The brush rectangle (used for gradient brushes). The GDI+ object. Returns true if a GDI+ brush created for this theme brush depends on the rectangle passed to the method. E.g. gradient brushes return true in this method while solid return false. True if the GDI+ brush depends on the application area, false otherwise. Encodes this object to string. String represengin this object. Checks whether the two objects are equal by value (i.e. represent identically described theme brushes). First object. Second object. True if the two brushes are identical, or are both null. Create object from specified string. String representing object. object created from string. True if string was successfully parsed, false otherwise. Represents a solid theme brush. Creates a new instance of class. Creates a new instance of class. Theme solid brush color to set. For internal use. For internal use. Overridden, assigns (copies) properties from another to the current object. The source object to copy properties from. Overridden, creates a GDI+ matching this object. Can return null if color is not specified or transparent. Target application area for the brush (ignored). A object. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. Gets or sets the color of this solid brush. Abstract base class for gradient theme brushes. For internal use. Abstract base class for linear gradient theme brushes. For internal use. For internal use. Overridden, assigns (copies) properties from another to the current object. The source object to copy properties from. Gets or sets a value indicating whether gamma correction is enabled, same as LinearGradientBrush.GammaCorrection. Gets or sets the angle, measured in degrees clockwise from the x-axis, of the gradient's orientation line. Represents a linear gradient brush based on the starting and ending colors, and a object. For internal use. For internal use. Overridden, assigns (copies) properties from another to the current object. The source object to copy properties from. Overridden, creates a matching this object. The gradient rectangle. A object. For internal use. For internal use. Gets or sets the starting gradient color. Gets or sets the ending gradient color. Gets or sets the object. Can be null. Represents a multicolor linear gradient brush. For internal use. For internal use. Overridden, assigns (copies) properties from another to the current object. The source object to copy properties from. Overridden, creates a matching this object. Gradient brush rectangle. A object. For internal use. For internal use. Gets or sets a that defines a multicolor linear gradient. Abstract base class for radial gradient theme brushes. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. Overridden, assigns (copies) properties from another to the current object. The source object to copy properties from. For internal use. Gets or sets a structure that defines position of center point. (0,0) is the top-left corner, (100,100) is the bottom-right corner. Represents a radial gradient brush based on center point, surrounding color and a object. For internal use. For internal use. Overridden, assigns (copies) properties from another to the current object. The source object to copy properties from. Overridden, creates a matching this object. The gradient rectangle. A object. For internal use. For internal use. Gets or sets the color at the center of the radial gradient. Gets or sets the surrounding color of the radial gradient. Gets or sets the object. Can be null. Represents a multicolor radial gradient brush. For internal use. For internal use. Overridden, assigns (copies) properties from another to the current object. The source object to copy properties from. Overridden, creates a matching this object. The gradient rectangle. A object. For internal use. For internal use. Gets or sets a that defines this multicolor radiant gradient. Gets or sets a brush object which is stored but not managed by this ThemeBrushHelper - i.e. it will not be disposed when this ThemeBrushHelper is disposed, or a new brush is assigned to it. Note that while the 'get' accessor is provided for this property, there is no need to use it - just use the method to get a usable GDI+ brush. Creates brush based on specified theme path. Returns defaultValue if brush can not be created or it is solid and color is transparent or empty. Gets an empty color instead of a transparent color; otherwise, it returns the specified color. The specified color. Empty color if transparent color was set. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. For internal use. Converts color value to string. The color to be converted. The string represents the color. Converts string value to color. The string to be converted. The color value. Converts string to color. The string to be converted. The color is the result of the conversion. True if the string to color conversion was successful, otherwise returns false. Gets a string based on a boolean value. Boolean value. "true" if value is true and "false" if value is false. Gets a string based on a boolean value. String value to convert. Boolean result. True if conversion was successful. Converts blend pattern object to string. pattern object to convert. Converted blend pattern as string if conversion was successful. Converts string to blend pattern object. String to convert. pattern object. Converts object to string. object to convert. Converted ColorBlend pattern as string if conversion was successful. Converts string to object. String to convert. Converted ColorBlend pattern as string if conversion was successful. True if conversion was successful, otherwise returns false. Converts object to string. The object to convert. The string representing point. Converts string to object. The string to convert. The object.> True if conversion was successful, otherwise returns false. Creates a new instance of class. Creates a new instance of class. The string of data to assign. Gets the data string. The data string. Appends a string to data. The string to add. Finds characters to the end of the string. True if characters were found; otherwise, false. Gets the characters to the end of the string. Versions of c1theme XML. For internal use. First public versions of C1Themes. Version of theme XML when structure of BackgroundProp was changed. Version of theme XML when structure of C1Ribbon theme was changed Version of theme XML when C1 prefix was removed Version of theme XML when structure of C1Input theme was changed Releases all unmanaged resources. Releases all unmanaged resources. The target property name. Prevents raising the _propertySetByUser while we adjust the property ourselves. If true, we consider the property to have a value explicitly set ty the user, so we do not update it anymore until reset. Initializes a new instance of the AmbientPropertyMonitor class. Control on which the ambient property will be monitored. The name of the monitored property. The type of the property MUST be an enumeration. An instance of this class must be created in the constructor of the host control. It is assumed that the value of the ambient property that will be monitored by the AmbientPropertyMonitor has not been set yet (i.e. has the default value) at the time the AmbientPropertyMonitor is constructed. Clears the all references. Call Dispose() in the Dispose method of the host control. An instance of the AmbientComponentPropertyMonitor class holds references to the host in private variables and event handles. Host holds reference to the instance of the AmbientComponentPropertyMonitor. If not to clear the refs then the host control and the all referenced objects (Form, etc.) may be never released to GC. This cause a memory leak. public class C1CommandMenu... { public C1CommandMenu() { ... _ambientVisualStyleMonitor = new AmbientComponentPropertyMonitor(this, "VisualStyle"); } protected override void Dispose(bool disposing) { if (disposing) { // To prevent the memory leak if (_ambientVisualStyleMonitor != null) { _ambientVisualStyleMonitor.Dispose(); _ambientVisualStyleMonitor = null; } ... base.Dispose(disposing); } ... } Notifies the AmbientPropertyMonitor that the value of the monitored property has been reset. If the host control is currently parented to a container which itself defines the monitored property, the value from that parent is assigned to the property on the host. It is recommended that the host defines a Reset method for the target property, and calls this method from that. E.g.: private AmbientPropertyMonitor __ambientVisualStyleMonitor = null; ... ctor() { __ambientVisualStyleMonitor = new AmbientPropertyMonitor(this, "VisualStyle"); ... } public VisualStyle VisualStyle { get { ... } set { ... } } protected void ResetVisualStyle() { ... __ambientVisualStyleMonitor.ResetValue(); } Gets the value indicating whether the monitored property currently has the ambient value, i.e. the value has been set (by the AmbientPropertyMonitor) based on the value of a parent of the host. It is recommended that the host defines a ShouldSerialize method for the target property, tests IsValueAmbient in that method, and returns false if IsValueAmbient returns true. E.g.: private AmbientPropertyMonitor __ambientVisualStyleMonitor = null; ... ctor() { __ambientVisualStyleMonitor = new AmbientPropertyMonitor(this, "VisualStyle"); ... } public VisualStyle VisualStyle { get { ... } set { ... } } protected bool ShouldSerializeVisualStyle() { if (__ambientVisualStyleMonitor.IsValueAmbient) return false; ... } A helper class for implementing an ambient property on a control. Usage: An instance of AmbientPropertyMonitor must be created by the host control with the reference to that host as the parameter. The AmbientPropertyMonitor subscribes to the following events: ParentChanged on the host and the whole parents' chain; (ambient property name)Changed or INotifyPropertyChanged on the host and all parents in the chain. NOTE: For the AmbientPropertyMonitor to work correctly, all controls that have the target property declared must also provide either a property changed event, or implement INotifyPropertyChanged and fire it at appropriate moments. The AmbientPropertyMonitor monitors changes of the ambient property value on the host and all parents, and if a change occurs applies the value of the ambient property on the closest parent to that property on the host control, unless it has been changed independently of the AmbientPropertyMonitor (AmbientPropertyMonitor assumes that when it is created, the ambient property on the host has default, unchanged value). It is recommended that all controls declaring the target property also provide the Reset(property) and ShouldSerialize(property) methods, calling the and methods as needed. The target property name. At all times, should contain the up-to-date parent chain, starting with the host itself. Needed to keep track of parent changes, and changes of ambient property on the parents. Prevents raising the _propertySetByUser while we adjust the property ourselves. If true, we consider the property to have a value explicitly set ty the user, so we do not update it anymore until reset. Initializes a new instance of the AmbientPropertyMonitor class. Control on which the ambient property will be monitored. The name of the monitored property. The type of the property MUST be an enumeration. An instance of this class must be created in the constructor of the host control. It is assumed that the value of the ambient property that will be monitored by the AmbientPropertyMonitor has not been set yet (i.e. has the default value) at the time the AmbientPropertyMonitor is constructed. Clears the all references. Call Dispose() in the Dispose method of the host control. An instance of the AmbientPropertyMonitor class holds references to the host in private variables and event handles. Host holds reference to the instance of the AmbientPropertyMonitor. If not to clear the refs then the host control and the all referenced objects (Form, etc.) may be never released to GC. This cause a memory leak. public class C1OutBar... { public C1OutBar() { ... _ambientVisualStyleMonitor = new AmbientPropertyMonitor(this, "VisualStyle"); } protected override void Dispose(bool disposing) { if (disposing) { // To prevent the memory leak if (_ambientVisualStyleMonitor != null) { _ambientVisualStyleMonitor.Dispose(); _ambientVisualStyleMonitor = null; } ... base.Dispose(disposing); } ... } Notifies the AmbientPropertyMonitor that the value of the monitored property has been reset. If the host control is currently parented to a container which itself defines the monitored property, the value from that parent is assigned to the property on the host. It is recommended that the host defines a Reset method for the target property, and calls this method from that. E.g.: private AmbientPropertyMonitor __ambientVisualStyleMonitor = null; ... ctor() { __ambientVisualStyleMonitor = new AmbientPropertyMonitor(this, "VisualStyle"); ... } public VisualStyle VisualStyle { get { ... } set { ... } } protected void ResetVisualStyle() { ... __ambientVisualStyleMonitor.ResetValue(); } Gets the value indicating whether the monitored property currently has the ambient value, i.e. the value has been set (by the AmbientPropertyMonitor) based on the value of a parent of the host. It is recommended that the host defines a ShouldSerialize method for the target property, tests IsValueAmbient in that method, and returns false if IsValueAmbient returns true. E.g.: private AmbientPropertyMonitor __ambientVisualStyleMonitor = null; ... ctor() { __ambientVisualStyleMonitor = new AmbientPropertyMonitor(this, "VisualStyle"); ... } public VisualStyle VisualStyle { get { ... } set { ... } } protected bool ShouldSerializeVisualStyle() { if (__ambientVisualStyleMonitor.IsValueAmbient) return false; ... } Provides static methods that should be called from the constructors of licensed classes. Also provides a static method that can be called to show the about box with product and licensing information. Perform license validation. Call this method from the licensed object's constructor to save a license key at design time, validate it at runtime, and display a nag dialog if a valid license is not found. Type of licensed object (use typeof() and not GetType()). Reference to the licensed object (not currently used). A object that contains information about the license. Check the ShouldNag property of the returned to determine whether the licensed class should nag the user. This value is set to true in situations where a valid license was not found but a nag dialog could not be displayed. In these cases, the licensed class is supposed to nag in some other way (with a watermark for example). Perform license validation. Call this method from the licensed object's constructor to save a license key at design time, validate it at runtime, and display a nag dialog if a valid license is not found. Type of licensed object (use typeof() and not GetType()). Reference to the licensed object (not currently used). Whether the nag dialog should be displayed when a valid license is not found. A object that contains information about the license. This overload was created for use in WPF. It should be called in the control's constructor in order to support license persistence correctly. But it should not show the nag dialog until the control is fully loaded, or the VS designer may remain blank. So the solution is this: LicenseInfo _licInfo; public LicensedControl() { // check license but don't nag yet _licInfo = ProviderInfo.Validate(typeof(LicensedControl), this, false); // perform licensing after control is fully loaded Loaded += LicensedControl_Loaded; } void LicensedControl_Loaded(object sender, RoutedEventArgs e) { // nag after loading if (_licInfo.ShouldNag) { ProviderInfo.ShowAboutBox(this); } } Version of Validate used by constructors that take runtime keys. Type of licensed object (use typeof() and not GetType()). Reference to the licensed object. Assembly that contains the owner licensed control. Any valid C1 runtime key. A with information about the runtime key. This allows a licensed C1 class to create other C1 objects bypassing license verification for the child objects. For extra safety, we check that the owner object is defined in an assembly the contains a 'C1ProductInfo' attribute. Shows the About Box for an instance of a C1 product. Get the type whose assembly contains a 'C1ProductInfoAttribute'. Instance of an object whose type is to be checked. The type whose assembly contains a 'C1ProductInfoAttribute' Contains information about a license stored in an application. Attribute used to specify the product name shown on the About Box. Attribute used to specify assemblies that can use this product without a license. Attribute used to attach licensing/product information to assemblies. WinForms version string representation (4 dot-delimited numbers). Same as . Specifies assembly name parts, used by AssemblyCommonInfo to generate actual assembly names. Represents the era info. Initializes a new instance of the class. The era. The start time. The end time. Name of the era. Name of the abbreviated era. Name of the English era. Name of the symbol era. Gets the era. The era. Gets the start time. The start time. Gets the end time. The end time. Gets the name of the era. The name of the era. Gets the name of the abbreviated era. The name of the abbreviated era. Gets the name of the English era. The name of the English era. Gets the name of the symbol era. The name of the symbol era. Determines whether the specified date time is valid. The date time. true if the specified date time is valid; otherwise, false. Creates a new object that is a copy of the current instance. A new object that is a copy of this instance. This class implement a calendar extend in order to we can configure era information. Save the data of eras info. Save the data of max supported date time property. Save the data of min supported date time property. Initializes a new instance of the class. Gets the eras information of this calendar. Return a array. Gets the list of eras in the . An array of integers that represents the eras in the . Gets the specify era information. The specify era id. Return a value. Gets the specify era information. The specify date time value. Return a value. Gets the Gregorian year from a era and a era year. The specify era year. The specify era. if set to true throw error when don't fit the condition. Return a int year value. Gets the Gregorian year from a era and a era year. The specify era year. The specify era. Return a int year value. Determines whether [is valid year] [the specified year]. The year. The era. true if [is valid year] [the specified year]; otherwise, false. Gets the max era. A max era. Gets the min era. A min era. Gets the max era year. The era. A max era year. Gets the min era year. The era. A min era year. Gets the max era year. The date time. Gets the min era year. The date time. Gets the max year. The date time. An int max year value. Gets the min year. The date time. An int min year value. Gets the max month. The date time. An int max month value. Gets the min month. The date time. An int min month value. Gets the max day. The date time. An int max day value. Gets the min day. The date time. An int min dayr value. Converts the specified two-digit year to a four-digit year by using the property to determine the appropriate century. A two-digit integer that represents the year to convert. A int value indicates the two digit year max. An integer that contains the four-digit representation of year. year is outside the range supported by the calendar or twoDigitYearMax large than 99 or twoDigitYearMax less than 9999. Gets the latest date and time supported by the current object. The latest date and time supported by the type, which is equivalent to the last moment of December 31, 9999 C.E. in the Gregorian calendar. Gets the earliest date and time supported by the current object. The earliest date and time supported by the type, which is equivalent to the first moment of September 8, 1868 C.E. in the Gregorian calendar. For more information, see Remarks. Removes all eras from the era list. Gets the default eras info. The default eras info. Extended Japanese calendar. An array indicates the global eras info. The default instance. The default two digit year max value. Save the data of prototype calendar property. Initializes a new instance of the class. Gets the default eras infomations. Gets a prototype calendar. Always return the value. Gets or sets the last year of a 100-year range that can be represented by a 2-digit year. The last year of a 100-year range that can be represented by a 2-digit year. The current object is read-only. Gets a value that indicates whether the current calendar is solar-based, lunar-based, or a combination of both. Always returns the value. Gets the calendar id. Always return the int value 3. Returns a that is the specified number of months away from the specified . The that results from adding the specified number of months to the specified . The number of months to add. The to which to add months. months is less than -120000.-or- months is greater than 120000. The resulting is outside the supported range. Returns a that is the specified number of years away from the specified . The that results from adding the specified number of years to the specified . The to which to add years. The number of years to add. time is outside the supported range of the type. -or-years is less than -10,000 or greater than 10,000. The resulting is outside the supported range. Returns the day of the month in the specified . An integer from 1 to 31 that represents the day of the month in the specified . The to read. Returns the day of the week in the specified . A value that represents the day of the week in the specified . The to read. Returns the day of the year in the specified . An integer from 1 to 366 that represents the day of the year in the specified . The to read. Returns the number of days in the specified month in the specified year in the specified era. The number of days in the specified month in the specified year in the specified era. An integer that represents the era. An integer from 1 to 12 that represents the month. An integer that represents the year. year is outside the range supported by the calendar.-or- month is outside the range supported by the calendar. -or- era is outside the range supported by the calendar. Returns the number of days in the specified year in the specified era. The number of days in the specified year in the specified era. An integer that represents the era. An integer that represents the year. year is outside the range supported by the calendar.-or- era is outside the range supported by the calendar. Returns the era in the specified . An integer that represents the era in the specified . The to read. Calculates the leap month for a specified year and era. The return value is always 0 because the type does not support the notion of a leap month. An era. A year. year or era is outside the range supported by the type. Returns the month in the specified . An integer from 1 to 12 that represents the month in the specified . The to read. Returns the number of months in the specified year in the specified era. The return value is always 12. An integer that represents the era. An integer that represents the year. year is outside the range supported by the calendar.-or- era is outside the range supported by the calendar. Returns the week of the year that includes the date in the specified object. A 1-based integer that represents the week of the year that includes the date in the time parameter. One of the values that defines a calendar week. One of the values that represents the first day of the week. The object to read. time or firstDayOfWeek is outside the range supported by the calendar. -or- rule is not a valid value. Returns the year in the specified . An integer that represents the year in the specified . The to read. Determines whether the specified date in the specified era is a leap day. true, if the specified day is a leap day; otherwise, false. An integer that represents the era. An integer from 1 to 12 that represents the month. An integer from 1 to 31 that represents the day. An integer that represents the year. year is outside the range supported by the calendar.-or- month is outside the range supported by the calendar. -or- day is outside the range supported by the calendar.-or- era is outside the range supported by the calendar. Determines whether the specified month in the specified year in the specified era is a leap month. This method always returns false, unless overridden by a derived class. An integer that represents the era. An integer from 1 to 12 that represents the month. An integer that represents the year. year is outside the range supported by the calendar.-or- month is outside the range supported by the calendar. -or- era is outside the range supported by the calendar. Determines whether the specified year in the specified era is a leap year. true, if the specified year is a leap year; otherwise, false. An integer that represents the era. An integer that represents the year. year is outside the range supported by the calendar. -or- era is outside the range supported by the calendar. Returns a that is set to the specified date and time in the specified era. The that is set to the specified date and time in the current era. An integer that represents the era. An integer from 1 to 12 that represents the month. An integer from 0 to 999 that represents the millisecond. An integer from 1 to 31 that represents the day. An integer from 0 to 59 that represents the minute. An integer that represents the year. An integer from 0 to 23 that represents the hour. An integer from 0 to 59 that represents the second. year is outside the range supported by the calendar.-or- month is outside the range supported by the calendar. -or- day is outside the range supported by the calendar.-or- hour is less than zero or greater than 23. -or- minute is less than zero or greater than 59.-or- second is less than zero or greater than 59. -or- millisecond is less than zero or greater than 999.-or- era is outside the range supported by the calendar. Adds a Japanese era in the calendar. Index of the era Era start date Era end date Japanese era name Abbreviated Japanese era name English era name Symbolic era name Helper static class that contains AddJapaneseEra function. Clears the all Japanese Eras. Adds era to the Japanese calendar. Era numeric id. Must be non-negative integer Start day of the era. End day of the era. Japanese name of the era. Short Japanese name of the era. Era name in English. Optional. One Latin symbol era name. Reads eras info from the GC configuration file. Section name. Defines the category of a Unicode character. Indicates that the character is not of a particular category. Indicates that the character is a control code. Indicates that the character is a numeric digit. Indicates that the character is a mathematical symbol. Indicates that the character is a symbol. Indicates that the character is a punctuation. ( Open & Close ) Indicates that the character is a space character. Indicates that the character is an upper case letter. Indicates that the character is a lower case letter. Indicates that the character is a Japanese Katakana character. Indicates that the character is a Japanese Hiragana character. Indicates that the character is a CJK punctuation. Indicates that the character is a Hangal character. Indicates that the character is of full width. Represents the extension functions to the standard .NET Char type. The purpose for this is to provide better CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean ) character support. Defines the Null char. Defines the control char: Backspace Defines the control char: Tab. Defines the control char: Space. Character groups (character codes) based on Unicode 3.1. Character blocks categorized base on the Unicode standard. Table of multi-width character blocks. Type of multi-width characters. Mapping table of full width Katakana. Mapping table of half-width Katakana. Mapping table for accents for the Japanese language. Represents the smallest possible value of a Char. This field is constant. Represents the largest possible value of a Char. This field is constant. Retrieves the type of character. A Unicode character. A CharType representing the type of character of c. Determines whether the specified character is of the specified type. A Unicode character. A CharType type. true if specified c and type matches the type of the character; otherwise false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a multi-width character. A Unicode character. true if c is a multi-width character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the character at the specified position in a specified string is categorized as a multi-width character. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a multi-width character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is a full width character. Usually CJK characters are considers as full widths. A Unicode character. true if c is a full width character; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a full width character. Usually CJK characters are considers as full widths. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a full width character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether a Unicode character doesn't belong to any specific letter. A Unicode character. true if c is doesn't a Katakana character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a control code. A Unicode character. true if c is a control code; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a control code. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a control code; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Katakana letter. A Unicode character. true if c is a Katakana character; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Katakana character. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Katakana character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Hiragana letter. A Unicode character. true if c is a Hiragana character; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Hiragana character. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Hiragana character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Numeric digit. A Unicode character. true if c is a Numeric character; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Numeric digit. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Numeric digit; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Punctuation character. A Unicode character. true if c is a Punctuation character; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Punctuation character. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Punctuation character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a mathematical symbol. A Unicode character. true if c is a mathematical character; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a mathematical symbol. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a mathematical character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Symbol character. A Unicode character. true if c is a Symbol character; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Symbol character. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Symbol character; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Lowercase letter. A Unicode character. true if c is a Lowercase letter; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Lowercase letter. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Lowercase letter; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Uppercase letter. A Unicode character. true if c is a Uppercase letter; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Uppercase letter. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Uppercase letter; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a Numeric or a Math symbol. A Unicode character. true if c is a numeric or symbol character; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a Numeric or a Math symbol. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a Numeric or a Math symbol; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a alphabet letter. A Unicode character. true if c is a alphabet letter; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a alphabet letter. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a alphabet letter; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a alphabet letter or digit. A Unicode character. true if c is a alphabet letter or digit; otherwise, false. Indicates wether the character at the specified position in the specified string is a alphabet letter or digit. A string. The character position in s. true if the character at position index in s is a alphabet letter or digit; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a upper (capital) case kana. A Unicode character. true if c is a kana upper (capital) case; otherwise, false. Indicates whether the specified Unicode character is categorized as a lower (normal) case kana. A Unicode character. true if c is a kana lower (normal) case; otherwise, false. Determines whether the related kana has a related lower case. A Unicode character. true if c has a related lower case kana; otherwise, false. Transforms the specified character to a full width character if possible. Ranges are Latin basic, Katakana and Hangul characters. A Unicode character. Full width character of c, otherwise original character returned. Tansforms the specified character to a full width character if possible. This method differs from the other where it takes on an array of characters. In FarEast country there are times when multiple half width characters make a one full width character. An array of characters. When the soundex character is processed a true is returned; otherwise, a false returned. Full width character of c, otherwise the original character is returned. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's half width equivalent. Ranges are Latin basic, Katakana and Hangul characters. A Unicode character. The half width equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is already a half width or not a multi-width character. Transforms the specified character to a half width character if possible. This method differs from the ToHalfWidth method where it tries to return the accurate half width character - which most likely happens in FarEast countries. A Unicode character. A character array representing c in half width form. In most cases this array will have only one element. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's "Katakana" equivalent. Special character handling for the Japanese language. A Unicode character. The Katakana equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is already a Katakana or not Hiragana. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's "Katakana" equivalent with an optional setting of full or half width. Special character handling for the Japanese language A Unicode character. true to return a full width Katakana, and false to return a half width Katakana. The Katakana equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is already a Katakana or not Hiragana. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's "Hiragana" equivalent. Special character handling for the Japanese language. A Unicode character. The Hiragana equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is already a Hiragana or not Katakana. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's ANSI equivalent. A Unicode character. An Ansi character equivalent of c in the current culture. Encodes the specified Unicode character to an ANSI character using the current culture. Converts the value of a Unicode character to it's ANSI equivalent using the specified culture information. A Unicode character. A CultureInfo object. If a null reference is passed, the current culture is assumed. An Ansi character equivalent of c using the specified culture. Converts the value of a JIS (Japanese encoding) character to it's Shift-JIS equivalent. A JIS character. The Shift-JIS equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is not a full width character. Converts a JIS character to it's equivalent Shift-JIS character - used in the Japanese language. Please note that this method does not take a Unicode character as it's parameter - use the character value returned by the "ToJIS" method. Converts the value of a Shift-JIS (Japanese encoding) character to it's JIS equivalent. A Shift-JIS character. The JIS equivalent of c. - or - The unchanged value of c, if c is not a full width character. Converts a Shift-JIS character to it's equivalent JIS character - used in the Japanese language. Please note that this method does not take a Unicode character as it's parameter - use the character value returned by the "ToSJIS" method. Converts the value of an ANSI character to it's Unicode equivalent. An ANSI character. A Unicode character equivalent of c. Converts the value of a ANSI character to it's Unicode equivalent using the specified culture information. An ANSI character. A CultureInfo object. If a null reference is passed, the current culture is assumed. An Unicode character equivalent of c using the specified culture. Converts an lower (normal) case kana into a upper (capital) case. A Unicode character. The equivalent kana upper case character. Converts an upper (capital) case kana into a lower case (normal). A Unicode character. The equivalent kana lower case character. retrieves the Unicode character block the specified character belongs to. Current version supports a range from '\u000' through '\uffff'. A Unicode character. A Unicode block the specified character belongs to. Returns further detail information of the character, since it lies in a range where it holds a fixture of different character widths. A Unicode character. An CharType describing the type of the character, and also the width whether it's full or half. Determines whether the specified block has to do with CJK... ( only CJK have concepts of wide ) A unicode char block. A to process. true if the block is related to CJK; otherwise false. Converts a byte array into a char type. (Internal usage) A byte array. A character equivalent of value. Converts a single character into a byte array. (Internal usage) A character. A byte array equivalent of c. Conversion between half and full width characters for Japanese special characters. A character. true to convert to full width; otherwise, false. The converted character. means conversion didn't take place. Represents the helper class for Validating whether an object is valid or not Count the total bit of value tested An unit indicate the test value An int indicate the valid bit count (total number of 1 as sample) of value Get the bit count from special bit value. For example, here is a bit value 0x5f, it bit count is 6. (0x5f = 10101111) Check current value is a valid Enum type An int indivate the value you want to check An int indicate the minimum value of your enum type An int indicate the maximum value of your enum type A bool indicate the check result, if current value is a valid enum type, return true; otherwise false This method is applicable to check a Sequential defined not-flag-style enum type Check current value is a valid Enum type An int indivate the value you want to check An int indicate the minimum value of your enum type An int indicate the maximum value of your enum type An int indicate the max count of bit for test enum value A bool indicate the check result, if current value is a valid enum type, return true; otherwise false This method is applicable to check a Sequential defined flag-style enum type There is a enum value you want to test is 0x5f, in this enum type, the min value is 0x0f, and max value is 0x100, then this method called below can test its validation: EnumHelper.IsValid(0x5f, 0x0f, 0x100, 8); In this scenario, the four parameter is 8, because the max value is 0x100(Binary as 100000000), the max bits on value is 0xff (Binary as 11111111), it's the max number of bits on Represents nn expression that indicates the quotient of two quantities. The number written above the line in a common fraction to indicate the number of parts of the whole. The number written below the line in a common fraction that indicates the number of parts into which one whole is divided. Initializes a new instance of structure with the specified numerator and denominator. A double that indicates the number written above the line in a common fraction to indicate the number of parts of the whole. A double that indicats the number written below the line in a common fraction that indicates the number of parts into which one whole is divided. Gets or sets the numertor of the fraction. A double that indicates the number written above the line in a common fraction to indicate the number of parts of the whole. Gets or sets the denominator of the fraction. A double that indicats the number written below the line in a common fraction that indicates the number of parts into which one whole is divided. Defines the unary "-" operator. Defines the binary "+" operator. Defines the binary "-" operator. Defines the binary "*" operator. Defines the binary "*" operator. Defines the binary "*" operator. Defines the binary "/" operator. Defines the binary "/" operator. Defines the binary "/" operator. Defines the "!" operator. Note: "!" is used as simplify in here. Converts the fraction to double. Converts the double to fraction. Reverse the fraction. Simplify the fraction. Represents nn expression that indicates the quotient of two quantities. Indicate the type of numerator and denominator. The number written above the line in a common fraction to indicate the number of parts of the whole. The number written below the line in a common fraction that indicates the number of parts into which one whole is divided. Initializes a new instance of structure with the specified numerator and denominator. A that indicates the number written above the line in a common fraction to indicate the number of parts of the whole. A that indicats the number written below the line in a common fraction that indicates the number of parts into which one whole is divided. Initializes a new instance of structure with the specified numerator and denominator. A that indicates the number written above the line in a common fraction to indicate the number of parts of the whole. Gets or sets the numertor of the fraction. A that indicates the number written above the line in a common fraction to indicate the number of parts of the whole. Gets or sets the denominator of the fraction. A that indicats the number written below the line in a common fraction that indicates the number of parts into which one whole is divided. Defines the unary "-" operator. Defines the binary "+" operator. Defines the binary "-" operator. Defines the binary "*" operator. Defines the binary "*" operator. Defines the binary "*" operator. Defines the binary "/" operator. Defines the binary "/" operator. Defines the binary "/" operator. Defines the "!" operator. Note: "!" is used as simplify in here. Converts the fraction to double. Converts the fraction to float. Converts the double to fraction. Converts the float to fraction. Reverse the fraction. Simplify the fraction. Provides constants and static methods for trigonometric, logarithmic, and other common mathematical functions. This class is used to reinforce the function of Calculate the Greatest Common Divisor of oneNumber and anotherNumber. An int indicate the one number. An int indicate another number. An int indicate the Greatest Common Divisor. Calculate the Lease Common Multiple of oneNumber and anotherNumber. An int indicate the one number An int indicate another number An int indicate the Lease Common Multiple. Convertes the relative percentage to absolute percentage. An double value (>= -1.0) that indicates the relative percentage. A double value that represents the absolute percentage. Convertes the relative percentage to absolute percentage. An double value (>= 0.0) that indicates the absolute percentage. A double value that represents the relative percentage. Returns the number nearest the specified value. A decimal number to be rounded. The number of significant fractional digits (precision) in the return value. The number nearest value with precision equal to decimals. To make a round mathematic operation for float type number A float number to be rounded. The number nearest value with precision equal to float. To make a round mathematic operation for double type number. A double number to be rounded. The number nearest value with precision equal to double. Define a class that represents the matrix in mathematics. A two dimension double array used to save the data. In order to improve speed of inherited classes, I give the proteced modification Initializes a new instance of class. Initializes a new instance of class. A int indicates the number of row. A int indicates the number of column. Initializes a new instance of class. A two dimension double array used to save the elements. Initializes a new instance of class. A bool indicates whether the direction of vectors is vertical. A array indicates the vectors. Gets or sets the value of element at special location. A double indicates the element value. Note: The row and column are base on zero. Gets the elements of the matrix. A two dimension double array save the elements. Get the column number of the matrix. A int value indicates the width of the matrix. Get the row number of the matrix. A int value indicates the height of the matrix. Gets a value indicating whether this Matrix object is the identity matrix. This property is true if this Matrix is identity; otherwise, false. | 1, 0, 0 | | 0, 1, 0 | | 0, 0, 1 | Get the vectors from the column direction. A array indicates the columns of the matrix. Get the vectors from the row direction.. A array indicates the rows of the matrix. Check the operation parameters, if the parameters is invalid, throw an exception. A bool value indicates the check mode. true for the multiply operation. A string indicates the operation description. A array indicates the operation parameters. Defines the + operator for Matrix class. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A indicates the add operation result of two operands. Defines the binary - operator for Matrix class. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A indicates the binary nimus operation result of two operands. Defines the binary - operator for Matrix class. A indicates the operand. A indicates the unary nimus operation result of operand. Defines the * operator for Matrix class. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A indicates the multiplication operation result of two operands. Defines the transpose operator for Matrix class. A indicates the operand. A indicates the transpose operation result of operand. Use the explicit convertion to get a value of matrix. A indicates the matrix will calculate value of it. A double indicates the value of the speical matrix. Defines the == operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A bool indicates whether left equals right. Defines the == operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A bool indicates whether left does not equals right. Adds a speical to this . A indicates the speical matrix. Left multiply a speical to this . A indicates the speical matrix. Right multiply a speical to this . A indicates the speical matrix. Convertes this to it's transpose matrix. Gets the value of the current matrix. A double indicates the value of the this matrix. Create a new object that is a copy of this . A object is a copy of this . Determines whether the specified System.Object is equal to the current System.Object. The System.Object to compare with the current System.Object. true if the specified System.Object is equal to the current System.Object; otherwise, false. Serves as a hash function for a particular type. System.Object.GetHashCode is suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a hash table. A hash code for the current System.Object. Returns a string that represents the current matrix. A string that represents the current matrix. Define a class that represents the matrix in mathematics. All supported type of T. C#: double C#: float A two dimension T array used to save the data. In order to improve speed of inherited classes, I give the proteced modification Saves the type of T. Initializes a new instance of class. Initializes a new instance of class. A int indicates the number of row. A int indicates the number of column. Initializes a new instance of class. A two dimension double array used to save the elements. Initializes a new instance of class. A bool indicates whether the direction of vectors is vertical. A array indicates the vectors. Gets or sets the value of element at special location. A T indicates the element value. Note: The row and column are base on zero. Gets the elements of the matrix. A two dimension T array save the elements. Get the column number of the matrix. A int value indicates the width of the matrix. Get the row number of the matrix. A int value indicates the height of the matrix. Gets a value indicating whether this Matrix object is the identity matrix. This property is true if this Matrix is identity; otherwise, false. | 1, 0, 0 | | 0, 1, 0 | | 0, 0, 1 | Get the vectors from the column direction. A array indicates the columns of the matrix. Get the vectors from the row direction.. A array indicates the rows of the matrix. Check the operation parameters, if the parameters is invalid, throw an exception. A bool value indicates the check mode. true for the multiply operation. A string indicates the operation description. A array indicates the operation parameters. Defines the + operator for Matrix class. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A indicates the add operation result of two operands. Defines the binary - operator for Matrix class. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A indicates the binary nimus operation result of two operands. Defines the binary - operator for Matrix class. A indicates the operand. A indicates the unary nimus operation result of operand. Defines the * operator for Matrix class. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A indicates the multiplication operation result of two operands. Defines the transpose operator for Matrix class. A indicates the operand. A indicates the transpose operation result of operand. Use the explicit convertion to get a value of matrix. A indicates the matrix will calculate value of it. A double indicates the value of the speical matrix. Defines the == operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A bool indicates whether left equals right. Defines the == operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A bool indicates whether left does not equals right. Adds a speical to this . A indicates the speical matrix. Left multiply a speical to this . A indicates the speical matrix. Right multiply a speical to this . A indicates the speical matrix. Convertes this to it's transpose matrix. Gets the value of the current matrix. A T indicates the value of the this matrix. Create a new object that is a copy of this . A object is a copy of this . Determines whether the specified System.Object is equal to the current System.Object. The System.Object to compare with the current System.Object. true if the specified System.Object is equal to the current System.Object; otherwise, false. Serves as a hash function for a particular type. System.Object.GetHashCode is suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a hash table. A hash code for the current System.Object. Returns a string that represents the current matrix. A string that represents the current matrix. A table used to convert value between the different measure units. Gets the inch per millimeter. [1 millimeter = 6/127 inch] Gets the inch per document. [1 document = 1/300 inch] Gets the inch per display. [1 document = 1/75 inch] Gets the inch per point. [1 point = 1/72 inch] Gets the inch per twips. [1 document = 1/1440 inch] Gets the millimeter per inch. Gets the document per inch. Gets the display per inch. Gets the point per inch Gets the twips per inch. Define a Vector class that represents the mathematic vector. Saves the data of this vector. In order to improve speed of inherited classes, I give the proteced modification Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class. A int indicates the dimension of the vector. The dimension of the vector must be bigger than or equal zero. Initializes a new instance of the class. A double array indicates the items. Gets or sets the dimension of the vector. A int indicates the dimension of the vector. As soon as a Vector instance is created, it's dimension is fixed. Gets or sets the value of element at special index. A double indicates the element value. Note: The index is base on zero. Gets the all elements in the vector. Gets a value indicating whether this Vector object is zero vector. If this Vector object is zero vector, return true, otherwise, return false. Gets a value indicating whether this Vector object is indentity vector. If this Vector object is indentity vector, return true, otherwise, return false. Check the operation parameters, if the parameters is invalid, throw an exception. A string indicates the operation description. A array indicates the operation parameters. Defines the + operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A that is the add result of the left and right operands. (n1, n2, n3) + (m1, m2, m3) = (n1 + m1, n2 + m2, n3 + m3) Defines the binary - operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A that is the binary minus result of the left and right operands. (n1, n2, n3) - (m1, m2, m3) = (n1 - m1, n2 - m2, n3 - m3) Defines the unary - operator for vector. A indicates the operand. A that is the unary minus result of the operands. -(n1, n2, n3) = (-n1, -n2, -n3) Defines the * operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A that is the multiplying result of the left and right operands. (n1, n2, n3) * (m1, m2, m3) = (n1 * m1, n2 * m2, n3 * m3) Defines the == operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A bool indicates whether left equals right. Defines the == operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A bool indicates whether left dose not equals right. Defines the descarts multiplication operation for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A that is the descarts multiplying result of the left and right operands. | i, j, k | (n1, n2, n3) X (m1, m2, m3) = | n1, n2, n3| = (?, ?, ?) | m1, m2, m3| Get the modul of the special vector. A indicates the vector. A double indicates the modul of the speical vector. Add a special vector to this vector. A indicates the speical vector.. Dot multiply a speical vector to this vector. A indicates the speical vector.. Cross multiply a speical vector to this vector. A indicates the speical vector.. Get the modul of the this vector. A double indicates the modul of the speical vector. Create a new object that is a copy of this . A object is a copy of this . Determines whether the specified System.Object is equal to the current System.Object. The System.Object to compare with the current System.Object. true if the specified System.Object is equal to the current System.Object; otherwise, false. Serves as a hash function for a particular type. System.Object.GetHashCode is suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a hash table. A hash code for the current System.Object. Returns a string that represents the current vector. A string that represents the current vector. Define a Vector class that represents the mathematic vector. All supported type of T. C#: double C#: float Saves the data of this vector. In order to improve speed of inherited classes, I give the proteced modification Saves the type of T. Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class. A int indicates the dimension of the vector. The dimension of the vector must be bigger than or equal zero. Initializes a new instance of the class. A array indicates the items. Gets or sets the dimension of the vector. A int indicates the dimension of the vector. As soon as a Vector instance is created, it's dimension is fixed. Gets or sets the value of element at special index. A indicates the element value. Note: The index is base on zero. Gets the all elements in the vector. Gets a value indicating whether this Vector object is zero vector. If this Vector object is zero vector, return true, otherwise, return false. Gets a value indicating whether this Vector object is indentity vector. If this Vector object is indentity vector, return true, otherwise, return false. Check the operation parameters, if the parameters is invalid, throw an exception. A string indicates the operation description. A array indicates the operation parameters. Defines the + operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A that is the add result of the left and right operands. (n1, n2, n3) + (m1, m2, m3) = (n1 + m1, n2 + m2, n3 + m3) Defines the binary - operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A that is the binary minus result of the left and right operands. (n1, n2, n3) - (m1, m2, m3) = (n1 - m1, n2 - m2, n3 - m3) Defines the unary - operator for vector. A indicates the operand. A that is the unary minus result of the operands. -(n1, n2, n3) = (-n1, -n2, -n3) Defines the * operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A that is the multiplying result of the left and right operands. (n1, n2, n3) * (m1, m2, m3) = (n1 * m1, n2 * m2, n3 * m3) Defines the == operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A bool indicates whether left equals right. Defines the == operator for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A bool indicates whether left dose not equals right. Defines the descarts multiplication operation for vector. A indicates the left operand. A indicates the right operand. A that is the descarts multiplying result of the left and right operands. | i, j, k | (n1, n2, n3) X (m1, m2, m3) = | n1, n2, n3| = (?, ?, ?) | m1, m2, m3| Get the modul of the special vector. A indicates the vector. A double indicates the modul of the speical vector. Add a special vector to this vector. A indicates the speical vector.. Dot multiply a speical vector to this vector. A indicates the speical vector.. Cross multiply a speical vector to this vector. A indicates the speical vector.. Get the modul of the this vector. A double indicates the modul of the speical vector. Create a new object that is a copy of this . A object is a copy of this . Determines whether the specified System.Object is equal to the current System.Object. The System.Object to compare with the current System.Object. true if the specified System.Object is equal to the current System.Object; otherwise, false. Serves as a hash function for a particular type. System.Object.GetHashCode is suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a hash table. A hash code for the current System.Object. Returns a string that represents the current vector. A string that represents the current vector. Translates number between different types. Get the lower word from a unsigned integer value. An uint indicates the unsigned integer value. Return the lower word as result. Get the higher word from a unsigned integer value. An unint indicates the unsigned integer value. Returns the higher word as result. Get the lower word from a integer value. An int indicates the integer value. Returns the lower word as result. Get the higher word from a integer value. An unint indicates the integer value. Returns the higher word as result. Get the higher word from a value. An unint indicates the value. Returns the higher word as result. Get the higher word from a value. An unint indicates the value. Returns the higher word as result. Make a double word by low and high word. An ushort indicates the low word of the long. An ushort indicates the high word of the long. An uint indicates the long. Make a double word by low and high word. A short indicates the low word of the long. A short indicates the high word of the long. An int indicates the long. Represents the basic functionality used to get string information from assembly resource. The type to provide the assembly information. Returns the value of the resource with the specified name in the assembly indicated by the template type. Name of the resource to get. The value of a resource. Returns the value of the resource with the specified name in the assembly indicated by the template type and returns the formated string that replaced the format specification in the String with the textual equivalent of the value of a corresponding Object instance in a specified array. Name of the resource to get. An Object array containing zero or more objects to be formatted. The formated value of a resource. Returns the value of the resource localized for the specified culture with the specified name in the assembly indicated by the template type. The CultureInfo object that represents the culture for which the resource is localized. Name of the resource to get. The value of a resource. Returns the value of the resource localized for the specified culture with the specified name in the assembly indicated by the template type and returns the formated string that replaced the format specification in the String with the textual equivalent of the value of a corresponding Object instance in a specified array. The CultureInfo object that represents the culture for which the resource is localized. Name of the resource to get. An Object array containing zero or more objects to be formatted. The formated value of a resource. If the dpi is larger than 150% and there is a bigger size image, this method will return the bigger image with scaled. Resource name. The bigger image with scaled in the resource. Gets the image of the resource with the specified name in the assembly. Resource name. The image in the resource. Defines an exception class to handle the system error. Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class. The message that describes the error. Initializes a new instance of the System.SystemException class with a specified error message and a reference to the inner exception that is the cause of this exception. The error message that explains the reason for the exception. The exception that is the cause of the current exception. If the innerException parameter is not a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic), the current exception is raised in a catch block that handles the inner exception. Gets the error code created by last error API. An int indicates the error code. Gets the description of the error. An int indicates the code of the error. A string indicates the description. This class is used to trace the gdi problems(such as: gdi leak). [Empty] [Empty] [Empty] [Empty] Represents the bits-per-pixel of the bitmap. The number of bits-per-pixel is specified or is implied by the JPEG or PNG format. Each bit in the bitmap array represents a pixel. the items member of color table contains two entries. The bitmap has a maximum of 16 colors, the items member of color table contains up to 16 entries. Each pixel in the bitmap is represented by a 4-bit index into the color table. The bitmap has a maximum of 256 colors, and the items member of color table contains up to 256 entries. Each byte in the array represents a single pixel. The bitmap has a maximum of 2^16 colors. In general, the color table is empty, each word in the bitmap array represents a single pixel The bitmap has a maximum of 2^24 colors. In general, the color table is empty, each 3-byte triplet in the bitmap array represents the relative intensities of blue, green, and red, respectively, for a pixel. The bitmap has a maximum of 2^32 colors. In general, the color table is empty, each double-word in the bitmap array represents the relative intensities of blue, green, and red, respectively, for a pixel. Represents the gid bitmap. Saves the width of the bitmap. Saves the height of the bitmap. Saves the planes of the bitmap. Saves the bits-per-pixel of the bitmap. Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified size. The width, in pixels, of the new object. The height, in pixels, of the new object. Intializes a new instance of the class with the specified size color format (color planes and bits-per-pixel). The width, in pixels, of the new object. The height, in pixels, of the new object. The number of bits required to identify the color of a single pixel. Intializes a new instance of the class with the specified size color format (color planes and bits-per-pixel). The width, in pixels, of the new object. The height, in pixels, of the new object. Specifies the number of planes for the target device. This value must be set to 1. The number of bits required to identify the color of a single pixel. The pattern data array. Intializes a new instance of the class with the specified object and size. A object. The width, in pixels, of the new object. The height, in pixels, of the new object. Initializes a new instance of the class. A that indicates the handle of the bitmap. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the GDI+ bitmap. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the GDI+ bitmap. A structure that specifies the background color. This parameter is ignored if the bitmap is totally opaque. Gets the width and height of this object. A structure that represents the width and height of this object. Gets the height of this object. Gets the width of this object. Gets the planes of the Bitmap. The value is always 1. Gets the data of the bitmap. Gets the bits-per-pixel of the bitmap. Creates an exact copy of this object. The object that this method creates. Creates a GDI+ Bitmap from a handle to a GDI bitmap. A indicates the GDI bitmap. A indicates the GDI+ bitmap. Represents the base class of all kinds of brush This is an abstract class, which is just details that it's ranged to Brush. To use a , you should create an instance from its inherited class. Refer to , , Fills the rectangle on deviceContext by using the current brush. A indicate the drawing target A indicate the rectangle to fill. When filling the specified rectangle, it does not include the rectangle's right and bottom sides. GDI fills a rectangle up to, but not including, the right column and bottom row, regardless of the current mapping mode. Fill the special ellipse on deviceContext by using the current brush A indicate the drawing target A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse Windows 95/98/Me: The sum of the coordinates of the bounding rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. The width of rectangle or the height of rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. Fill the interior of an pie specified by a bounding structure. A indicate the drawing target A structure that defines the boundaries of the pie. A float value that defines the start angle of the pie. A float value that defines the sweep angle of the pie. The curve begins at the point where the ellipse intersects the first radial and extends counterclockwise to the point where the ellipse intersects the second radial. Fill a special polygon consisting of two or more vertices connected by straight lines. The polygon is filled by using the current brush and polygon fill mode. A indicate the drawing target A structures that specify the vertices of the polygon. Fills the region by the specified brush. A indicate the drawing target A indicate the region which be filled Represents the brush which always solid draw Here we only can support NameKnowedColor or Null alpha ARGB color if is or , it means create a Place holder for the Color property. Initializes a new instance of the class. The Color property is set to (default) and the Width property is set to 1 (default). Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified color. A structure that indicates the color of this object. The property is set to the color specified by the color parameter. The Width property is set to 1 (default). Gets or sets the color of this object. A structure that represents the color of this object. Create a that has the same style as this brush. A that has the same style as this brush. Create the brush by specified styles. An is the handle of the brush. Here we only can support NameKnowedColor or Null alpha ARGB color if is or , it means create a Represents the hatch style of the . Horizontal hatch It seems like: | ==== | | ==== | Vertical hatch It seems like: | |||| | | |||| | A 45-degree downward, left-to-right hatch It seems like: | \\\\ | | \\\\ | A 45-degree downward, left-to-right hatch It seems like: | //// | | //// | Horizontal and vertical cross-hatch It seems like: | ++++ | | ++++ | 45-degree crosshatch It seems like: | \/\/ | | /\/\ | Represents the brush which draw with Save the of this brush Save the foreground color of this brush Save the background color of this brush Initialize a new instance of the class A indicate the drawing style of Initialize a new instance of the class A indicate the drawing style of A indicate the foreground color of the device on which be drawed Initialize a new instance of the class A indicate the drawing style of A indicate the foreground color of the device on which be drawed A indicate the backgound color of the device on which be drawed Gets or sets the color of this object. A structure that represents the foreground color of this object. Gets or sets the color of this object. A structure that represents the background color of this object. Gets or sets the style of the . A indicates the line style of the brush. Create the brush by specified styles. An is the handle of the brush. Create a that has the same style as this brush. A that has the same style as this brush. Fill the specified rectangle by using the given hatch brush. A object that represents the device context. A structure that specifies the rectangle to be filled. Fill the special ellipse on deviceContext by using the current brush A indicate the drawing target A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse Fill the interior of an pie specified by a bounding structure. A indicate the drawing target A structure that defines the boundaries of the pie. A float value that defines the start angle of the pie. A float value that defines the sweep angle of the pie. Fill a special polygon consisting of two or more vertices connected by straight lines. The polygon is filled by using the current brush and polygon fill mode. A indicate the drawing target A structures that specify the vertices of the polygon. Fills the region by the specified brush. A indicate the drawing target A indicate the region which be filled Represents the brush which draw nothing Initialize a new instance of Create the brush by specified styles. An is the handle of the brush. Create a that has the same style as this brush. A that has the same style as this brush. Defines a brush with a pattern. Gets the Horizontal pattern. Gets the Vertical pattern. Gets the ForwordDiagonal pattern. Gets the BackwardDiagonal pattern. Gets the LargeGrid pattern. Gets the DiagonalCross pattern. Gets the Percent5 pattern. Gets the Percent10 pattern. Gets the Percent20 pattern. Gets the Percent25 pattern. Gets the Percent30 pattern. Gets the Percent40 pattern. Gets the Percent50 pattern. Gets the Percent60 pattern. Gets the Percent70 pattern. Gets the Percent75 pattern. Gets the Percent80 pattern. Gets the Percent90 pattern. Gets the LightDownwardDiagonal pattern. Gets the LightUpwardDiagonal pattern. Gets the DarkDownwardDiagonal pattern. Gets the DarkUpwardDiagonal pattern. Gets the WideDownwardDiagonal pattern. Gets the WideUpwardDiagonal pattern. Gets the LightVertical pattern. Gets the LightHorizontal pattern. Gets the NarrowVertical pattern. Gets the NarrowHorizontal pattern. Gets the DarkVertical pattern. Gets the DarkHorizontal pattern. Gets the DashedDownwardDiagonal pattern. Gets the DashedUpwardDiagonal pattern. Gets the DashedHorizontal pattern. Gets the DashedVertical pattern. Gets the SmallConfetti pattern. Gets the LargeConfetti pattern. Gets the ZigZag pattern. Gets the Wave pattern. Gets the DiagonalBrick pattern. Gets the HorizontalBrick pattern. Gets the Weave pattern. Gets the Plaid pattern. Gets the Divot pattern. Gets the DottedGrid pattern. Gets the DottedDiamond pattern. Gets the Shingle pattern. Gets the Trellis pattern. Gets the Sphere pattern. Gets the SmallGrid pattern. Gets the SmallCheckerBoard pattern. Gets the LargeCheckerBoard pattern. Gets the OutlinedDiamond pattern. Gets the SolidDiamond pattern. Gets the Hollow pattern. Saves the data of the property. Saves the data of the property. Saves the data of the property. Caches the handle of the bitmap that presents the pattern. Initializes a new instance of the class. A byte array that indicates the pattern. Initializes a new instance of the class. A byte array that indicates the pattern. A that indicates the foreground color of the pattern. Initializes a new instance of the class. A byte array that indicates the pattern. A that indicates the foreground color of the pattern. A that indicates the background color of the pattern. Gets or sets the background color of the pattern. A structure that indicates the background color of the pattern. If the value is Color.Empty the background color is the currrent background color of the device context. Gets or sets the foreground color of the pattern. A structure that indicates the foreground color of the pattern. If the value is Color.Empty the foreground color is the currrent foreground color of the device context. Gets or sets the pattern mask. A int array that indicates the pattern. Each bit represents a pixel. 0 - indicates to fill the pixel with foreground color. 1 - indicates to fill the pixel with background color. If the Pattern is null or empty, all pixel will be filled with background color. Returns a handle to this GdiObject object. A Windows handle to this GdiObject object. Delete the old handle and Create the new handle when the Create the handle by the current value of Patterns property. The handle of the pattern bitmap Returns the handle of the pattern brush. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the GdiObject and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Creates an exact copy if this GdiObject object. The GdiObject object that this method creates. Fill the specified rectangle by using the given pattern brush. A object that represents the device context. A structure that specifies the rectangle to be filled. Defines the filling action. Adds the colors to the filling action. A indicate the drawing target The original filling action. Fill the special ellipse on deviceContext by using the current brush A indicate the drawing target A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse Fill the interior of an pie specified by a bounding structure. A indicate the drawing target A structure that defines the boundaries of the pie. A float value that defines the start angle of the pie. A float value that defines the sweep angle of the pie. Fill a special polygon consisting of two or more vertices connected by straight lines. The polygon is filled by using the current brush and polygon fill mode. A indicate the drawing target A structures that specify the vertices of the polygon. Fills the region by the specified brush. A indicate the drawing target A indicate the region which be filled A wrapper method to call base logic. A indicate the drawing target A indicate the region which be filled We could not call base.XXX() on anonymous delegate. Otherwise compiler error CS_1911 (Undocumented) will be warned. A wrapper method to call base logic. A indicate the drawing target A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse We could not call base.XXX() on anonymous delegate. Otherwise compiler error CS_1911 (Undocumented) will be warned. A wrapper method to call base logic. A indicate the drawing target A structures that specify the vertices of the polygon. We could not call base.XXX() on anonymous delegate. Otherwise compiler error CS_1911 (Undocumented) will be warned. A wrapper method to call base logic. A indicate the drawing target A structure that defines the boundaries of the pie. A float value that defines the start angle of the pie. A float value that defines the sweep angle of the pie. We could not call base.XXX() on anonymous delegate. Otherwise compiler error CS_1911 (Undocumented) will be warned. Represent a texture brush be used to fill with texture A indicate the texture Initialize a new istance of A indicate an unit of the texture Create the handle by the current value of bitmap. The handle of the pattern bitmap Returns the handle of the pattern brush. Creates an exact copy if this TextureBrush object. A new which properties same as current brush Releases the unmanaged resources used by the GdiObject and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. An represents the gradient direction. Towards to left. Towards to right. Towards to up. Towards to down. Represents the brush to be used to fill the gradient shape. The handle of the inherited class of is always IntPtr.Zero, so it can not be used to . Get the reverse order colors A array indicates the original colors. A array indicates the reverse order colors. Combines the colors. A array indicates the colors. A array indicates the combined colors. Fills triangle with specified colors. A indicates the dc. A indicates the vertex1 of triangle. A indicates the vertex2 of triangle. A indicates the vertex3 of triangle. A array indicates the gradient colors. Represents the brush to be used to fill the gradient shape. The handle of the is always IntPtr.Zero, so it can not be used to . Fills the specified pie on the device context by using this brush. A that indicates the device context. A that just contains the ellipse. Fills the specified pie on the device context by using this brush. A that indicates the device context. A structure that defines the boundaries of the pie. A float value that defines the start angle of the pie. A float value that defines the sweep angle of the pie. Fills the specified polygon on the device context by using this brush. A that indicates the device context. An array of that indicates the vertexes of polygon. Fills the specified region on the device context by using this brush. A that indicates the device context. A that indicates the region. Creates an exact copy if this BoxGradientBrush object. The BoxGradientBrush object that this method creates. Represents the brush to be used to fill the gradient shape. The handle of the is always IntPtr.Zero, so it can not be used to . Saves the data of the property. Saves the data of the property. Initializes a new instance of the class. An array of that indicates the linear gradient colors. A that indicates the gradient direction. Gets or sets the linear gradient colors. An array of that indicates the linear gradient colors. Gets or sets the gradient direction. A that indicates the gradient direction. Fills the specified rectangle on the device context by using this brush. A that indicates the device context. A that indicates the rectangle. Represents the brush to be used to fill the gradient shape. The handle of the is always IntPtr.Zero, so it can not be used to . Saves the data of the property. Saves the data of the property. Initializes a new instance of the class. An array of that indicates the linear gradient colors. A that indicates the gradient centre point. Initializes a new instance of the class. An array of that indicates the linear gradient colors. A that indicates the gradient centre point. Gets or sets the linear gradient colors. An array of that indicates the linear gradient colors. Gets or sets the gradient direction. A that indicates the gradient centre point. Fills the specified rectangle on the device context by using this brush. A that indicates the device context. A that indicates the rectangle. Represents the brush to be used to fill the gradient shape. The handle of the is always IntPtr.Zero, so it can not be used to . Initializes a new instance of the class. Creates an exact copy if this LinearGradientBrush object. The LinearGradientBrush object that this method creates. Defines a brush that has a solid color. This brush has the same funtion as in painting. This brush will not consume gdi handle. In other word, the Handle property is always IntPtr.Zero. So it can not be used to . Saves the data of the property. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the color of the brush. Create the brush by specified styles. An is the handle of the brush. Here we only can support NameKnowedColor or Null alpha ARGB color if is or , it means create a Gets or sets the color of the brush. A indicates the color of the brush. Creates an exact copy if this ColorBrush object. The ColorBrush object that this method creates. Fills the rectangle on deviceContext by using the current brush. A indicate the drawing target A indicate the rectangle to fill. When filling the specified rectangle, it does not include the rectangle's right and bottom sides. GDI fills a rectangle up to, but not including, the right column and bottom row, regardless of the current mapping mode. Fill the special ellipse on deviceContext by using the current brush A indicate the drawing target A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse Windows 95/98/Me: The sum of the coordinates of the bounding rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. The width of rectangle or the height of rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. Fill the interior of an pie specified by a bounding structure. A indicate the drawing target A structure that defines the boundaries of the pie. A float value that defines the start angle of the pie. A float value that defines the sweep angle of the pie. The curve begins at the point where the ellipse intersects the first radial and extends counterclockwise to the point where the ellipse intersects the second radial. Fill a special polygon consisting of two or more vertices connected by straight lines. The polygon is filled by using the current brush and polygon fill mode. A indicate the drawing target A structures that specify the vertices of the polygon. Fills the region by the specified brush. A indicate the drawing target A indicate the region which be filled Brushes for all the standard colors. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. Each property of the SystemBrushes class is a object that is the color of a Windows display element. Gets a object that is the color of the active window's border. A object that is the color of the active window's border. Gets a object that is the color of the active window's title bar. A object that is the color of the active window's title bar. Gets a object that is the color of the text in the active window's A object that is the color of the text in the active window's Gets a object that is the color of the application workspace. A object that is the color of the application workspace. Gets a object that is the face color of a 3-D element. A object that is the face color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the highlight color of a 3-D element. A object that is the highlight color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the shadow color of a 3-D element. A object that is the shadow color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the face color of a 3-D element A object that is the face color of a 3-D element Gets a object that is the shadow color of a 3-D element. A object that is the shadow color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the dark shadow color of a 3-D element. A object that is the dark shadow color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the light color of a 3-D element. A object that is the light color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the highlight color of a 3-D A object that is the highlight color of a 3-D Gets a object that is the color of text in a 3-D A object that is the color of text in a 3-D Gets a object that is the color of the desktop. A object that is the color of the desktop. Gets a object that is the lightest color in the color gradient of an active window's title bar. A object that is the lightest color in the color gradient of an active window's title bar. Gets a object that is the lightest color in the color gradient of an inactive window's title bar. A object that is the lightest color in the color gradient of an inactive window's title bar. Gets a object that is the color of dimmed text. A object that is the color of dimmed text. Gets a object that is the color of the background of selected items. A object that is the color of the background of selected items. Gets a object that is the color of the text of selected items. A object that is the color of the text of selected items. Gets a object that is the color used to designate a hot-tracked item. A object that is the color used to designate a hot-tracked item. Gets a object that is the color of an inactive window's border. A object that is the color of an inactive window's border. Gets a object that is the color of the background of an inactive window's title bar. A object that is the color of the background of an inactive window's title bar. Gets a object that is the color of the text in an inactive window's title bar. A object that is the color of the text in an inactive window's title bar. Gets a object that is the color of the background of a ToolTip. A object that is the color of the background of a ToolTip. Gets a object that is the color of the text of a ToolTip. A object that is the color of the text of a ToolTip. Gets a object that is the color of a menu's background. A object that is the color of a menu's background. Gets a object that is the color of the background of a menu bar. A object that is the color of the background of a menu bar. Gets a object that is the color used to highlight menu items when the menu appears as a flat menu. A object that is the color used to highlight menu items when the menu appears as a flat menu. Gets a object that is the color of a menu's text. A object that is the color of a menu's text. Gets a object that is the color of the background of a scroll bar. A object that is the color of the background of a scroll bar. Gets a object that is the color of the background in the client area of a window. A object that is the color of the background in the client area of a window. Gets a object that is the color of a window frame. A object that is the color of a window frame. Gets a object that is the color of the text in the client area of a window. A object that is the color of the text in the client area of a window. Saves the state of the . A handle that represents the state of this . Initializes a new instance of the class. A handle that represents the state of this . Represents the raster operation code. Inverts the destination rectangle. Fills the destination rectangle using the color associated with index 0 in the physical palette. (This color is black for the default physical palette.) Fills the destination rectangle using the color associated with index 1 in the physical palette. (This color is white for the default physical palette.) Copies the source rectangle directly to the destination rectangle. Combines the colors of the source and destination rectangles by using the Boolean OR operator. Combines the colors of the source and destination rectangles by using the Boolean AND operator. Combines the colors of the source and destination rectangles by using the Boolean XOR operator. Combines the inverted colors of the destination rectangle with the colors of the source rectangle by using the Boolean AND operator. Copies the inverted source rectangle to the destination. Combines the colors of the source and destination rectangles by using the Boolean OR operator and then inverts the resultant color. Merges the colors of the source rectangle with the brush currently selected in hdcDest, by using the Boolean AND operator. Merges the colors of the inverted source rectangle with the colors of the destination rectangle by using the Boolean OR operator. Copies the brush currently selected in hdcDest, into the destination bitmap. Combines the colors of the brush currently selected in hdcDest, with the colors of the inverted source rectangle by using the Boolean OR operator. The result of this operation is combined with the colors of the destination rectangle by using the Boolean OR operator. Combines the colors of the brush currently selected in hdcDest, with the colors of the destination rectangle by using the Boolean XOR operator. Combines the colors of the brush currently selected in hdcDest, with the colors of the destination rectangle by using the Boolean And operator. Combines the colors of the brush currently selected in hdcDest, with the colors of the destination rectangle by using the Boolean OR operator. Inverts the destination rectangle. Represents the mode of the background. Background remains untouched. Background is filled with the current background color before the text, hatched brush, or pen is drawn. Represents the circum-direction. Figures drawn counterclockwise Figures drawn clockwise. Enumerate the fill mode for region Selects alternate mode (fills the area between odd-numbered and even-numbered polygon sides on each scan line). Selects winding mode (fills any region with a nonzero winding value). Define a enumeration indicates the graphics mode. The current graphics mode is the compatible graphics mode, a mode that is compatible with 16-bit Windows. In this graphics mode, an application cannot set or modify the world transformation for the specified device context. The compatible graphics mode is the default graphics mode. Windows NT/2000/XP: The current graphics mode is the advanced graphics mode, a mode that allows world transformations. In this graphics mode, an application can set or modify the world transformation for the specified device context. Windows 95/98/Me: This mode is not supported. Defines the unit of measure used to transform page-space units into device-space units, and also defines the orientation of the device's x and y axes. Logical units are mapped to arbitrary units with arbitrarily scaled axes. Use the WindowExtent and ViewportExtent properties to specify the units, orientation, and scaling. Logical units are mapped to arbitrary units with equally scaled axes; that is, one unit along the x-axis is equal to one unit along the y-axis. Use the WindowExtent and ViewportExtent properties to specify the units and the orientation of the axes. Graphics device interface (GDI) makes adjustments as necessary to ensure the x and y units remain the same size (When the window extent is set, the viewport will be adjusted to keep the units isotropic). Each logical unit is mapped to one twentieth of a printer's point (1/1440 inch, also called a twip). Positive x is to the right; positive y is up. Each logical unit is mapped to 0.001 inch. Positive x is to the right; positive y is up. Each logical unit is mapped to 0.01 inch. Positive x is to the right; positive y is up. Each logical unit is mapped to 0.01 millimeter. Positive x is to the right; positive y is up. Each logical unit is mapped to 0.1 millimeter. Positive x is to the right; positive y is up. Each logical unit is mapped to one device pixel. Positive x is to the right; positive y is down. Specifies the text alignment by using a mask of the values in the following list. Only one flag can be chosen from those that affect horizontal and vertical alignment. The reference point will be on the left edge of the bounding rectangle. The reference point will be on the right edge of the bounding rectangle. The reference point will be aligned horizontally with the center of the bounding rectangle. The reference point will be on the top edge of the bounding rectangle. The reference point will be on the bottom edge of the bounding rectangle. The reference point will be on the base line of the text. Specifies the method of formatting the text. The default text format is "Top|Left". Justifies the text to the top of the rectangle. Centers text vertically. This value is used only with the SingleLine value. Justifies the text to the bottom of the rectangle. This value is used only with the SingleLine value. Aligns text to the left. Centers text horizontally in the rectangle. Aligns text to the right. For displayed text, if the end of a string does not fit in the rectangle, it is truncated and ellipses are added. If a word that is not at the end of the string goes beyond the limits of the rectangle, it is truncated without ellipses. Truncates any word that does not fit in the rectangle and adds ellipses. For displayed text, replaces characters in the middle of the string with ellipses so that the result fits in the specified rectangle. If the string contains backslash (\) characters, PathEllipsis preserves as much as possible of the text after the last backslash. Turns off processing of prefix characters. Ignores the ampersand (&) prefix character in the text. The letter that follows will not be underlined, but other mnemonic-prefix characters are still processed. Draws only an underline at the position of the character following the ampersand (&) prefix character. Draws without clipping. Includes the font external leading in line height. Normally, external leading is not included in the height of a line of text. Duplicates the text-displaying characteristics of a multiline edit control. Specifically, the average character width is calculated in the same manner as for an edit control, and the function does not display a partially visible last line. Layout in right-to-left reading order for bi-directional text when the font selected into the device context is a Hebrew or Arabic font. The default reading order for all text is left-to-right. Displays text on a single line only. Carriage returns and line feeds do not break the line. Breaks words. Lines are automatically broken between words if a word would extend past the edge of the pecified rectangle. A carriage return-line feed sequence also breaks the line. Prevents a line break at a DBCS (double-wide character string), so that the line breaking rule is equivalent to SBCS strings. Expands tab characters. The default number of characters per tab is eight. Represents the GDI device conext. Saves the handle of the device context. Deletes this , and frees the memory allocated for it. Releases all resources used by this object. Calling Dispose allows the resources used by the object to be reallocated for other purposes. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Gets or [protected] sets the handle of the device context. A that indicates the handle of the device context. Returns the handle to a Windows device context. An System.IntPtr representing the handle of a device context. Releases the handle of a Windows device context. Selects an object into the specified device context(DC). The new object replaces the previous object of the same type. A that indicates the handle to the gdi object to be selected. Returns the handle of the previous gdi object of the same type. Note: When the handle of a gdi object is selected to , the properties of the gdi object can not changed and the gdi object can not be disposed. // // Paints a rectangle that is single black border and filled with white. // using (Pen pen = new SolidPen(Color.Black)) { using (Brush brush = new SolidBrush(Color.Wheat)) { DeviceContext dc = DeviceContext.Screen; IntPtr defaultPenHandle = dc.SelectObject(pen.Handle); IntPtr defaultBrushHandle = dc.SelectObject(brush.Handle); dc.PaintRectangle(new Rectangle(0, 0, 100, 100)); dc.SelectObject(defaultPenHandle); dc.SelectObject(defaultBrushHandle); } } Deletes a logical pen, brush, font, bitmap, region, or palette, freeing all system resources associated with the object. After the object is deleted, the specified handle is no longer valid. Handle to a logical pen, brush, font, bitmap, region, or palette. Do not delete a drawing object (pen or brush) while it is still selected into a DC. When a pattern brush is deleted, the bitmap associated with the brush is not deleted. The bitmap must be deleted independently. If the specified handle is not valid or is currently selected into a DC, it would throw a . Gets or sets the color of the background of the device context. A structure that indicates the color of the background of the device context. If the background mode is is , the background color is used to fill gaps between styled lines, gaps between hatched lines in brushes, and character cells. The background color is also used when converting bitmaps from color to monochrome and vice versa. Sets the color of the background of the device context. Returns the previous color of the background of the device context. If the background mode is is , the background color is used to fill gaps between styled lines, gaps between hatched lines in brushes, and character cells. The background color is also used when converting bitmaps from color to monochrome and vice versa. Gets or sets the color of the foreground of the device context. A structure that indicates the color of the foreground of the device context. The Color is used to draw the face of each character written by the TextOut and ExtTextOut functions. The Color is also used in converting bitmaps from color to monochrome and vice versa. Sets the color of the foreground of the device context. Returns the previous color of the foreground of the device context. The Color is used to draw the face of each character written by the TextOut and ExtTextOut functions. The Color is also used in converting bitmaps from color to monochrome and vice versa. Gets or sets the background mode of the device context. A structure that indicates the background mode of the device context. The BackgroundMode affects the line styles for lines drawn using a pen created by the CreatePen GDI API function. The BackgroundMode does not affect lines drawn using a pen created by the ExtCreatePen GDI API function. value parameter can also be set to driver-specific values. GDI passes such values to the device driver and otherwise ignores them. Sets the background mode of the device context. Returns the previous foreground mode of the device context. The BackgroundMode affects the line styles for lines drawn using a pen created by the CreatePen GDI API function. The BackgroundMode does not affect lines drawn using a pen created by the ExtCreatePen GDI API function. backgroundMode parameter can also be set to driver-specific values. GDI passes such values to the device driver and otherwise ignores them. Saves the current state of this object and identifies the saved state with a handle. This methods returns a state that saves current state of this object. Restores the state of this object to the state represented by a handle. A that represents the state to which to restore this object. Gets or sets the drawing direction of the circle shapes. A indicates the circum-direction. The default direction is . The CircumDirection function specifies the direction in which the following functions draw: , Gets the drawing direction of the circle shapes. A indicates the circum-direction. The default direction is . The SetCircumDirection function specifies the direction in which the following functions draw: , Sets the drawing direction of the circle shapes. A indicates the circum-direction. A indicates the previous circum-direction. The default direction is . The SetCircumDirection function specifies the direction in which the following functions draw: , Get or set the current foreground mix mode.GDI uses the foreground mix mode to combine pens and interiors of filled objects with the colors already on the screen. The foreground mix mode defines how colors from the brush or pen and the colors in the existing image are to be combined. Specifies the mix mode. This parameter can be one of the following values. Mix modes define how GDI combines source and destination colors when drawing with the current pen. The mix modes are binary raster operation codes, representing all possible Boolean functions of two variables, using the binary operations AND, OR, and XOR (exclusive OR), and the unary operation NOT. The mix mode is for raster devices only; it is not available for vector devices. retrieves the foreground mix mode of the specified device context. The mix mode specifies how the pen or interior color and the color already on the screen are combined to yield a new color. If the function succeeds, the return value specifies the foreground mix mode. otherwise zero indicates failed. Sets the current foreground mix mode. GDI uses the foreground mix mode to combine pens and interiors of filled objects with the colors already on the screen. The foreground mix mode defines how colors from the brush or pen and the colors in the existing image are to be combined. Specifies the mix mode. This parameter can be one of the following values. If the function succeeds, the return value specifies the previous mix mode. otherwise, zero indicates failed Mix modes define how GDI combines source and destination colors when drawing with the current pen. The mix modes are binary raster operation codes, representing all possible Boolean functions of two variables, using the binary operations AND, OR, and XOR (exclusive OR), and the unary operation NOT. The mix mode is for raster devices only; it is not available for vector devices. Draws a line segment and an arc. The line segment is drawn from the position which is defined by radius and startAngle. The arc is drawn along the perimeter of a circle with the given radius and center. The length of the arc is defined by the given start and sweep angles. A specifies the center of the circle. A uint specifies the radius of the circle. This value must be positive. A float specifies the start angle, in degrees. A float specifies the sweep angle, in degrees, relative to the starting angle. The arc is drawn by constructing an imaginary circle around the specified center point with the specified radius. The starting point of the arc is determined by measuring counterclockwise from the x-axis of the circle by the number of degrees in the start angle. The ending point is similarly located by measuring counterclockwise from the starting point by the number of degrees in the sweep angle. If the sweep angle is greater than 360 degrees,the arc is swept multiple times. Draws an elliptical arc. A specifies the bounding rectangle. A specifies the ending point of the radial line defining the starting point of the arc. A specifies the ending point of the radial line defining the ending point of the arc. The rectangle specify the bounding rectangle. An ellipse formed by the specified bounding rectangle defines the curve of the arc. The arc extends in the current drawing direction from the point where it intersects the radial from the center of the bounding rectangle to the firstRadial point. The arc ends where it intersects the radial from the center of the bounding rectangle to the secondRadial point. If the starting point and ending point are the same, a complete ellipse is drawn. Draws the special line by using the current pen of the device context. A indicate the line start point A indicate the line end point Draws a series of line segments by connecting the points in the specified array. A array indicates the line segments. The lines are drawn from the first point through subsequent points by using the current pen. Windows 95/98/Me: DrawPolyLine cannot draw more than a certain number of points. The limit depends on the line width (that is, the width of the pen selected into the DC) Line width Maximum points allowed line width is 1 16K line width > 1 (that is, wideline) and device supports wideline 16K line width > 1 but device does not support wideline approximately 1360 (that is, approximately 16K/12) Any extra points are ignored. To draw a line with more points, divide the data into groups that have less than the maximum number of points and call the function for each group of points. Remember to connect the line segments. Draws one or more Bezier curves. An array of structures that contain the endpoints and control points of the curve(s). This value must be one more than three times the number of curves to be drawn, because each Bzier curve requires two control points and an endpoint, and the initial curve requires an additional starting point. DrawPolyBezier draws cubic Bzier curves by using the endpoints and control points specified by the points parameter. The first curve is drawn from the first point to the fourth point by using the second and third points as control points. Each subsequent curve in the sequence needs exactly three more points: the ending point of the previous curve is used as the starting point, the next two points in the sequence are control points, and the third is the ending point. The lines are drawn from the first point through subsequent points by using the current pen. Windows 95/98/Me: DrawPolyBezier cannot draw more than a certain number of points. The limit depends on the line width (that is, the width of the pen selected into the DC) Line width Maximum points allowed line width is 1 16K line width > 1 (that is, wideline) and device supports wideline 16K line width > 1 but device does not support wideline approximately 1360 (that is, approximately 16K/12) Any extra points are ignored. To draw a line with more points, divide the data into groups that have less than the maximum number of points and call the function for each group of points. Remember to connect the line segments. Gradient fills the rectangle with colors. structure that represents the start color of gradient. structure that represents the end color of gradient. structure that represents the rectangle to fill. A bool indicates the fill direction. false is horizontal direction. true is vertical direction. Gradient fills the triangle with specified colors. A indicates the color of the vertex1. A indicates the color of the vertex2. A indicates the color of the vertex3. A indicates the vertex1 of triangle. A indicates the vertex2 of triangle. A indicates the vertex3 of triangle. Fills the specified rectangle by using the specified brush. A indicates the handle of the brush. A indicate the rectangle to fill. When filling the specified rectangle, it does not include the rectangle's right and bottom sides. GDI fills a rectangle up to, but not including, the right column and bottom row, regardless of the current mapping mode. Fills the specified rectangle by using the current brush of device context. A indicates the rectangle to fill. A indicates the rester operation code. Not all devices support the this function. For more information, see the description of the RC_BITBLT capability in the GetDeviceCaps function. Fills the region by the specified brush. A indicates the handle of the brush. A indicates the handle of the region. Draws a border around the specified region by using the specified brush. A indicates the handle of the brush. A indicates the handle of the region. A that specifies the width of vertical brush strokes and the height of the horizontal brush strokes. Paints a chord (a region bounded by the intersection of an ellipse and a line segment, called a secant). The chord is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush. A indicates the bounds of the ellipse. A indicates the endpoint of the first radial. A indicates the endpoint of the second radial. The curve of the chord is defined by an ellipse that fits the specified bounding rectangle. The curve begins at the point where the ellipse intersects the first radial and extends counterclockwise to the point where the ellipse intersects the second radial. The chord is closed by drawing a line from the intersection of the first radial and the curve to the intersection of the second radial and the curve. If the starting point and ending point of the curve are the same, a complete ellipse is drawn. Paints an ellipse. The center of the ellipse is the center of the specified bounding rectangle. The ellipse is outlined by using the current pen and is filled by using the current brush. A indicates the bounding rectangle. Windows 95/98/Me: The sum of the coordinates of the bounding rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. The width of rectangle or the height of rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. Paints a pie-shaped wedge bounded by the intersection of an ellipse and two radials. The pie is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush. A indicates the bounds of the ellipse. A indicates the endpoint of the first radial. A indicates the endpoint of the second radial. The curve of the pie is defined by an ellipse that fits the specified bounding rectangle. The curve begins at the point where the ellipse intersects the first radial and extends counterclockwise to the point where the ellipse intersects the second radial. Paints a polygon consisting of two or more vertices connected by straight lines. The polygon is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush and polygon fill mode. A structures that specify the vertices of the polygon. The polygon is closed automatically by drawing a line from the last vertex to the first. Windows 95/98/Me: PaintPolygon cannot draw more than a certain number of points. The limit depends on the line width (that is, the width of the pen selected into the DC) Line width Maximum points allowed line width is 1 16K line width > 1 (that is, wideline) and device supports wideline 16K line width > 1 but device does not support wideline approximately 1360 (that is, approximately 16K/12) Any extra points are ignored. To draw a line with more points, divide the data into groups that have less than the maximum number of points and call the function for each group of points. Remember to connect the line segments. Draw the special rectangle by using the current pen of the device context and fill the rectangle by using the current brush of the device context. A indicate the rectangle to paint. The rectangle that is drawn excludes the bottom and right edges. If a is used, the dimensions of the rectangle are 1 pixel less in height and 1 pixel less in width. Paints a rectangle with rounded corners. The rectangle is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush. A indicates the rectangle to paint. An int indicates the width of the ellipse used to draw the rounded corners. An int indicates the height of the ellipse used to draw the rounded corners. Windows 95/98/Me: The sum of the coordinates of the bounding rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. The width of rectangle or the height of rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. Performs a bit-block transfer of the color data corresponding to a rectangle of pixels from the specified source object into a destination DeviceContext object. The source object. A indicates the destination rectangle. A indicates the upper-left corner of source rectangle. The width and height of source rectangle are same as the destination rectangle. A indicates the raster operation code. Copy only does clipping on the destination DC. If a rotation or shear transformation is in effect in the source device context, Copy will throw a . If other transformations exist in the source device context (and a matching transformation is not in effect in the destination device context), the rectangle in the destination device context is stretched, compressed, or rotated, as necessary. If the color formats of the source and destination device contexts do not match, the Copy function converts the source color format to match the destination format. When an enhanced metafile is being recorded, an error occurs if the source device context identifies an enhanced-metafile device context. it means a would be throw out. Not all devices support the Copy function. For more information, see the RC_BITBLT raster capability entry in the GetDeviceCaps function as well as the following: MaskBlt, PlgBlt, and StretchBlt. Performs a bit-block transfer of the color data corresponding to a rectangle of pixels from the specified source object into a destination DeviceContext object. The source object. A indicates the source rectangle. A indicates the destination rectangle. A indicates the raster operation code. Copy only does clipping on the destination DC. Displays bitmaps that have transparent or semitransparent pixels. The source object. A indicates the destination rectangle. A indicates the source rectangle. Displays bitmaps with a constant transparent value. The source object. A indicates the destination rectangle. A indicates the source rectangle. A byte indicates the constant alpha value of source. Inverts a rectangle in a window by performing a logical NOT operation on the color values for each pixel in the rectangle's interior. A structure that contains the logical coordinates of the rectangle to be inverted. On monochrome screens, InvertRectangle makes white pixels black and black pixels white. On color screens, the inversion depends on how colors are generated for the screen. Calling InvertRectangle twice for the same rectangle restores the display to its previous colors. Inverts the colors in the specified region. A indicates the handle of the region. On monochrome screens, the InvertRegion function makes white pixels black and black pixels white. On color screens, this inversion is dependent on the type of technology used to generate the colors for the screen. retrieves the red, green, blue (RGB) color value of the pixel at the specified coordinates. Specifies the coordinate, in logical units, of the pixel to be examined. The return value is the RGB value of the pixel. If the pixel is outside of the current clipping region, the return value is Color.Empty. Sets the pixel at the specified coordinates to the closest approximation of the specified color. The point must be in the clipping region and the visible part of the device surface. Specifies the color to be used to paint the point. Specifies the coordinate, in logical units, of the point to be set. Gets or sets the handle of the current clipping region of the device context. A that indicates the handle of the clipping region. Note: [Get] The getting region is a copy of the current region. [Set] Only a copy of the setting region is used. The region itself can be seted for any number of other device contexts or it can be deleted. To remove a device-context's clipping region, specify a IntPtr.Zero region handle. The coordinate of region will not be effected by current origin of page space. Combines the specified region with the current clipping region using the specified mode. A that indicates handle to the region to be selected. This handle can only be IntPtr.Zero when the CombineMode.Replace mode is specified A that indicates the combine mode. The coordinate of region will not be effected by current origin of page space. Moves the clipping region of a device context by the specified offsets. Specifies the number of logical units to move left or right. Specifies the number of logical units to move up or down. Clips the device context by the specified rectangle and operation mode. A indicates the rectangle. A indicates operation mode. The coordinate of rectangle is base one the space page. Clips the device context by the specified rectangle and operation mode. A indicates the rectangle. A indicates operation mode. The coordinate of rectangle is base one the space page. Retrieves the dimensions of the tightest bounding rectangle that can be drawn around the current visible area on the device. The visible area is defined by the current clipping region or clip path, as well as any overlapping windows. A indicates the dimensions, in logical units. Gets or sets a indicating whether use the world transform in this DC. A indicates the graphics mode. Gets or sets the world transform. An array of float that includes six elements. | M11, M12, 0 | | M21, M22, 0 | | Dx, Dy, 1 | The order is [M11, M12, M21, M22, Dx, Dy]. Notes: The length of the array must be six. Gets or sets the x-extent and y-extent of the current window for the device context. A indicates the x-extent and y-extent of the current window for the device context. Gets or sets the x-coordinates and y-coordinates of the window origin for the device context A indicates the x-coordinates and y-coordinates of the window origin for the device context. Modifies the window origin for a device context using the specified horizontal and vertical offsets. An int specifies the horizontal offset. An int specifies the vertical offset. Modifies the window for a device context using the ratios formed by the specified multiplicands and divisors. A int specifies the amount by which to multiply the current horizontal extent. A int specifies the amount by which to divide the current horizontal extent. A int specifies the amount by which to multiply the current vertical extent. A int specifies the amount by which to divide the current vertical extent. Gets or sets the mapping mode of the device context. A indicates the value of the mapping mode. Gets or sets the x-extent and y-extent of the current viewport for the device context. A indicates the x-extent and y-extent of the current viewport for the device context. Gets or sets the x-coordinates and y-coordinates of the viewport origin for the device context A indicates the x-coordinates and y-coordinates of the viewport origin for the device context. Modifies the viewport origin for a device context using the specified horizontal and vertical offsets. An int specifies the horizontal offset. An int specifies the vertical offset. Modifies the viewport for a device context using the ratios formed by the specified multiplicands and divisors. A int specifies the amount by which to multiply the current horizontal extent. A int specifies the amount by which to divide the current horizontal extent. A int specifies the amount by which to multiply the current vertical extent. A int specifies the amount by which to divide the current vertical extent. Gets the number of pixels per logical inch along the screen width. In a system with multiple display monitors, this value is the same for all monitors. Gets the number of pixels per logical inch along the screen height. In a system with multiple display monitors, this value is the same for all monitors. converts logical coordinates into device coordinates. The conversion depends on the mapping mode of the device context, the settings of the origins and extents for the window and viewport, and the world transformation. An array of structures. The x- and y-coordinates contained in each structure will be transformed. An array of structures indicate the point which is converted to Device coordinates converts device coordinates into logical coordinates. The conversion depends on the mapping mode of the device context, the settings of the origins and extents for the window and viewport, and the world transformation. An array of structures. The x- and y-coordinates contained in each structure will be transformed. An array of structures indicate the point which is converted to Logical coordinates Width, in millimeters, of the physical screen. Width, in pixels, of the screen. Height, in millimeters, of the physical screen. Height, in raster lines, of the screen. Gets or sets the text-alignment flags for this device context. A that specifies the text alignment. Sets the text-alignment flags for this device context. A that specifies the new text alignment. A that specifies the previous text alignment. Writes a character string at the specified location, using the currently selected font, background color, and text color. A string that saves the characters to be written. A that indicates the reference point that the system uses to align the string. Computes the width and height of the specified string of text. A string that saves a character string to be computed. If the function succeeds, the return value is the dimensions of the string in logical units. Retrieves the number of characters in a specified string that will fit within a specified space and fills an array with the text extent for each of those characters. A string for which extents are to be retrieved. Specifies the maximum allowable width, in logical units, of the formatted string. Receives a count of the maximum number of characters that will fit in the space specified by the maxExtent parameter. Pointer to an array of integers that receives partial string extents. Each element in the array gives the distance, in logical units, between the beginning of the string and one of the characters that fits in the space specified by the maxExtent parameter. This array must have at least as many elements as character count in text. The function fills the array with valid extents for as many characters as are specified by the fitCharNumber parameter. Receives the dimensions of the string, in logical units. Writes a character string at a specified location, expanding tabs to the values specified in an array of tab-stop positions. Text is written in the currently selected font, background color, and text color. A string that saves the characters to be written. A that indicates the reference point that the system uses to align the string. Pointer to an array containing the tab-stop positions. The tab stops must be sorted in increasing order; the smallest x-value should be the first item in the array. If this parameter is null, tabs are expanded to eight times the average character width. Specifies the x-coordinate of the starting position from which tabs are expanded. Returns the dimensions, of the string. The TabbedTextExtent method computes the width and height of a character string.If the string contains one or more tab characters, the width of the string is based upon the specified tab stops. The TabbedTextExtent method uses the currently selected font to compute the dimensions of the string. A string that saves a character string to be computed. An array containing the tab-stop positions, in device units. The tab stops must be sorted in increasing order; the smallest x-value should be the first item in the array. If the function succeeds, the value is the dimensions of the string in logical units. Else the value is Size.Empty. Retrun a value indictaes whether this function succeed or not. The TabbedTextExtent method computes the width and height of a character string.If the string contains one or more tab characters, the width of the string is based upon the specified tab stops. The TabbedTextExtent method uses the currently selected font to compute the dimensions of the string. A string that saves a character string to be computed. An array containing the tab-stop positions, in device units. The tab stops must be sorted in increasing order; the smallest x-value should be the first item in the array. If the function succeeds, the return value is the dimensions of the string in logical units. Ted changed this function's modifier as private in 2007.07.14, And provide a new interface fucntion. Specifies the amount of space the system should add to the break characters in a string of text. The space is added when an application calls the TextOut method. Specifies the total extra space, in logical units, to be added to the line of text. Specifies the number of break characters in the line. Gets or sets the current intercharacter spacing for the device context. Specifies the amount of extra space to be added to each character. Sets the current intercharacter spacing for the device context. Specifies the amount of extra space to be added to each character. Returns the previous intercharacter spacing. Draws formatted text in the specified rectangle. The string that specifies the text to be drawn. Contains the rectangle in which the text is to be formatted. Specifies the method of formatting the text. Draws formatted text in the specified rectangle. The string that specifies the text to be drawn. Contains the proposed size in which the text is to be formatted. Specifies the method of formatting the text. Represents a wrapper of the gid device context handle. The handle will not be released when RawDeviceContext is disposed. Initializes a new instance of class. An that indicates the handle of the device context. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the RawDeviceContext and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Represents a gdi device context that created by gdi+ Graphics. The Graphics will be locked, until the is disposed. Saves the gdi+ graphics. Gets the local cached Gdiplus . Initializes a new instance of class. A indicates the gdi+ graphics. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the GdiplusGraphicDeviceContext and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Represents a gdi device context coming directly from a window. Saves the window handle. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the handle of a window. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the WindowDeviceContext and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Represents a gdi device context coming directly from a control. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the control. Represents a gdi device context coming directly from the desktop. Initializes a new instance of the class. Represents a gdi device context coming directly from a gdi+ image. Saves the local cache. Gets the local cached image. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the gdi+ image. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the GdiplusGraphicDeviceContext and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Represents a gdi device context that used as a dummy. Initializes a new instance of the class. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the GdiplusGraphicDeviceContext and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Represents a gdi device context coming directly another device context. It has the same format as the another device context. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the handle of a window. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the WindowDeviceContext and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Represents a GDI font object. Indicates the static default Gdi font. Gets the default of the control. The default of the control. Indicates the DPIs for 96DPI(Small font) or 120DPI(Big font). Gets the screen the DPIs for 96DPI(Small font) or 120DPI(Big font). The DPIs of current . Indicates the graphics unit for converting between and . A Indicates the style. A string indicate the face name of the A byte value that specifies the character set that this An int indicate the height of this Saves the base information of this font. Initializes a new object from the specified Font object and special style Special from which is used to create new font A indicate the special style Initializes a new object from the specified Font object and special style Special from which is used to create new font The size of the new object. this is used to create a new from template font which is given by parameter Font, the parameter size show you a chance to redefine the . if you want to zoom , you can get the size from your template font, and multiply it with the zoom factor you expected, which a new size you will got, for example named new size variable newSize, then use this constructor to create new : Font newFont = new Font(templateFont, newSize); This is a simple WinForm program which draw two line text on special position of form. The first line, a string was drawed with winForm default font: Microsoft Sans Serif, 8.25pt, The second line, a sting was drawed with Font whic size is as twice as fiest line public class TestForm : Form { protected override void OnPaint(PaintEventArgs e) { base.OnPaint(e); IntPtr hDc = e.Graphics.GetHdc(); // create a font from default Form.Font (Microsoft Sans Serif, 8.25pt), size = 8.25 Gdi.Font font = new Gdi.Font(this.Font); IntPtr oldFont = SelectObject(hDc, font.Handle); string test1 = "1. This is drawing by GDI with GdiFont"; TextOut(hDc, 50, 50, test1, test1.Length); SelectObject(hDc, oldFont); // here I want to a font which size is as twice as current's Drawing.Gdi.Font font2 = new Drawing.Gdi.Font(font, 2 * font.Size); oldFont = SelectObject(hDc, font2.Handle); string test2 = "2. This is drawing by GDI with GdiFont"; TextOut(hDc, 50, 100, test2, test2.Length); font.Dispose(); font2.Dispose(); SelectObject(hDc, oldFont); e.Graphics.ReleaseHdc(hDc); } [DllImport("gdi32.dll", EntryPoint = "SelectObject")] public static extern IntPtr SelectObject( IntPtr hdc, IntPtr hObject ); [DllImport("gdi32.dll", EntryPoint = "TextOut")] public static extern int TextOut( IntPtr hdc, int x, int y, string lpString, int nCount ); } Initializes a new object using the specified font attributes. A string representation of the object for the new object. The size of the new object. Initializes a new object using the specified settings. A string representation of the object for the new object. The size of the new object. The enumeration to be applied to the new object. A Byte that specifies a GDI character set to use for this font. Initializes a new from a A LOGFONT indicate the font proerties Gets the face name of this object. A string representation of the face name of this object. Gets style information for this object. A indicate that contains style information for this object. Gets a value that indicates whether this Font object is bold. This property returns true if this Font object is bold; otherwise, false. Gets a value that indicates whether this Font object is italic. This property returns true if this Font object is italic; otherwise, false. Gets a value that indicates whether this Font object is underlined. This property returns true if this Font object is underlined; otherwise, false. Gets a value that indicates whether this Font object specifies a horizontal line through the font. This property is true if this Font object has a horizontal line through it; otherwise, false. Gets a byte value that specifies the character set that this Font object uses. A byte value that specifies the character set that this Font object uses. Gets the height of this Font object. The height of this Font object in current graphics units. Gets the size, in points, of this Font object. The size, in points, of this Font object. Gets basic information about this font. All sizes are specified in pixels. The basic information about this font. Creates an exact copy of this object. The object that this method creates. Initialize a new from a existed font handle A font handle that defines to instance the object. Creates a from existed handle A font handle that defines to create the object. A contains the font information Creates a new object from the specified object. The font is defined in .NET. This constructor creates a new object from a Gdiplus object. Creates a GDI+ .NET object from this object instance. A indicate the Gdi Font A object that this method creates. Represents the basic information about a physical font. Specifies the height (ascent + descent) of characters. Specifies the ascent (units above the base line) of characters. Specifies the descent (units below the base line) of characters. Specifies the amount of leading (space) inside the bounds set by the tmHeight member. Accent marks and other diacritical characters may occur in this area. The designer may set this member to zero. Specifies the amount of extra leading (space) that the application adds between rows. Since this area is outside the font, it contains no marks and is not altered by text output calls in either OPAQUE or TRANSPARENT mode. The designer may set this member to zero. Specifies the average width of characters in the font (generally defined as the width of the letter x). This value does not include the overhang required for bold or italic characters. Specifies the width of the widest character in the font. Specifies the weight of the font. Specifies the extra width per string that may be added to some synthesized fonts. When synthesizing some attributes, such as bold or italic, graphics device interface (GDI) or a device may have to add width to a string on both a per-character and per-string basis. Specifies the horizontal aspect of the device for which the font was designed. Specifies the vertical aspect of the device for which the font was designed. The ratio of the tmDigitizedAspectX and tmDigitizedAspectY members is the aspect ratio of the device for which the font was designed. Specifies the value of the first character defined in the font. Specifies the value of the last character defined in the font. Specifies the value of the character to be substituted for characters not in the font. Specifies the value of the character that will be used to define word breaks for text justification. Specifies an italic font if it is nonzero. Specifies an underlined font if it is nonzero. Specifies a strikeout font if it is nonzero. Specifies information about the pitch, the technology, and the family of a physical font. Specifies the character set of the font. The character set can be one of the following values. Represents a class that is used to builder some complex fonts. Saves the height of font. Saves the width of font. Saves the escapement of font. Saves the orientation of font. Saves the weight of font. Saves the italic of font. Saves the underline of font. Saves the strike out of font. Saves the char set of font. Saves the output percision of font. Saves clipping precision of font. Saves the quality of font. Saves the pitch of font. Saves the family of font. Saves the face name of font. Initialize a new from a A indicate the template Initialize a new from a A indicate the template Initialize a new A null-terminated string that specifies the typeface name of the font. The length of this string must not exceed 32 characters, including the terminating null character. The EnumFontFamiliesEx function can be used to enumerate the typeface names of all currently available fonts. If faceName is an empty string, GDI uses the first font that matches the other specified attributes. Specifies the family of the font Specifies the height, in logical units, of the font's character cell or character. The character height value (also known as the em height) is the character cell height value minus the internal-leading value. Specifies the angle, in tenths of degrees, between the escapement vector and the x-axis of the device. The escapement vector is parallel to the base line of a row of text. Specifies the average width, in logical units, of characters in the font. If width is zero, the aspect ratio of the device is matched against the digitization aspect ratio of the available fonts to find the closest match, determined by the absolute value of the difference. Specifies the weight of the font in the range 0 through 1000. For example, 400 is normal and 700 is bold. If this value is zero, a default weight is used. The following values are defined for convenience. Specifies an italic font if set to true. Specifies an underlined font if set to true. Specifies a strikeout font if set to true. Specifies the angle, in tenths of degrees, between each character's base line and the x-axis of the device. Specifies the character set. Specifies the output precision. The output precision defines how closely the output must match the requested font's height, width, character orientation, escapement, pitch, and font type. Specifies the clipping precision. The clipping precision defines how to clip characters that are partially outside the clipping region. It can be one or more of the following values. Specifies the output quality. The output quality defines how carefully the graphics device interface (GDI) must attempt to match the logical-font attributes to those of an actual physical font. Specifies the pitch of the font Initialize a new by special faceName and height A null-terminated string that specifies the typeface name of the font. The length of this string must not exceed 32 characters, including the terminating null character. The EnumFontFamiliesEx function can be used to enumerate the typeface names of all currently available fonts. If faceName is an empty string, GDI uses the first font that matches the other specified attributes. Specifies the height, in logical units, of the font's character cell or character. The character height value (also known as the em height) is the character cell height value minus the internal-leading value. Initialize a new by special faceName, family and height A null-terminated string that specifies the typeface name of the font. The length of this string must not exceed 32 characters, including the terminating null character. The EnumFontFamiliesEx function can be used to enumerate the typeface names of all currently available fonts. If faceName is an empty string, GDI uses the first font that matches the other specified attributes. Specifies the family of the font Specifies the height, in logical units, of the font's character cell or character. The character height value (also known as the em height) is the character cell height value minus the internal-leading value. Initialize a new by special faceName, family, height and fontStyle A null-terminated string that specifies the typeface name of the font. The length of this string must not exceed 32 characters, including the terminating null character. The EnumFontFamiliesEx function can be used to enumerate the typeface names of all currently available fonts. If faceName is an empty string, GDI uses the first font that matches the other specified attributes. Specifies the family of the font Specifies the height, in logical units, of the font's character cell or character. The character height value (also known as the em height) is the character cell height value minus the internal-leading value. A indicate the font style. Initialize a new by special faceName, family, height and fontStyle A null-terminated string that specifies the typeface name of the font. The length of this string must not exceed 32 characters, including the terminating null character. The EnumFontFamiliesEx function can be used to enumerate the typeface names of all currently available fonts. If faceName is an empty string, GDI uses the first font that matches the other specified attributes. Specifies the family of the font Specifies the height, in logical units, of the font's character cell or character. The character height value (also known as the em height) is the character cell height value minus the internal-leading value. Specifies the angle, in tenths of degrees, between the escapement vector and the x-axis of the device. The escapement vector is parallel to the base line of a row of text. A indicate the font style. Initialize a new by special faceName, family, height and fontStyle A null-terminated string that specifies the typeface name of the font. The length of this string must not exceed 32 characters, including the terminating null character. The EnumFontFamiliesEx function can be used to enumerate the typeface names of all currently available fonts. If faceName is an empty string, GDI uses the first font that matches the other specified attributes. Specifies the family of the font Specifies the height, in logical units, of the font's character cell or character. The character height value (also known as the em height) is the character cell height value minus the internal-leading value. A indicate the font style. Specifies the angle, in tenths of degrees, between each character's base line and the x-axis of the device. Initialize a new by special faceName, family, height and fontStyle A null-terminated string that specifies the typeface name of the font. The length of this string must not exceed 32 characters, including the terminating null character. The EnumFontFamiliesEx function can be used to enumerate the typeface names of all currently available fonts. If faceName is an empty string, GDI uses the first font that matches the other specified attributes. Specifies the family of the font Specifies the height, in logical units, of the font's character cell or character. The character height value (also known as the em height) is the character cell height value minus the internal-leading value. Specifies the angle, in tenths of degrees, between the escapement vector and the x-axis of the device. The escapement vector is parallel to the base line of a row of text. A indicate the font style. Specifies the angle, in tenths of degrees, between each character's base line and the x-axis of the device. Initialize a new by special faceName, family, height and fontStyle A null-terminated string that specifies the typeface name of the font. The length of this string must not exceed 32 characters, including the terminating null character. The EnumFontFamiliesEx function can be used to enumerate the typeface names of all currently available fonts. If faceName is an empty string, GDI uses the first font that matches the other specified attributes. Specifies the family of the font Specifies the height, in logical units, of the font's character cell or character. The character height value (also known as the em height) is the character cell height value minus the internal-leading value. Specifies the angle, in tenths of degrees, between the escapement vector and the x-axis of the device. The escapement vector is parallel to the base line of a row of text. A indicate the font style. Specifies the angle, in tenths of degrees, between each character's base line and the x-axis of the device. Specifies the pitch of the font Get or set the height, in logical units, of the font's character cell or character. The character height value (also known as the em height) is the character cell height value minus the internal-leading value. An int indicate the height if value larger than zero, the font mapper transforms this value into device units and matches it against the cell height of the available fonts. if value equal zero, the font mapper uses a default height value when it searches for a match. if value less than zero, the font mapper transforms this value into device units and matches its absolute value against the character height of the available fonts. Get or set the average width, in logical units, of characters in the font. If value is zero, the aspect ratio of the device is matched against the digitization aspect ratio of the available fonts to find the closest match, determined by the absolute value of the difference. An int indicate the average width Get or set the angle, in tenths of degrees, between the escapement vector and the x-axis of the device. The escapement vector is parallel to the base line of a row of text. An int indicate the escapement vector Windows NT/2000/XP: When the graphics mode is set to GM_ADVANCED, you can specify the escapement angle of the string independently of the orientation angle of the string's characters. When the graphics mode is set to GM_COMPATIBLE, Escapement specifies both the escapement and orientation. You should set Escapement and Orientation to the same value. Windows 95/98/Me: The Escapement member specifies both the escapement and orientation. You should set Escapement and Orientation to the same value. Get or set the angle, in tenths of degrees, between each character's base line and the x-axis of the device. Get or set the weight of the font. An int indicate the weight of font, which is in the range 0 through 1000. For example, 400 is normal and 700 is bold. If this value is zero, a default weight is used. Get or set bool which indicate whether the font is italic A bool which indicate whether the font is italic Get or set bool which indicate whether the font is underline An bool which indicate whether the font is underline Get or set bool which indicate whether the font is strikeout An bool which indicate whether the font is strikeout Get or set the CharSet of font A byte indicate the charset of font Fonts with other character sets may exist in the operating system. If an application uses a font with an unknown character set, it should not attempt to translate or interpret strings that are rendered with that font. Get or set the output precision. The value defines how closely the output must match the requested font's height, width, character orientation, escapement, pitch, and font type. Get or set the clipping precision. The value defines how to clip characters that are partially outside the clipping region. Get or set the output quality. The value defines how carefully the graphics device interface (GDI) must attempt to match the logical-font attributes to those of an actual physical font. Get or set the pitch of the font. The value describe the look of a font in general way with corporated with Family Get or set the font family The value describe the look of a font in a general way. Get or set a null-terminated string that specifies the typeface name of the font. A string value specifies the typeface name of the font. The length of this string must not exceed 32 characters, including the terminating null character. If value is an empty string, GDI uses the first font that matches the other specified attributes. Creates an exact copy of this object. The object that this method creates. Create a new from current A istance which its properties provided by Create a new istance which its properties provided by A instance would be create Zoom current with zoom factor Indicate the Font you want to zoom Indicate the zoom factor A with special size Create a bold from current font Indicate the Font you want to bold A with bold style Create a FontBuilder frome the native logical font. A native logical font. The FontBuilder. Create a native logical font frome the FontBuilder. A FontBuilder. The native logical font. Represents the weight values of logical font. Indicates the default font weight. Indicates the thin font weight. Indicates the extra light font weight. Indicates the ultra light font weight. Indicates the light font weight. Indicates the normal font weight. Indicates the regular font weight. Indicates the medium font weight. Indicates the semi bold font weight. Indicates the demi bold font weight. Indicates the bold font weight. Indicates the extra bold font weight. Indicates the ultra bold font weight. Indicates the heavy font weight. Indicates the black font weight. Represents the out precision of logical font. The output precision defines how closely the output must match the requested font's height, width, character orientation, escapement, pitch, and font type. Specifies the default font mapper behavior. This value is not used by the font mapper, but it is returned when raster fonts are enumerated. Not used. This value is not used by the font mapper, but it is returned when TrueType, other outline-based fonts, and vector fonts are enumerated. Instructs the font mapper to choose a TrueType font when the system contains multiple fonts with the same name. Instructs the font mapper to choose a Device font when the system contains multiple fonts with the same name. Instructs the font mapper to choose a raster font when the system contains multiple fonts with the same name. Instructs the font mapper to choose from only TrueType fonts. If there are no TrueType fonts installed in the system, the font mapper returns to default behavior. This value instructs the font mapper to choose from TrueType and other outline-based fonts. [This is a no document value.] Instructs the font mapper to choose from only PostScript fonts. If there are no PostScript fonts installed in the system, the font mapper returns to default behavior. Represents the clip precision of font. The clipping precision defines how to clip characters that are partially outside the clipping region. Specifies default clipping behavior. Not used. Not used by the font mapper, but is returned when raster, vector, or TrueType fonts are enumerated. Not used.

When this value is used, the rotation for all fonts depends on whether the orientation of the coordinate system is left-handed or right-handed.

If not used, device fonts always rotate counterclockwise, but the rotation of other fonts is dependent on the orientation of the coordinate system.

Not used. Windows XP SP1: Turns off font association for the font. Note that this flag is not guaranteed to have any effect on any platform after Windows Server 2003. Windows 2000: Turns off font association for the font. This is identical to DefaultDisable, but it can have problems in some situations; the recommended flag to use is DefaultDisable. You must specify this flag to use an embedded read-only font. Represents the quality of font. The output quality defines how carefully the graphics device interface (GDI) must attempt to match the logical-font attributes to those of an actual physical font. It can be one of the following values. Appearance of the font does not matter. Appearance of the font is less important than when Draft is used. For GDI raster fonts, scaling is enabled, which means that more font sizes are available, but the quality may be lower. Bold, italic, underline, and strikeout fonts are synthesized if necessary. Character quality of the font is more important than exact matching of the logical-font attributes. For GDI raster fonts, scaling is disabled and the font closest in size is chosen. Although the chosen font size may not be mapped exactly when Proof is used, the quality of the font is high and there is no distortion of appearance. Bold, italic, underline, and strikeout fonts are synthesized if necessary. Font is never antialiased. Font is always antialiased if the font supports it and the size of the font is not too small or too large. If set, text is rendered (when possible) using ClearType antialiasing method. [No document] Represents the pitch of font. The two low-order bits specify the pitch of the font and can be one of the following values. Indicates the default pitch. Indicates the fixed pitch. Indicates the variable pitch. Represents the family of logical font Describe the look of a font in a general way. Use default font. Fonts with variable stroke width (proportional) and with serifs. MS Serif is an example. Fonts with variable stroke width (proportional) and without serifs. MS Sans Serif is an example. Fonts with constant stroke width (monospace), with or without serifs. Monospace fonts are usually modern. Pica, Elite, and CourierNew are examples. Fonts designed to look like handwriting. Script and Cursive are examples. Novelty fonts. Old English is an example. Represents the common base of the gid objects. Saves the handle of this gdi object. Initializes a new instance of the class. Returns a handle to this GdiObject object. A Windows handle to this GdiObject object. Deletes this GdiObject, and frees the memory allocated for it. Releases all resources used by this GdiObject object. Calling Dispose allows the resources used by the GdiObject object to be reallocated for other purposes. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the GdiObject and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Creates an exact copy if this GdiObject object. The GdiObject object that this method creates. Represents a wrapper of the gid object handle. The handle will not be released when RawGdiObject is disposed. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the handle object gdi object. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the GdiObject and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Creates an exact copy if this GdiObject object. The GdiObject object that this method creates. Represents the gdi graphics object that handles the gdi device context. A static used to measure geometries. Saves the device context. Used to lock the device context. To to be runed in Dispose method. Gets the of the . A that indicates the device context of the . Initializes a new instance of the class. An DeviceContext indicates the device context. Deletes this Graphics, and frees the memory allocated for it. Releases all resources used by this object. Calling Dispose allows the resources used by the object to be reallocated for other purposes. This method does not return a value. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. This method does not return a value. Gets the structure that bounds the clipping region of this object. This property indicates a structure that represents a bounding rectangle for the clipping region of this object. How to judge a Grphics's clip is empty? bool isClipEmpty = (graphics.ClipBound == Rectangle.Empty); Gets the region of the current clipping region of graphics. A that indicates the clipping region. Note: The getting region is a copy of the current region. The coordinate of region will not be effected by current origin of page space. Updates the clip region of this object to the intersection of the current clip region and the specified structure. structure to intersect with the current clip region. This method assigns to the Clip property of this object the area represented by the intersection of the current clip region and the rectangle specified by the rectangle parameter. Updates the clip region of this object to the intersection of the current clip region and the specified object. object to intersect with the current region. This method assigns to the Clip property of this object the area represented by the intersection of the current clip region and the region specified by the region parameter. Updates the clip region of this object to exclude the area specified by a structure. structure that specifies the rectangle to exclude from the clip region. This method excludes the area specified by the rectangle parameter from the current clip region and assigns the resulting area to the Clip property of this object. Updates the clip region of this object to exclude the area specified by a object. object that specifies the region to exclude from the clipping region. This method excludes the area specified by the region parameter from the current clip region and assigns the resulting area to the Clip property of this object. Sets the clipping region of this object to the result of the Replace combining the current clip region and the specified object. object to combine. Only a copy of the setting region is used. The region itself can be seted for any number of other device contexts or it can be deleted. Sets the clipping region of this object to the rectangle specified by a structure. structure that represents the new clip region. Only a copy of the setting region is used. The region itself can be seted for any number of other device contexts or it can be deleted. Sets the clipping region of this object to the result of the specified operation combining the current clip region and the rectangle specified by a structure. structure to combine. Member of the enumeration that specifies the combining operation to use. Only a copy of the setting region is used. The region itself can be seted for any number of other device contexts or it can be deleted. Sets the clipping region of this object to the result of the specified operation combining the current clip region and the specified object. object to combine. Member of the enumeration that specifies the combining operation to use. Only a copy of the setting region is used. The region itself can be seted for any number of other device contexts or it can be deleted. Translates the clipping region of this Graphics object by specified amounts in the horizontal and vertical directions. An int indicates the x component of the translation. An int indicates the y component of the translation. Draw the special line by using given pen A indicate the pen used to draw A indicate the line start point A indicate the line end point Draws one Bezier curves on current Graphics. A indicate the pen used to draw A indicate the Bezier curves start point A indicate the first control point of the Bezier curves A indicate the second control point of the Bezier curves A indicate the line end point Draw the special rectangle by using the given pen A indicate the draw-style of rectangle A indicate the rectangle to draw Draw the special ellipse by using the given pen A indicate the draw-style of ellipse A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse Windows 95/98/Me: The sum of the coordinates of the bounding rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. The width of rectangle or the height of rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. Draw the special arc by using the given pen A indicate the draw-style of arc A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse A float specifies the start angle, in degrees. A float specifies the sweep angle, in degrees, relative to the starting angle. The arc is drawn by constructing an imaginary circle around the specified center point with the specified radius. The starting point of the arc is determined by measuring counterclockwise from the x-axis of the circle by the number of degrees in the start angle. The ending point is similarly located by measuring counterclockwise from the starting point by the number of degrees in the sweep angle. If the sweep angle is greater than 360 degrees,the arc is swept multiple times. Draw the special lines on current Graphics by using the special pen. A indicate the draw-style of lines A array indicate the line segments. Draw the special Bezier curve on current Graphics by using the special pen. A indicate the draw-style of Bezier curve An array of structures that contain the endpoints and control points of the curve(s). This value must be one more than three times the number of curves to be drawn, because each Bzier curve requires two control points and an endpoint, and the initial curve requires an additional starting point. DrawBeziers draws cubic Bzier curves by using the endpoints and control points specified by the points parameter. The first curve is drawn from the first point to the fourth point by using the second and third points as control points. Each subsequent curve in the sequence needs exactly three more points: the ending point of the previous curve is used as the starting point, the next two points in the sequence are control points, and the third is the ending point. Any extra points are ignored. To draw a line with more points, divide the data into groups that have less than the maximum number of points and call the function for each group of points. Remember to connect the line segments. Fill the specified rectangle by using the given brush. A object used to fill the rectangle. A structure that specifies the rectangle to be filled. Fill the special ellipse on current Grapchis by using special brush A object used to fill the ellipse. A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse Windows 95/98/Me: The sum of the coordinates of the bounding rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. The width of rectangle or the height of rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. Fill the special pie on current Grapchis by using special brush A object used to fill the pie. A structure that defines the boundaries of the pie. A float value that defines the start angle of the pie. A float value that defines the sweep angle of the pie. The curve begins at the point where the ellipse intersects the first radial and extends counterclockwise to the point where the ellipse intersects the second radial. Fill the special polygon on current Grapchis by using special brush A object used to fill the polygon. A structures that specify the vertices of the polygon. Fill the special region on current Grapchis by using special brush A object used to fill the region. A indicate the region which be filled Performs a bit-block transfer of the color data corresponding to a rectangle of pixels from the specified source object into a destination Graphics object. A indicate the source Graphics object A indicates the destination rectangle. A indicates the upper-left corner of source rectangle. The width and height of source rectangle are same as the destination rectangle. Copy only does clipping on the destination DC. If a rotation or shear transformation is in effect in the source device context, Copy will throw a . If other transformations exist in the source device context (and a matching transformation is not in effect in the destination device context), the rectangle in the destination device context is stretched, compressed, or rotated, as necessary. If the color formats of the source and destination device contexts do not match, the Copy function converts the source color format to match the destination format. When an enhanced metafile is being recorded, an error occurs if the source device context identifies an enhanced-metafile device context. it means a would be throw out. Not all devices support the Copy function. For more information, see the RC_BITBLT raster capability entry in the GetDeviceCaps function as well as the following: MaskBlt, PlgBlt, and StretchBlt. Performs a bit-block transfer of the color data corresponding to a rectangle of pixels from the specified source object into a destination Graphics object. The source object. A indicates the source rectangle. A indicates the destination rectangle. Copy only does clipping on the destination DC. Creates a new gdi+ graphics from a gdi graphics. A indicates the gdi graphics. Returns a that indicates the gdi+ graphics. Creates a new gdi graphics from a gdi+ graphics. A indicates the gdi+ graphics. Returns a that indicates the gdi graphics. Creates a new gdi graphics from a gdi+ graphics. This method kept the clip region, but remains low performance, when is set to true. A indicates the gdi+ graphics. A bool indicate whether kept original clip region of gdip graphics Returns a that indicates the gdi graphics. Moves the specified rectangle by offfset values. An int indicates the x offset. An int indicates the y offset. A structure that indicates the rectangle to be moved. [The current implementation is a time consumer, to be re-write.] Changes the origin of the coordinate system by prepending the specified translation to the transformation matrix of this object. x component of the translation. y component of the translation. Gets or sets the world transformation for this object. This property specifies a object that represents the world transformation for this object. A indicate the page unit of current A float A indicate the window extent A indicate the viewport extent A indicate the mapping mode of current graphics A sentinel for current graphics unit if the device context has changed the WindowExtent, WindowOrigin, ViewportExtent, return false; otherwise return true, as there is no changed. Sync the cache with its device context Gets or sets the unit of measure used for page coordinates in this object. One of the values. Gets or sets the scaling between world units and page units for this object. This property specifies a value for the scaling between world units and page units for this object. Gets the horizontal resolution of this Graphics object. This property indicates a value, in dots per inch, for the horizontal resolution supported by this Graphics object. Gets the vertical resolution of this Graphics object. This property indicates a value, in dots per inch, for the vertical resolution supported by this Graphics object. Draws the specified text string at the specified location with the specified Brush and Font objects using the formatting attributes of the specified StringFormat object. String to draw. Font object that defines the text format of the string. Brush object that determines the color and texture of the drawn text. Point structure that specifies the upper-left corner of the drawn text. StringFormat object that specifies formatting attributes, such as line spacing and alignment, that are applied to the drawn text. Draws the specified text string in the specified rectangle with the specified Brush and Font objects using the formatting attributes of the specified StringFormat object. String to draw. Font object that defines the text format of the string. Brush object that determines the color and texture of the drawn text. Rectangle structure that specifies the location of the drawn text. StringFormat object that specifies formatting attributes, such as line spacing and alignment, that are applied to the drawn text. Measures the specified string when drawn with the specified Font object and formatted with the specified StringFormat object. String to measure. Font object defines the text format of the string. Size structure that specifies the maximum layout area for the text. StringFormat object that represents formatting information, such as line spacing, for the string. The MeasureString method is designed for use with individual strings and includes a small amount of extra space before and after the string to allow for overhanging glyphs. Also, the DrawString method adjusts glyph points to optimize display quality and might display a string narrower than reported by MeasureString. A helper methods used to get the coordinate TextFormat of the StringFormat Specifies the unit of measure for the given data. Specifies the complex unit as the unit of measure. Specifies the world coordinate system unit as the unit of measure. Specifies the unit of measure of the display device. Typically pixels for video displays, and 1/100 inch for printers. Specifies a device pixel as the unit of measure. Specifies a printer's point (1/72 inch) as the unit of measure. Specifies the inch as the unit of measure. Specifies the document unit (1/300 inch) as the unit of measure. Specifies the millimeter as the unit of measure. Represents the base class of all kinds of pen This is an abstract class, which is just details that it's ranged to Pen. To use a , you should create an instance from its inherited class. Refer to , Draws the special line on deviceContext by using the current pen A indicate the drawing target A indicate the line start point A indicate the line end point Draws one Bezier curves on deviceContext. A indicate the drawing target A indicate the Bezier curves start point A indicate the first control point of the Bezier curves A indicate the second control point of the Bezier curves A indicate the line end point Draw the special rectangle on deviceContext by using the current pen. A indicate the drawing target A indicate the rectangle to draw. The rectangle that is drawn excludes the bottom and right edges. That means the dimensions of the rectangle are 1 pixel less in height and 1 pixel less in width. Draw the special ellipse on deviceContext by using the current pen. A indicate the drawing target A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse Windows 95/98/Me: The sum of the coordinates of the bounding rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. The width of rectangle or the height of rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. Draw the special arc on deviceContext by using the current pen. A indicate the drawing target A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse A float specifies the start angle, in degrees. A float specifies the sweep angle, in degrees, relative to the starting angle. The arc is drawn by constructing an imaginary circle around the specified center point with the specified radius. The starting point of the arc is determined by measuring counterclockwise from the x-axis of the circle by the number of degrees in the start angle. The ending point is similarly located by measuring counterclockwise from the starting point by the number of degrees in the sweep angle. If the sweep angle is greater than 360 degrees,the arc is swept multiple times. Draw the special lines on deviceContext by using the current pen. A indicate the drawing target A array indicate the line segments. Draws one or more Bezier curves. A indicate the drawing target An array of structures that contain the endpoints and control points of the curve(s). This value must be one more than three times the number of curves to be drawn, because each Bzier curve requires two control points and an endpoint, and the initial curve requires an additional starting point. DrawBeziers draws cubic Bzier curves by using the endpoints and control points specified by the points parameter. The first curve is drawn from the first point to the fourth point by using the second and third points as control points. Each subsequent curve in the sequence needs exactly three more points: the ending point of the previous curve is used as the starting point, the next two points in the sequence are control points, and the third is the ending point. Any extra points are ignored. To draw a line with more points, divide the data into groups that have less than the maximum number of points and call the function for each group of points. Remember to connect the line segments. Represents the dash style of the pen. End caps are round. End caps are flat. End caps are square. Represents the join style of the pen. Joins are beveled. Joins are mitered when they are within the current limit set by the SetMiterLimit function. If it exceeds this limit, the join is beveled. Joins are round. Represents the line style of the standard pen. Specifies a line consisting of dashes. Specifies a line consisting of dots. Specifies a line consisting of a repeating pattern of dash-dot. The pen has alternating dashes and double dots. This style is valid only when the pen width is one or less in device units. Represents the pen which always draw with solid line. Inherited from . An would always draw with Solid line Saves the color of the pen. Saves the width of the pen. Saves the cap style of the pen. Saves the join style of the pen Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the color of the pen. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the color of the pen. An int indicates the width of the pen. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the color of the pen. An int indicates the width of the pen. A indicates the cap style of the pen. A indicates the join style of the pen. Gets or sets the color of the pen. A indicates the color of the pen. Gets or sets the width of the pen. An int indicates the width of the pen. Gets or sets the end caps style of the pen. Gets or sets the join style of the pen. Create the pen by specified styles. An is the handle of the pen. Create a pen that has the same style as this pen. A that has the same style as this pen. Reprents the custom pen that has the styles defined by user. Saves the color of the pen. Saves the width of the pen. Saves the cap style of the pen. Saves the join style of the pen Saves the style of the line which is painted Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicate the style of lines be drawed A indicates the color of the pen. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicate the style of lines be drawed A indicates the color of the pen. An int indicates the width of the pen. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicate the style of lines be drawed A indicates the color of the pen. An int indicates the width of the pen. A indicates the cap style of the pen. A indicates the join style of the pen. Gets or sets the color of the pen. A indicates the color of the pen. Gets or sets the width of the pen. An int indicates the width of the pen. Gets or sets the end caps style of the pen. Gets or sets the join style of the pen. Gets or sets the style of the pen. A indicates the line style of the pen. Create the pen by specified styles. An is the handle of the pen. Create a pen that has the same style as this pen. A that has the same style as this pen. Reprents the custom pen that has custom style which is defined by a pattern. Get a int[] indicate the pattern of The create by this pattern is not same as . the PatternPen would always draw solid one pixel and zero pixel space. Using this style to paint a rectangle, polygon, polyline, it will be lost some pixels at each the corner. Get a int[] indicate the pattern of The create by this pattern is not same as which is . the PatternPen would always draw solid three pixel and one pixel space. Using this style to paint a rectangle, polygon, polyline, it will be lost some pixels at each the corner. Get a int[] indicate the pattern of The create by this pattern is not same as which is . the PatternPen would always draw solid one pixel and one pixel space. Using this style to paint a rectangle, polygon, polyline, it will be lost some pixels at each the corner. Get a int[] indicate the pattern of The create by this pattern is not same as which is . the PatternPen would always draw solid three pixel, and one pixel space, then one pixel solid, one pixel space. Using this style to paint a rectangle, polygon, polyline, it will be lost some pixels at each the corner. Get a int[] indicate the pattern of The create by this pattern is not same as which is . the PatternPen would always draw solid three pixel, and one pixel space, then one pixel solid, one pixel space, one pixel solid, one pixel space. Using this style to paint a rectangle, polygon, polyline, it will be lost some pixels at each the corner. A int[] indiacte a 9_3 pattern ('111111111000') for A int[] indiacte a 3_1 pattern ('1110''1110') for A int[] indiacte a 9_3_3_3 pattern. ('111111111000111000') for A int[] indiacte a 3_3_3_3_9_3 pattern. ('111000111000111111111000') for Saves the color of the pen. Saves the width of the pen. Saves the cap style of the pen. Saves the join style of the pen Saves the pattern of the pen. Initializes a new instance of the class. A int array indicate the pattern of current pen A indicates the color of the pen. Initializes a new instance of the class. A array indicates the pattern of the pen. A indicates the color of the pen. An int indicates the width of the pen. Initializes a new instance of the class. A array indicates the pattern of the pen. A indicates the color of the pen. An int indicates the width of the pen. A indicates the cap style of the pen. A indicates the join style of the pen. Gets or sets the color of the pen. A indicates the color of the pen. Gets or sets the width of the pen. An int indicates the width of the pen. Gets or sets the end caps style of the pen. Gets or sets the join style of the pen. Gets or sets the pattern of the pen. An array indicates the pattern of the pen. Create the pen by specified styles. An is the handle of the pen. Create a pen that has the same style as this pen. A that has the same style as this pen. Reprents the hollow pen that would draw nothing. Initializes a new instance of the class. Create the pen by specified styles. An is the handle of the pen. Create a pen that has the same style as this pen. A that has the same style as this pen. Defines a brush that has a solid color. This pen has the same funtion as in painting. The width of is always 1. This pen will not consume gdi handle. In other word, the Handle property is always IntPtr.Zero. So it can not be used to . Saves the data of the property. Initializes a new instance of the class. A indicates the color of the pen. Gets or sets the color of the pen. A indicates the color of the pen. Create the pen by specified styles. An is the handle of the pen. Creates an exact copy if this ColorPen object. The ColorPen object that this method creates. Draws the special line on deviceContext by using the current pen A indicate the drawing target A indicate the line start point A indicate the line end point Draws one Bezier curves on deviceContext. A indicate the drawing target A indicate the Bezier curves start point A indicate the first control point of the Bezier curves A indicate the second control point of the Bezier curves A indicate the line end point Draw the special rectangle on deviceContext by using the current pen. A indicate the drawing target A indicate the rectangle to draw. The rectangle that is drawn excludes the bottom and right edges. That means the dimensions of the rectangle are 1 pixel less in height and 1 pixel less in width. Draw the special ellipse on deviceContext by using the current pen. A indicate the drawing target A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse Windows 95/98/Me: The sum of the coordinates of the bounding rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. The width of rectangle or the height of rectangle cannot exceed 32,767. Draw the special arc on deviceContext by using the current pen. A indicate the drawing target A indicates the bounding rectangle which center is the center of ellipse A float specifies the start angle, in degrees. A float specifies the sweep angle, in degrees, relative to the starting angle. The arc is drawn by constructing an imaginary circle around the specified center point with the specified radius. The starting point of the arc is determined by measuring counterclockwise from the x-axis of the circle by the number of degrees in the start angle. The ending point is similarly located by measuring counterclockwise from the starting point by the number of degrees in the sweep angle. If the sweep angle is greater than 360 degrees,the arc is swept multiple times. Draw the special lines on deviceContext by using the current pen. A indicate the drawing target A array indicate the line segments. Draws one or more Bezier curves. A indicate the drawing target An array of structures that contain the endpoints and control points of the curve(s). This value must be one more than three times the number of curves to be drawn, because each Bzier curve requires two control points and an endpoint, and the initial curve requires an additional starting point. DrawBeziers draws cubic Bzier curves by using the endpoints and control points specified by the points parameter. The first curve is drawn from the first point to the fourth point by using the second and third points as control points. Each subsequent curve in the sequence needs exactly three more points: the ending point of the previous curve is used as the starting point, the next two points in the sequence are control points, and the third is the ending point. Any extra points are ignored. To draw a line with more points, divide the data into groups that have less than the maximum number of points and call the function for each group of points. Remember to connect the line segments. Pens for all the standard colors. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. A system-defined object with a width of 1. A object set to a system-defined color. Each property of the SystemPens class is a object that is the color of a Windows display element and that is a width of 1. Gets a object that is the color of the active window's border. A object that is the color of the active window's border. Gets a object that is the color of the active window's title bar. A object that is the color of the active window's title bar. Gets a object that is the color of the text in the active window's A object that is the color of the text in the active window's Gets a object that is the color of the application workspace. A object that is the color of the application workspace. Gets a object that is the face color of a 3-D element. A object that is the face color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the highlight color of a 3-D element. A object that is the highlight color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the shadow color of a 3-D element. A object that is the shadow color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the face color of a 3-D element A object that is the face color of a 3-D element Gets a object that is the shadow color of a 3-D element. A object that is the shadow color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the dark shadow color of a 3-D element. A object that is the dark shadow color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the light color of a 3-D element. A object that is the light color of a 3-D element. Gets a object that is the highlight color of a 3-D A object that is the highlight color of a 3-D Gets a object that is the color of text in a 3-D A object that is the color of text in a 3-D Gets a object that is the color of the desktop. A object that is the color of the desktop. Gets a object that is the lightest color in the color gradient of an active window's title bar. A object that is the lightest color in the color gradient of an active window's title bar. Gets a object that is the lightest color in the color gradient of an inactive window's title bar. A object that is the lightest color in the color gradient of an inactive window's title bar. Gets a object that is the color of dimmed text. A object that is the color of dimmed text. Gets a object that is the color of the background of selected items. A object that is the color of the background of selected items. Gets a object that is the color of the text of selected items. A object that is the color of the text of selected items. Gets a object that is the color used to designate a hot-tracked item. A object that is the color used to designate a hot-tracked item. Gets a object that is the color of an inactive window's border. A object that is the color of an inactive window's border. Gets a object that is the color of the background of an inactive window's title bar. A object that is the color of the background of an inactive window's title bar. Gets a object that is the color of the text in an inactive window's title bar. A object that is the color of the text in an inactive window's title bar. Gets a object that is the color of the background of a ToolTip. A object that is the color of the background of a ToolTip. Gets a object that is the color of the text of a ToolTip. A object that is the color of the text of a ToolTip. Gets a object that is the color of a menu's background. A object that is the color of a menu's background. Gets a object that is the color of the background of a menu bar. A object that is the color of the background of a menu bar. Gets a object that is the color used to highlight menu items when the menu appears as a flat menu. A object that is the color used to highlight menu items when the menu appears as a flat menu. Gets a object that is the color of a menu's text. A object that is the color of a menu's text. Gets a object that is the color of the background of a scroll bar. A object that is the color of the background of a scroll bar. Gets a object that is the color of the background in the client area of a window. A object that is the color of the background in the client area of a window. Gets a object that is the color of a window frame. A object that is the color of a window frame. Gets a object that is the color of the text in the client area of a window. A object that is the color of the text in the client area of a window. A data package save the data of a object. Saves the region data. Initializes a new instance of the class. An array of the byte value that saves raw data of the object. Gets the region data. An array of the byte value that saves raw data of the object. Represent the interior of a graphics shape composed of rectangles. A region is scalable because its coordinates are specified in world coordinates. On a drawing surface, however, its interior is dependent on the size and shape of the pixels representing it. An application can use regions to clamp the output of drawing operations. The window manager uses regions to define the drawing area of these regions are called clipping regions. An application can also use regions in hit-testing operations, such as checking whether a point or a rectangle intersects a region. An application can fill a region by using a object. This class uses the Win32 GDI API's for handling regions. The GDI+ version class just seems to be buggy and too slow. Initializes a new object. This constructor initializes a new object with infinite interior. Initializes a new object from the specified structure. A structure that defines the interior of the new object. This method creates a new object with a rectangular interior. The interior is defined by the rectangle parameter. Initializes a new object from the object. A data package save the data of a object. A newly created Windows region handle. Create a new region from existed region handle A that indicats the handle of the gdi region. Creates a Windows region handle using the specified structure. A structure. A newly created Windows region handle. Retieves the rectangle information that makes up this instance of the object. A byte array holding the region information. Gets a structure that represents a rectangle that bounds this object. A structure that represents the bounding rectangle for this object. Updates the specified rectangle with the region in this object using the specified mode. The structure to process. A region operation. (RGN_XOR, RGN_AND, RGN_DIFF, RGN_COPY, RGN_NOT) Updates the specified region with the region in this object using the specified mode. A Windows region handle to process. A region operation. (RGN_XOR, RGN_AND, RGN_DIFF, RGN_COPY, RGN_NOT) Updates this object to contain the portion of the specified structure that does not intersect with this object. The structure to complement this object. Updates this object to contain the portion of the specified Region object that does not intersect with this Region object. The object to complement this Region object. Updates this object to the intersection of itself with the specified structure. The structure to intersect with this object. Updates this object to the intersection of itself with the specified Region object. The object to intersect with this Region object. Updates this object to the portion of its interior that does not intersect with the specified structure. The structure to exclude from this object. Updates this object to the portion of its interior that does not intersect with the specified Region object. The object to exclude from this Region object. Updates this object to the union of itself and the specified structure. The structure to unite with this object. Updates this object to the union of itself and the specified Region object. The object to unite with this Region object. Updates this object to the union minus the intersection of itself with the specified strcuture. The structure to XOR with this object. Updates this object to the union minus the intersection of itself with the specified Region object. The object to XOR with this Region object. Tests whether the specified structure is contained within this object. The structure to test. This method returns true when point is contained within this object; otherwise, false. Tests whether any portion of the specified structure is contained within this object. The structure to test. This method returns true when any portion of rectangle is contained within this object; otherwise, false. Tests whether this object has an empty interior. This method returns true if the interior of this object is empty; otherwise, false. Initializes this object to an empty interior. This method does not return a value. Offsets the coordinates of this object by the specified amount. The amount to offset this object horizontally. The amount to offset this object vertically. Tests whether the specified object is identical to this Region object. The object to test. This method returns true if the interior of region region is identical to the interior of this region; otherwise, false. Creates an exact copy if this object. The object that this method creates. A indicate the matrix for transforming this region Get or set the transform matrix Get a handle which is being transformed to this Region object. A Windows handle to this Region object. Get a handle to this Region object Returns an array of structures that approximate this object. A object to be scaned. An array of structures that approximate this object. Create a new gdi region that is same as the gdi+ region. A object that indicates the gdi+ region. A object that indicates the new gdi region. Creates a new gdi+ object from the gdi object. A object that indicates the new gdi region. A object that indicates the gdi+ region. Creates a rectangular with rounded corners. A structure that defines the interior of the new object. Specifies the width of the ellipse used to create the rounded corners in logical units. Specifies the height of the ellipse used to create the rounded corners in logical units. A indicates the region with rounded corners. Create a ellipse region. A that just contains the ellipse. A indicates the ellipse region Create a pie region. A structure that defines the boundaries of the pie. A float value that defines the start angle of the pie. A float value that defines the sweep angle of the pie. A indicates the pie region. Implementation. 6 5---------7 | | | 4 | ---|--- | 0 | | | 3---------1 2 Creates a chord region (a region bounded by the intersection of an ellipse and a line segment, called a secant). A indicates the bounds of the ellipse. A float specifies the start angle, in degrees. A float specifies the sweep angle, in degrees, relative to the starting angle. A indicates the chord region. Create a polygons region from the point array which defines the vertices of the polygon. A array that defines the vertices of the polygon. This method creates a new object with a polygon interior interior. The interior is defined by the polygonPoints parameter. Create a polygons region from the point array which defines the vertices of the polygon. A array that defines the vertices of the polygon. Indicates the poly fill mode is "alternate" or "winding" This method creates a new object with a polygon interior interior. The interior is defined by the polygonPoints parameter. Create a polygons region handle from the point array which defines the vertices of the polygon. A array that defines the vertices of the polygon. Indicates the poly fill mode is "alternate" or "winding" This method creates a new object with a polygon interior interior. The interior is defined by the polygonPoints parameter. Specifies the display and layout information for text strings. No any flags. Only entire lines are laid out in the formatting rectangle. By default layout continues until the end of the text, or until no more lines are visible as a result of clipping, whichever comes first. Note that the default settings allow the last line to be partially obscured by a formatting rectangle that is not a whole multiple of the line height. To ensure that only whole lines are seen, specify this value and be careful to provide a formatting rectangle at least as tall as the height of one line. Shows string on one or more lines. Disables wrapping of text between lines when formatting within a rectangle. This flag is implied when a point is passed instead of a rectangle, or when the specified rectangle has a zero line length. Breaks words. Lines are automatically broken between words if a word would extend past the edge of the pecified rectangle. A carriage return-line feed sequence also breaks the line. Specifies that text is right to left. Specifies that text is vertical. Overhanging parts of glyphs, and unwrapped text reaching outside the formatting rectangle are allowed to show. By default all text and glyph parts reaching outside the formatting rectangle are clipped. Expands tab characters. The default number of characters per tab is eight. Specifies the alignment of a text string relative to its layout rectangle. Specifies that text is aligned in the center of the layout rectangle. Specifies that text is aligned far from the origin position of the layout rectangle. In a left-to-right layout, the far position is right. In a right-to-left layout, the far position is left. Specifies the text be aligned near the layout. In a left-to-right layout, the near position is left. In a right-to-left layout, the near position is right. Specifies the type of display for hot-key prefixes that relate to text. No hot-key prefix. Display the hot-key prefix. Do not display the hot-key prefix. Specifies how to trim characters from a string that does not completely fit into a layout shape. Specifies no trimming. Specifies that the text is trimmed to the nearest character. Specifies that text is trimmed to the nearest word. Specifies that the text is trimmed to the nearest character, and an ellipsis is inserted at the end of a trimmed line. Specifies that text is trimmed to the nearest word, and an ellipsis is inserted at the end of a trimmed line. The center is removed from trimmed lines and replaced by an ellipsis. The algorithm keeps as much of the last slash-delimited segment of the line as possible. Specifies the unit of the tab stops or offset. The unit of the tab stops or offset is base on logical point of the display surface. The unit of the tab stops or offset are base on the character number. Encapsulates text layout information (such as alignment and line spacing), display manipulations (such as ellipsis insertion and national digit substitution) and OpenType features. Many common formats are provided through the enumeration. StringFormat objects can be changed. Saves the data of the property. Saves the data of the property. Saves the data of the property. Saves the data of the property. Saves the data of the property. Saves the data of the tab info. Saves the data of the tab info. Saves the data of the tab info. Initializes a new object. Initializes a new object with the specified enumeration. The enumeration for the new object. Initializes a new object with the specified and enumeration. A that represents the horizontal alignment. A that represents the vertical alignment. The enumeration for the new object. Initializes a new object from the specified existing StringFormat object. The object from which to initialize the new StringFormat object. Gets or sets text alignment information. A StringAlignment enumeration that specifies text alignment information. Gets or sets the line alignment. A StringAlignment enumeration that represents the line alignment. Gets or sets a StringFormatFlags enumeration that contains formatting information. A StringFormatFlags enumeration that contains formatting information. Gets or sets the HotkeyPrefix object for this StringFormat object. The HotkeyPrefix object for this StringFormat object. Gets or sets the StringTrimming enumeration for this StringFormat object. A StringTrimming enumeration that indicates how text drawn with this StringFormat object is trimmed when it exceeds the edges of the layout rectangle. Gets the tab stops for this StringFormat object. The number of spaces between the beginning of a text line and the first tab stop. The unit of the tab stops and offset. An array of distances (in number of spaces) between tab stops. Sets tab stops for this StringFormat object. The number of spaces between the beginning of a line of text and the first tab stop. An array of distances (in number of spaces) between tab stops. The unit of the tab stops and offset. Creates a copy of the object. Returns a copy of the object. Specifies the order for matrix transform operations. Matrix transform operations are not necessarily commutative. The order in which they are applied is important. The new operation is applied after the old operation. The new operation is applied before the old operation. The TransformMatrix class contains the transform info for transforming between world-space and page-space in GDI. TransformMatrix is a 3x3 matrix, but we only use M11, M12, M21, M22, Dx and Dy. | M11, M12, 0 | | M21, M22, 0 | | Dx, Dy, 1 | Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class. Gets or sets the value of M11. Gets or sets the value of M12. Gets or sets the value of M21. Gets or sets the value of M22. Gets or sets the value of Dx. Gets or sets the value of Dy. Applies a clockwise rotation of the specified angle about the origin to this Matrix object. A float indicates the clockwise angle. Applies the specified translation vector (offsetX and offsetY) to this Matrix object by prepending the translation vector. The x value by which to translate this Matrix. The y value by which to translate this Matrix. Applies the specified scale vector to this Matrix object by prepending the scale vector. The value by which to scale this Matrix in the x-axis direction. The value by which to scale this Matrix in the y-axis direction. Applies the specified shear vector to this Matrix object by prepending the shear transform. The horizontal shear factor. The vertical shear factor. Applies the x-axis reflecting to this Matrix object. Applies the y-axis reflecting to this Matrix object. Applies the slash reflecting to this Matrix object. Applies the backslash reflecting to this Matrix object. Applies a clockwise rotation of the specified angle about the origin to this Matrix object. A float indicates the clockwise angle. A enumeration that specifies the order (append or prepend) in which the rotation is applied to this Matrix object. Applies the specified translation vector (offsetX and offsetY) to this Matrix object by prepending the translation vector. The x value by which to translate this Matrix. The y value by which to translate this Matrix. A enumeration that specifies the order (append or prepend) in which the translation is applied to this Matrix object. Applies the specified scale vector to this Matrix object by prepending the scale vector. The value by which to scale this Matrix in the x-axis direction. The value by which to scale this Matrix in the y-axis direction. A enumeration that specifies the order (append or prepend) in which the scaling is applied to this Matrix object. Applies the specified shear vector to this Matrix object by prepending the shear transform. The horizontal shear factor. The vertical shear factor. A enumeration that specifies the order (append or prepend) in which the shearing is applied to this Matrix object. Applies the x-axis reflecting to this Matrix object. A enumeration that specifies the order (append or prepend) in which the reflection is applied to this Matrix object. Applies the y-axis reflecting to this Matrix object. A enumeration that specifies the order (append or prepend) in which the reflection is applied to this Matrix object. Applies the slash reflecting to this Matrix object. A enumeration that specifies the order (append or prepend) in which the reflection is applied to this Matrix object. Applies the backslash reflecting to this Matrix object. A enumeration that specifies the order (append or prepend) in which the reflection is applied to this Matrix object. Transform a object to a new object. A object indicats the old value. A object indicats the new value. x' = x * M11 + y * M21 + Dx y' = x * M12 + y * M22 + Dy Inverse transform a object to a new object. A object indicats the old value. A object indicats the new value. x = ((x' - Dx) * M22 - (y' - Dy) * M21) / (M11 * M22 - M12 * M21) y = ((y' - Dy) * M11 - (x' - Dx) * M12) / (M11 * M22 - M12 * M21) Applies a clockwise rotation to this Matrix object around the point specified in the point parameter, and by prepending the rotation A class that represents the center of the rotation. The angle (extent) of the rotation. Applies the reflecting by speical line to this Matrix object. A object indicate the start point of the line. A object indicate the end point of the line. Applies the specified scale vector to this Matrix object by prepending the scale vector at speical point. A class that represents the center of the scale. The value by which to scale this Matrix in the x-axis direction. The value by which to scale this Matrix in the y-axis direction. Applies a clockwise rotation to this Matrix object around the point specified in the point parameter, and by prepending the rotation A class that represents the center of the rotation. The angle (extent) of the rotation. A enumeration that specifies the order (append or prepend) in which the rotation is applied to this Matrix object. Applies the reflecting by speical line to this Matrix object. A object indicate the start point of the line. A object indicate the end point of the line. A enumeration that specifies the order (append or prepend) in which the reflection is applied to this Matrix object. Applies the specified scale vector to this Matrix object by prepending the scale vector at speical point. A class that represents the center of the scale. The value by which to scale this Matrix in the x-axis direction. The value by which to scale this Matrix in the y-axis direction. A enumeration that specifies the order (append or prepend) in which the scaling is applied to this Matrix object. Explicit convert a TransformMatrix object to a System.Drawing.Drawing2D.Matrix object. A value that will be convert to a object. A object indicates the converted object. Explicit convert a System.Drawing.Drawing2D.Matrix object to a TransformMatrix object. A object that will be convert to a object. A value indicates the converted object. Gets the unit matrix. Defines a class the represents the coordinate concept in mathematics. Coordinate: Any of a set of two or more numbers used to determine the position of a point, line, curve, or plane in a space of a given dimension with respect to a system of lines or other fixed reference. Indicates a new instance of the class. A float value indicate the value of x-coordinate A float value indicate the value of x-coordinate Gets or sets the value of x-coordinate. A float value indicates the x-coordinate. Gets or sets the value of y-coordinate. A float value indicates the y-coordinate. Implicit convert a Point value to a Coordinate object. A value that will be convert to a object. A object indicates the converted object. The reason of providing implict converting is that Point and Coordinate is same conception in drawing. Implicit convert a Coordinate value to a Point object. A object that will be convert to a object. A value indicates the converted object. Represents a subclass window wrapper class. Indicates the window proc ptr of the attached window. Indicates the handle of the window. A bool value indicates whether or not re-register GC for finialize. Indicates the default window proc ptr of a window. Catches the window proc ptr for current window proc. Delegate to current window proc. Used to keep current object alive. Initializes a new instance of the class. Attaches handle to target window. The handle of target window. Releases the handle. Notifies that the handle is changed. Notifies inner exception occurs when processing window message. A object indicates the inner exception. Invokes the window procedure associated with this window. A . that is associated with the current Windows message. Invokes the default window procedure associated with this window. A . that is associated with the current Windows message. Release the window handle. if obviously performs unsubclass operation; otherwise, . Remove attached subclass. WndProc callback that attached to the target window to performs subclass. An value indicates the handle of the target window. An value indicates the message ID. An value indicates the wParam for the windows message. An value indicates the lParam for the windows message. An value indicates the return value of processing the message. Gets the handle to the window represented by the . A handle to the window represented by the . Defines the native methods base on Gdi32 SDK. The NativeMethods class defines some basic data structures and constants, which is given in Gdi32 SDK. Defines the native methods base on Win32 SDK. The NativeMethods class defines some basic data structures and constants, which is given in Win32 SDK. The RECT structure defines the coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners of a rectangle. Specifies the x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of a rectangle. Specifies the y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of a rectangle. Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-right corner of a rectangle. Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-right corner of a rectangle. Constructs the RECT structure. Specifies the x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of a rectangle. Specifies the y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of a rectangle. Specifies the x-coordinate of the lower-right corner of a rectangle. Specifies the y-coordinate of the lower-right corner of a rectangle. Constructs the RECT structure. Specifies the rectangle Adjusts the location of this rectangle by the specified amount. The horizontal offset. The vertical offset. Gets the width. Gets the height. Explicity convertes a to . A indicates the value of the . Returns a as the result of the converter. The LOGBRUSH structure defines the style, color, and pattern of a physical brush. It is used by the Windows CreateBrushIndirect and ExtCreatePen functions. Specifies the brush style. Specifies the color in which the brush is to be drawn. Specifies a hatch style. The meaning depends on the brush style defined by Style. The XFORM structure contains information for a world-space to page-space transformation. The constructor initializes a new instance of the XFORM structure. Add this methods in order to recudce the warning count of Fon32 class. The RGNDATA structure contains a header and an array of rectangles that compose a region. The rectangles are sorted top to bottom, left to right. They do not overlap. The members of this structure specify the type of region (whether it is rectangular or trapezoidal), the number of rectangles that make up the region, the size of the buffer that contains the rectangle structures, and so on. Specifies an arbitrary-size buffer that contains the RECT structures that make up the region. The RGNDATAHEADER structure describes the data returned by the GetRegionData function. Specifies the size, in bytes, of the header. Specifies the type of region. This value must be RDH_RECTANGLES. Specifies the number of rectangles that make up the region. Specifies the size of the buffer required to receive the RECT structure that specifies the coordinates of the rectangles that make up the region. If the size is not known, this member can be zero. Specifies a bounding rectangle for the region in logical units. The POINT structure defines the x and y coordinates of a point. Specifies the x-coordinate of the point. Specifies the y-coordinate of the point. Constructs the POINT structure. Specifies the x-coordinate of the point. Specifies the y-coordinate of the point. Constructs the POINT structure. A point whith another type. The SIZE structure specifies the width and height of a rectangle. Specifies the rectangle's width. The units depend on which function uses this. Specifies the rectangle's height. The units depend on which function uses this. Constructs the SIZE structure. Specifies the size's width. Specifies the size's height. The COMPOSITIONFORM structure contains style and position information for a composition window. Indicates position style. A POINT structure containing the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the composition window. A RECT structure containing the coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners of the composition window. Constructs the COMPOSITIONFORM structure. Specifies the position style. Specifies the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the composition window Specifies the coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners of the composition window. The CANDIDATEFORM structure contains style and position information for a composition window. Indicaes the index of the candidate form. Indicates position style. A POINT structure containing the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the composition window. A RECT structure containing the coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners of the composition window. Constructs the CANDIDATEFORM structure. Specifies the index of the candidate. Specifies the position style. Specifies the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the composition window Specifies the coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners of the composition window. The MSG structure contains message information from a thread's message queue. Handle to the window whose window procedure receives the message. Specifies the message identifier. Applications can only use the low word; the high word is reserved by the system. Specifies additional information about the message. The exact meaning depends on the value of the message member. Specifies additional information about the message. The exact meaning depends on the value of the message member. Specifies the time at which the message was posted. Specifies the cursor position, x direction in screen coordinates, when the message was posted. Specifies the cursor position, y direction in screen coordinates, when the message was posted. The NCCALCSIZEPARAMS structure contains information that an application can use while processing the WM_NCCALCSIZE message to calculate the size, position, and valid contents of the client area of a window. The rectangle contains the new coordinates of a window that has been moved or resized. The rectangle contains the coordinates of the window before it was moved or resized. The rectangle contains the coordinates of the client area of a window before it was moved or resized. Points to a WINDOWPOS structure that contains the size and position values specified in the operation that caused the window to be moved or resized. The PAINTSTRUCT structure contains information for an application. This information can be used to paint the client area of a window owned by that application. Handle to the display DC to be used for painting. Specifies whether the background must be erased.This value is nonzero if the application should erase the background. The application is responsible for erasing the background if a window class is created without a background brush. For more information, see the description of the hbrBackground member of the WNDCLASS structure. Specifies a left value of rectangle that specifies the upper left and lower right corners of the rectangle in which the painting is requested, in device units relative to the upper-left corner of the client area. Specifies a top value of rectangle that specifies the upper left and lower right corners of the rectangle in which the painting is requested, in device units relative to the upper-left corner of the client area. Specifies a right value of rectangle that specifies the upper left and lower right corners of the rectangle in which the painting is requested, in device units relative to the upper-left corner of the client area. Specifies a bottom value of rectangle that specifies the upper left and lower right corners of the rectangle in which the painting is requested, in device units relative to the upper-left corner of the client area. Reserved; used internally by the system. Reserved; used internally by the system. Reserved; used internally by the system. Reserved; used internally by the system. Reserved; used internally by the system. Reserved; used internally by the system. The WINDOWPOS structure contains information about the size and position of a window. Handle to the window. Specifies the position of the window in Z order (front-to-back position). Specifies the position of the left edge of the window. Specifies the position of the top edge of the window. Specifies the window width, in pixels Specifies the window height, in pixels. Specifies the window position. The TEXTMETRIC structure contains basic information about a physical font. All sizes are specified in logical units; that is, they depend on the current mapping mode of the display context. Specifies the height (ascent + descent) of characters. Specifies the ascent (units above the base line) of characters. Specifies the descent (units below the base line) of characters. Specifies the amount of leading (space) inside the bounds set by the tmHeight member. Accent marks and other diacritical characters may occur in this area. The designer may set this member to zero. Specifies the amount of extra leading (space) that the application adds between rows. Since this area is outside the font, it contains no marks and is not altered by text output calls in either OPAQUE or TRANSPARENT mode. The designer may set this member to zero. Specifies the average width of characters in the font (generally defined as the width of the letter x). This value does not include the overhang required for bold or italic characters. Specifies the width of the widest character in the font. Specifies the weight of the font. Specifies the extra width per string that may be added to some synthesized fonts. When synthesizing some attributes, such as bold or italic, graphics device interface (GDI) or a device may have to add width to a string on both a per-character and per-string basis. Specifies the horizontal aspect of the device for which the font was designed. Specifies the vertical aspect of the device for which the font was designed. The ratio of the tmDigitizedAspectX and tmDigitizedAspectY members is the aspect ratio of the device for which the font was designed. Specifies the value of the first character defined in the font. Specifies the value of the last character defined in the font. Specifies the value of the character to be substituted for characters not in the font. Specifies the value of the character that will be used to define word breaks for text justification. Specifies an italic font if it is nonzero. Specifies an underlined font if it is nonzero. Specifies a strikeout font if it is nonzero. Specifies information about the pitch, the technology, and the family of a physical font. Specifies the character set of the font. The character set can be one of the following values. The TRACKMOUSEEVENT structure contains information for TraceMouseEvent function. Specifies the structure size, in bytes. Specifies the services requested. Specifies a handle to the window to track. Specifies the hover time-out (if TME_HOVER was specified in dwFlags), in milliseconds. The constructor initializes a new instance of the DRAWTEXTPARAMS structure. Specifies the services requested. Specifies a handle to the window to track. Specifies the hover time-out, in milliseconds. The RECONVERTSTRING structure defines the strings for IME reconversion. It is the first item in a memory block that contains the strings for reconversion. Specifies the size of this structure and the memory block it heads. Specifies the version number. Must be zero. Specifies the length of the string that contains the composition string. Specifies the offset from the start position of this structure. Specifies the length of the string that will be the composition string. Specifies the offset of the string that will be the composition string. Specifies the length of the string that is related to the target clause in the composition string. Specifies the offset of the target string. Defines animation parameters for the BP_PAINTPARAMS structure used by BeginBufferedPaint The size, in bytes, of this structure. Flag that describes the characteristics of the animation. The following value is the only one currently defined. BPAF_NONCLIENT Indicates that the device context (DC) is a window DC instead of a client DC, so that painting is allowed in the non-client area of the window. A member of the BP_ANIMATIONSTYLE enumeration that states animation options. Length of the animation, in milliseconds. Defines paint operation parameters BeginBufferedPaint function. The size, in bytes, of this structure. One or more of the following values. BPPF_ERASE: Initialize the buffer to ARGB = {0, 0, 0, 0} during BeginBufferedPaint. BPPF_NOCLIP: Do not apply the clip region of the target device context (DC) to the double buffer. If this flag is not set and if the target DC is a window DC, then clipping due to overlapping windows is applied to the double buffer. BPPF_NONCLIENT: A non-client DC is being used. Pointer to exclusion RECT structure. This rectangle is excluded from the clipping region. May be NULL for no exclusion rectangle. Pointer to BLENDFUNCTION structure, which controls blending by specifying the blending functions for source and destination bitmaps. If NULL, the source buffer is copied to the destination with no blending. Define the buffer format. Compatible bitmap. Device-independent bitmap. Top-down device-independent bitmap. Top-down monochrome device-independent bitmap. Define the animation style. No animation Linear fade animation Cubic fade animation Sinusoid fade animation A NULL-terminated ANSI character-set character string containing a carriage return and a linefeed character at the end of each line. A device-dependent bitmap. A "metafile picture" based on the old metafile support of Windows. A memory block containing data in the Microsoft "Symbolic Link" format. A memory block containing data in the Data Interchange Format (DIF). A memory block containing data in the Tag Image File Format (TIFF). A memory block containing text data (similar to CF_TEXT) but using the OEM character set. A memory block defining a device-independent bitmap. A handle to a color palette. Used in conjunction with the pen extensions to Windows. Multimedia data in the Resource Interchange File Format. A sound (waveform) file. A memory block containing Unicode text. A handle to an enhanced metafile supported under the 32-bit versions of Windows. Allocates fixed memory. The return value is a pointer. Allocates movable memory. Memory blocks are never moved in physical memory, but they can be moved within the default heap. The return value is a handle to the memory object. To translate the handle into a pointer, use the GlobalLock function. This value cannot be combined with GMEM_FIXED. Initializes memory contents to zero. Combines GMEM_MOVEABLE and GMEM_ZEROINIT. Combines GMEM_FIXED and GMEM_ZEROINIT. The WindowProc function is an application-defined function that processes messages sent to a window. The WNDPROC type defines a pointer to this callback function. WindowProc is a placeholder for the application-defined function name. Handle to the window. Specifies the message. Specifies additional message information. The contents of this parameter depend on the value of the parameter. Specifies additional message information. The contents of this parameter depend on the value of the parameter. Windows Class styles. Windows Message. Saves the value of WM_MOUSEENTER. The WM_MOUSEENTER messsage registered by .NET framework. Register a window message for notify the control not lost focus. Set the LParam of this message to Not zero to notify window to prevent all focus message (WM_SETFOCUS, WM_KILLFOCUS) Set the LParam of this message to zero to notify window to process all focus message. This message is registered for prevent the focus message when SizeGrip is mouse dragged to resize frame size. Windows message is registered for notifing the control prevent process deactivate message. The DRAWTEXTPARAMS structure contains extended formatting options for the DrawTextEx method. Specifies the structure size, in bytes. Specifies the size of each tab stop, in units equal to the average character width. Specifies the left margin, in units equal to the average character width. Specifies the right margin, in units equal to the average character width. Receives the number of characters processed by DrawTextEx, including white-space characters. The number can be the length of the string or the index of the first line that falls below the drawing area. Note that DrawTextEx always processes the entire string if the DT_NOCLIP formatting flag is specified. The constructor initializes a new instance of the DRAWTEXTPARAMS structure. Specifies the size of each tab stop. Specifies the left margin. Specifies the right margin. Saves the value of WM_MSIME_RECONVERT. The WM_MSIME_RECONVERT messsage registered by .NET framework. Saves the value of WM_MSIME_RECONVERT. The WM_ATOK_RECONVERT messsage registered by ATOK. Defines the unsafe native methods base on Gdi32 API library. The UnsafeNativeMethods class defines functions, which is given in Gdi32 SDK. Defines the unsafe native methods base on Win32 API library. The UnsafeNativeMethods class defines functions, which is given in Win32 SDK. The DeleteDC Function. The DeleteObject Function. The Ellipse Function. The Pie Function. The GetPixel Function. The SetPixelV Function. The GetGraphicsMode Function. The SetGraphicsMode Function. The GetWorldTransform Function. The SetWorldTransform Function. The GetCharWidth32 Function. The GetTextMetrics Function. The GetRegionData Function. The FrameRgn Function. The SelectObject Function. The GetCurrentObject Function. The SetBKMode Function. The SetBkColor Function. The SetTextCharacterExtra Function. The TextOut Function. The GetBitmapBits Function The TabbedTextOut Function. The GetROP2 Function. The SetROP2 Function. The GetDCOrgEx Function. The SelectClipRgn Function. The GetClipRgn Function. The SetTextColor Function. The GetTextColor Function The Rectangle Function. The FillRgn Function. The StretchBlt Function. The ScaleViewportExtEx Function. The OffsetViewportOrgEx Function. The ScaleWindowExtEx Function. The OffsetWindowOrgEx Function. The Arc Function. The AngleArc Function The Chord Function The PolyBezier Function The PolyBezier Function The SetArcDirection Function. The GetArcDirection Function. The BeginPath Function. The BitBlt Function. The CloseFigure Function. The CombineRgn Function. The CreateBitmap Function. The CreateBitmap Function. The CreateBitmap Function. The CreateCompatibleBitmap Function. The CreateCompatibleDC Function. The CreateDIBPatternBrushPt Function. The CreateDIBSection Function. The CreateDIBSection Function. The CreateDIBitmap Function. The CreateFontIndirect Function. The CreateHalftonePalette Function. The CreatePatternBrush Function. The CreatePen Function. The CreateRectRgn Function. The CreateEllipticRgnIndirect Function. The CreatePolygonRgn Function. The CreateRoundRectRgn Function. The CreateSolidBrush Function. The CreateHatchBrush Function The CreateBrushIndirect Function The GetBitmapBits Function The MoveToEx Function The GetBkColor Function The GetBkMode Function The GetTextAlign Function The SetTextAlign Function The SetTextJustification Function The ExtTextOut Function The GetTextCharacterExtra Function The RegisterWindowMessage Function. The AdjustWindowRectEx Function. The CreateWindowEx Function. The SetWindowLong Function. The SetWindowPos Function. The SetWindowRgn Function. The SetWindowRgn Function. The IsWindowEnabled Function. The IsWindowVisible Function. The WindowFromPoint Function. The ShowWindow Function. The MoveWindow Function. The UpdateWindow Function. The IsWindow Function. The GetActiveWindow Function. The GetForegroundWindow Function. The EnableWindow Function. The GetTopWindow Function. The GetWindowDC Function. The GetDesktopWindow Function. The SetActiveWindow Function. The GetWindow Function. The DestroyWindow Function. The ChangeClipboardChain Function. The ClientToScreen Function. The CreateCaret Function. The DestroyCaret Function. The ShowCaret Function. The HideCaret Function. The GetCaretPos Function. The SetCaretPos Function. The GetCaretBlinkTime Function. The SetCaretBlinkTime Function. The DrawFocusRect Function. The DrawFrameControl Function. The DrawIcon Function. The DrawText Function. The DrawTextEx Function. The MsgWaitForMultipleObjects Function. The GetSysColor Function. The ScreenToClient Function. The BeginPaint Function. The EndPaint Function. The GetCapture Function. The GetClientRect Function. The GetCursorPos Function. The GetDC Function. The GetDoubleClickTime Function. The GetFocus Function. The GetKeyState Function. The GetTabbedTextExtent Function. The GetWindowRect Function. The FillRect Function. The InvertRect Function The InvalidateRect Function. The InvalidateRgn Function. The GetUpdateRect Function. The LoadCursor Function. The LoadCursor Function. The MapWindowPoints Function. The PeekMessage Function. The ReleaseCapture Function. The ReleaseDC Function. The SendMessage Function. The SendMessage Function. The PostMessage Function. The PostMessage Function. The SystemParametersInfo Function. The TranslateMessage Function. The SetCapture Function. The SetCursor Function. The SetFocus Function. The TrackMouseEvent Function. The SendMessageTimeOut Function. The SendMessageTimeOut Function. The keybd_event function synthesizes a keystroke. The SetParent Function. The ChildWindowFromPoint Function. The GetIconInfo Function The OpenClipboard function opens the clipboard for examination and prevents other applications from modifying the clipboard content. Handle to the window to be associated with the open clipboard. If this parameter is NULL, the open clipboard is associated with the current task. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. If the function fails, the return value is zero. The CloseClipboard function closes the clipboard. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. If the function fails, the return value is zero. The EmptyClipboard function empties the clipboard and frees handles to data in the clipboard. The function then assigns ownership of the clipboard to the window that currently has the clipboard open. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. If the function fails, the return value is zero. The SetClipboardData function places data on the clipboard in a specified clipboard format. Specifies a clipboard format. This parameter can be a registered format or any of the standard clipboard formats. Handle to the data in the specified format. This parameter can be NULL, indicating that the window provides data in the specified clipboard format (renders the format) upon request. If a window delays rendering, it must process the WM_RENDERFORMAT and WM_RENDERALLFORMATS messages. If the function succeeds, the return value is the handle to the data. If the function fails, the return value is NULL. The IsClipboardFormatAvailable function determines whether the clipboard contains data in the specified format. Specifies a standard or registered clipboard format. If the clipboard format is available, the return value is nonzero. If the clipboard format is not available, the return value is zero. The GetClipboardData function retrieves data from the clipboard in a specified format. The clipboard must have been opened previously. Specifies a clipboard format. If the function succeeds, the return value is the handle to a clipboard object in the specified format. If the function fails, the return value is NULL. The SetClipboardViewer function adds the specified window to the chain of clipboard viewers. Clipboard viewer windows receive a WM_DRAWCLIPBOARD message whenever the content of the clipboard changes. Handle to the window to be added to the clipboard chain. If the function succeeds, the return value identifies the next window in the clipboard viewer chain. If an error occurs or there are no other windows in the clipboard viewer chain, the return value is NULL. The GetTickCount Function. The IsDBCSLeadByte Function. The FormatMessage Function. The LocalFree Function. Retrieves the thread identifier of the calling thread. The return value is the thread identifier of the calling thread. Until the thread terminates, the thread identifier uniquely identifies the thread throughout the system. Maps a character string to a wide-character (Unicode) string. The character string mapped by this function is not necessarily from a multibyte character set. maps a wide-character string to a new character string. The new character string is not necessarily from a multibyte character set. The GlobalAlloc function allocates the specified number of bytes from the heap. Memory allocation attributes. Number of bytes to allocate. If the function succeeds, the return value is a handle to the newly allocated memory object. If the function fails, the return value is NULL. The GlobalFree function frees the specified global memory object and invalidates its handle. Handle to the global memory object. If the function succeeds, the return value is NULL. If the function fails, the return value is equal to a handle to the global memory object. The GlobalLock function locks a global memory object and returns a pointer to the first byte of the object's memory block. Handle to the global memory object. If the function succeeds, the return value is a pointer to the first byte of the memory block. If the function fails, the return value is NULL. The GlobalUnlock function decrements the lock count associated with a memory object that was allocated with GMEM_MOVEABLE. This function has no effect on memory objects allocated with GMEM_FIXED. Handle to the global memory object. If the memory object is still locked after decrementing the lock count, the return value is a nonzero value. If the function fails, the return value is zero. The GlobalSize function retrieves the current size of the specified global memory object, in bytes. Handle to the global memory object. If the function succeeds, the return value is the size of the specified global memory object, in bytes. If the specified handle is not valid or if the object has been discarded, the return value is zero. The OpenThemeData Function. The CloseThemeData Function. The IsThemeActive Function. The IsAppThemed Function. The IsThemePartDefined Function. The IsThemeBackgroundPartiallyTransparent Function. The DrawThemeBackground Function. The DrawThemeParentBackground Function. The GetThemeFilename Function. The GetCurrentThemeName Function. The GetThemeColor Function. The GetThemeBackgroundContentRect Function. The GetThemeRect Function. The GetThemePartSize Function. The BeginBufferedAnimation Function. Gets the duration for the specified transition. The BufferedPaintRenderAnimation Function. Renders the first frame of a buffered animation operation and starts the animation timer. Initialize the buffered paint API for the current thread. Uninitialize the buffered paint API for the current thread. Stops all buffered animations for the given window. Clears a specified rectangle in the buffer to ARGB = {0,0,0,0}. The AlphaBlend Function. The GradientFill Function. The GradientFill Function. Define the relation direction. A relation is a line link two terminal points: start point and end point.So the line has three directions: 1. from start to end; 2. from end to start; 3. from start to end or from end to start. The direction is form start to end. The direction is form end to start. The direction is bidirectional. Abstract a general relation. A realtion contains tow terminal points and direction Gets the start point. A object indicates the start point. Gets the end point. A object indicates the end point. Gets the relation direction. A indicates the direction. Define a relation collection. Indicates the constraints. Gets the constraints; A used to save the relations. Add a relation to the collection. The relation to be added. Remove the relation form the collection. The relation to be removed. Form the start set to end set. The start points set. return the end points set. Form the end set to the start set. The end points set. return the start points set. A general implementation for the interface. Indicates the start point. Indicates the end point. Indicates the direction. Constructor. A object indicates the start point. A object indicates the end point. Constructor. A object indicates the start point. A object indicates the end point. A RelationDirections indicates the direction. Gets the start. A object indicates the start point. Gets the end. A object indicates the end point. Gets the direction. A RelationDirections indicates the direction. Defines the IPattern interface. Pattern can match a word in the text. Match the text. The text. The start index. Return the matched length. Zero indicates no matched. Defines the ITextFilter interface. A text filter used to convert special text to other text. Filter the text. The text before filter. The text after filter. Defines the StringPattern class. used to match a pecial string in the text. Indicates the text. Constructor. The text. Match the text form start index. Defines the class. , used to match a repeated string in the text. minimum indicates the mininum repeated times. maximum indicates the maxinum repeated times. Indicates the repeated text. Indicates the minimum repeated times. Indicates the maximum repeated times. Constructor. The repeated text. The minimum repeated times. The maximum repeated times. Match the text form start index. The text. The start index. Return the matched length. Zero indicates no matched. Defines the class. , used to match the quatation bracket witch a pair of character. Indicates the escape; Indicates the leftSymbol. Indicates the leftSymbol. Indicates the leftSymbol Indicates if the text include the escape. Constructor. The escape. The left symbol. The right symbol. The text include symbol. Constructor. The escape. The left symbol. The right symbol. The text include symbol. The text include escape. Indicates if the text include the escape. Match the text form start index. The text. The start index. Return the matched length. Zero indicates no matched. Filter the text. The text before filtering. Returns the text after filtering. Defines the class. , used to match key work with a sub lexicon. Indicates the escape; Indicates the leftSymbol. Indicates the leftSymbol. Indicates the content. Constructor. The escape. The left symbol. The right symbol. The content. Match the text form start index. The text. The start index. Return the matched length. Zero indicates no matched. Filter the text. The text before filtering. Returns the text after filtering. Defines the class. , used to exclude special string form the text. As soon as it find the special string, it will throw a exception. Indicates the text. Indicates the message. Constructor. The text item used to exclude during the matching. The message if for throwing exception when find matched word in the text list. Match the text form start index. The text. The start index. Return the matched length. Zero indicates no matched. Defines a serial of matched switches. Use this enumeration can control the parse process. Indicates no switch. This pattern will be matched before other patterns and escape. Defines the class. Attached a id with a pattern. Constructor. The id. The pattern. Constructor. The id. The pattern. The switches. Indicates the id. Gets the id. A object used as id of the item. Indicates the pattern. Gets the pattern. A used to match. A used to control the matching. Gets the matching switches Defines the Lexicon class. Provides a tool, that can parse the key word form the text. Each key word take effecting by a IPattern interface, lexicon will try to find it by the order. The find is described by . You also can set the two kinds of relation ship: Repellency and Dependency. Repellency, make a pattern not take effecting, when a pattern has been matched. Dependency, make a pattern not take effecting, until a pattern has been matched. Defines the class. A match indicates the finding of special pattern during the parse processing. Defines the class. Indicates the literals between the two pattern finding. Indicates the next matched length. Indicates whether exit literals. Indicates the verion. Construtor. The owner. The orignal text. If exit escapes. Next matched length. Gets the text. A string indicates the matched text. Gets the ID. A object indicates the matched id. Gets the next match. A next . Indicates the owner. Indicates the start index. Indicates the length. Indicates the matched item. Indicates the previous match. Indicates the text. Construtor. The owner. The orignal text. Gets a value indicates whether is a sucess match. A bool indicates a sucess match. Gets the id. A object indicates the matched id. Gets the mathed text. A string indicates the matched text. Gets the next match. A next . Check the relation. The id need be checked. Return true, if the id is allow by the relation, otherwise, return false Defines the match collection. Used to saves and gets a serial matches. Constructor. The matches. Gets the match by special index. The item at index. Indicates the id of the literals. Indicates the assertion id. Indicates the esacpe char. Constructor. Constructor. The escape. The literals id. Indicates the escape. Indicates the version. Indicates the inner list. Indicates the literals id. Gets or sets the item by speical index. The at the index. Gets the item count. A int value indicates the count in the collection. Adds a item into the collection. The items. Remove a item form the collection. The item. Creates the first match. The text to be parsed. The first match. Indicates the repellency item set. Indicates the dependency item set. Gets the repellency set. A used to save the repellency relations. Gets the dependency set. A used to save the dependency relations. Gets the matches collection. The text to be parsed. A contains the all matches.